WO2021015291A1 - フルオロポリマーの製造方法、ポリテトラフルオロエチレン組成物及びポリテトラフルオロエチレン粉末 - Google Patents

フルオロポリマーの製造方法、ポリテトラフルオロエチレン組成物及びポリテトラフルオロエチレン粉末 Download PDF

Info

Publication number
WO2021015291A1
WO2021015291A1 PCT/JP2020/028764 JP2020028764W WO2021015291A1 WO 2021015291 A1 WO2021015291 A1 WO 2021015291A1 JP 2020028764 W JP2020028764 W JP 2020028764W WO 2021015291 A1 WO2021015291 A1 WO 2021015291A1
Authority
WO
WIPO (PCT)
Prior art keywords
group
preferable
carbon atoms
hydrocarbon
bead
Prior art date
Legal status (The legal status is an assumption and is not a legal conclusion. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation as to the accuracy of the status listed.)
Ceased
Application number
PCT/JP2020/028764
Other languages
English (en)
French (fr)
Japanese (ja)
Inventor
洋之 佐藤
丈人 加藤
市川　賢治
陽平 藤本
拓 山中
Current Assignee (The listed assignees may be inaccurate. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation or warranty as to the accuracy of the list.)
Daikin Industries Ltd
Original Assignee
Daikin Industries Ltd
Priority date (The priority date is an assumption and is not a legal conclusion. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation as to the accuracy of the date listed.)
Filing date
Publication date
Application filed by Daikin Industries Ltd filed Critical Daikin Industries Ltd
Priority to CN202410278602.7A priority Critical patent/CN118146601A/zh
Priority to US17/628,807 priority patent/US20220275119A1/en
Priority to CN202410278605.0A priority patent/CN118146427A/zh
Priority to EP20844000.8A priority patent/EP4006063A4/en
Priority to JP2021534095A priority patent/JP7201948B2/ja
Priority to CN202080050431.2A priority patent/CN114127131B/zh
Publication of WO2021015291A1 publication Critical patent/WO2021015291A1/ja
Anticipated expiration legal-status Critical
Priority to JP2022203665A priority patent/JP7560758B2/ja
Ceased legal-status Critical Current

Links

Classifications

    • C—CHEMISTRY; METALLURGY
    • C08—ORGANIC MACROMOLECULAR COMPOUNDS; THEIR PREPARATION OR CHEMICAL WORKING-UP; COMPOSITIONS BASED THEREON
    • C08F—MACROMOLECULAR COMPOUNDS OBTAINED BY REACTIONS ONLY INVOLVING CARBON-TO-CARBON UNSATURATED BONDS
    • C08F14/00—Homopolymers and copolymers of compounds having one or more unsaturated aliphatic radicals, each having only one carbon-to-carbon double bond, and at least one being terminated by a halogen
    • C08F14/18—Monomers containing fluorine
    • C08F14/26—Tetrafluoroethene
    • C—CHEMISTRY; METALLURGY
    • C08—ORGANIC MACROMOLECULAR COMPOUNDS; THEIR PREPARATION OR CHEMICAL WORKING-UP; COMPOSITIONS BASED THEREON
    • C08F—MACROMOLECULAR COMPOUNDS OBTAINED BY REACTIONS ONLY INVOLVING CARBON-TO-CARBON UNSATURATED BONDS
    • C08F214/00—Copolymers of compounds having one or more unsaturated aliphatic radicals, each having only one carbon-to-carbon double bond, and at least one being terminated by a halogen
    • C08F214/18—Monomers containing fluorine
    • C08F214/26—Tetrafluoroethene
    • C—CHEMISTRY; METALLURGY
    • C08—ORGANIC MACROMOLECULAR COMPOUNDS; THEIR PREPARATION OR CHEMICAL WORKING-UP; COMPOSITIONS BASED THEREON
    • C08F—MACROMOLECULAR COMPOUNDS OBTAINED BY REACTIONS ONLY INVOLVING CARBON-TO-CARBON UNSATURATED BONDS
    • C08F114/00—Homopolymers of compounds having one or more unsaturated aliphatic radicals, each having only one carbon-to-carbon double bond, and at least one being terminated by a halogen
    • C08F114/18—Monomers containing fluorine
    • C08F114/26—Tetrafluoroethene
    • C—CHEMISTRY; METALLURGY
    • C08—ORGANIC MACROMOLECULAR COMPOUNDS; THEIR PREPARATION OR CHEMICAL WORKING-UP; COMPOSITIONS BASED THEREON
    • C08F—MACROMOLECULAR COMPOUNDS OBTAINED BY REACTIONS ONLY INVOLVING CARBON-TO-CARBON UNSATURATED BONDS
    • C08F2/00—Processes of polymerisation
    • C08F2/12—Polymerisation in non-solvents
    • C08F2/16—Aqueous medium
    • C08F2/20—Aqueous medium with the aid of macromolecular dispersing agents
    • C—CHEMISTRY; METALLURGY
    • C08—ORGANIC MACROMOLECULAR COMPOUNDS; THEIR PREPARATION OR CHEMICAL WORKING-UP; COMPOSITIONS BASED THEREON
    • C08F—MACROMOLECULAR COMPOUNDS OBTAINED BY REACTIONS ONLY INVOLVING CARBON-TO-CARBON UNSATURATED BONDS
    • C08F4/00—Polymerisation catalysts
    • C08F4/40—Redox systems
    • C—CHEMISTRY; METALLURGY
    • C08—ORGANIC MACROMOLECULAR COMPOUNDS; THEIR PREPARATION OR CHEMICAL WORKING-UP; COMPOSITIONS BASED THEREON
    • C08J—WORKING-UP; GENERAL PROCESSES OF COMPOUNDING; AFTER-TREATMENT NOT COVERED BY SUBCLASSES C08B, C08C, C08F, C08G or C08H
    • C08J3/00—Processes of treating or compounding macromolecular substances
    • C08J3/12—Powdering or granulating
    • C08J3/16—Powdering or granulating by coagulating dispersions
    • C—CHEMISTRY; METALLURGY
    • C08—ORGANIC MACROMOLECULAR COMPOUNDS; THEIR PREPARATION OR CHEMICAL WORKING-UP; COMPOSITIONS BASED THEREON
    • C08K—Use of inorganic or non-macromolecular organic substances as compounding ingredients
    • C08K3/00—Use of inorganic substances as compounding ingredients
    • C08K3/02—Elements
    • C08K3/08—Metals
    • C—CHEMISTRY; METALLURGY
    • C08—ORGANIC MACROMOLECULAR COMPOUNDS; THEIR PREPARATION OR CHEMICAL WORKING-UP; COMPOSITIONS BASED THEREON
    • C08K—Use of inorganic or non-macromolecular organic substances as compounding ingredients
    • C08K5/00—Use of organic ingredients
    • C08K5/01—Hydrocarbons
    • C—CHEMISTRY; METALLURGY
    • C08—ORGANIC MACROMOLECULAR COMPOUNDS; THEIR PREPARATION OR CHEMICAL WORKING-UP; COMPOSITIONS BASED THEREON
    • C08F—MACROMOLECULAR COMPOUNDS OBTAINED BY REACTIONS ONLY INVOLVING CARBON-TO-CARBON UNSATURATED BONDS
    • C08F214/00—Copolymers of compounds having one or more unsaturated aliphatic radicals, each having only one carbon-to-carbon double bond, and at least one being terminated by a halogen
    • C08F214/18—Monomers containing fluorine
    • C08F214/28—Hexyfluoropropene
    • C—CHEMISTRY; METALLURGY
    • C08—ORGANIC MACROMOLECULAR COMPOUNDS; THEIR PREPARATION OR CHEMICAL WORKING-UP; COMPOSITIONS BASED THEREON
    • C08J—WORKING-UP; GENERAL PROCESSES OF COMPOUNDING; AFTER-TREATMENT NOT COVERED BY SUBCLASSES C08B, C08C, C08F, C08G or C08H
    • C08J2327/00—Characterised by the use of homopolymers or copolymers of compounds having one or more unsaturated aliphatic radicals, each having only one carbon-to-carbon double bond, and at least one being terminated by a halogen; Derivatives of such polymers
    • C08J2327/02—Characterised by the use of homopolymers or copolymers of compounds having one or more unsaturated aliphatic radicals, each having only one carbon-to-carbon double bond, and at least one being terminated by a halogen; Derivatives of such polymers not modified by chemical after-treatment
    • C08J2327/12—Characterised by the use of homopolymers or copolymers of compounds having one or more unsaturated aliphatic radicals, each having only one carbon-to-carbon double bond, and at least one being terminated by a halogen; Derivatives of such polymers not modified by chemical after-treatment containing fluorine atoms
    • C08J2327/18—Homopolymers or copolymers of tetrafluoroethylene

Definitions

  • the present disclosure relates to a method for producing a fluoropolymer, a polytetrafluoroethylene composition and a polytetrafluoroethylene powder.
  • Fluorine-containing anionic surfactants have been used to produce fluoropolymers by emulsion polymerization. Recently, the use of hydrocarbon-based surfactants has been proposed in place of fluorine-containing anionic surfactants, and various studies have been conducted.
  • Patent Document 1 describes a method for polymerizing a fluoromonomer in a polymerization reactor to form a dispersion of fluoropolymer particles in an aqueous medium, wherein the method is an initial period and the initial period.
  • the stabilization period includes: the step of preparing an initial dispersion of fluoropolymer particles in the aqueous medium in the polymerization reactor, the stabilization period: fluoromonomer in the polymerization reactor.
  • a method including a step of polymerizing and adding a hydrocarbon-containing surfactant to the polymerization reactor, and a method in which a fluorine-based surfactant is not added during the stabilization period is described.
  • Patent Document 2 describes a method for polymerizing a fluoromonomer in a polymerization reactor to form a dispersion of fluoropolymer particles in an aqueous medium, wherein the method is applied to the polymerization reactor: (a). Includes an initial period that includes the steps of adding an aqueous medium, (b) a water-soluble hydrocarbon-containing compound, (c) a decomposing agent, (d) a fluoromonomer, and (e) a polymerization initiator, and during the initial period, fluorine-based. A method is described in which the surfactant is not added and the decomposing agent is added before the polymerization initiator.
  • Patent Document 3 describes a method for polymerizing a fluoromonomer in a polymerization reactor to form a dispersion of fluoropolymer particles in an aqueous medium, wherein the polymerization reactor: an aqueous medium, a polymerization initiator. , Fluoromonomer, and a method including a step of adding a hydrocarbon-containing surfactant and a step of inactivating the hydrocarbon-containing surfactant are described.
  • Patent Document 4 describes a method for reducing heat-induced discoloration of a fluorinated polymer resin, wherein the fluorinated polymer resin is a step of polymerizing a fluoromonomer in an aqueous dispersion medium to form an aqueous fluorinated polymer dispersion. It is produced by the step of isolating the fluorinated polymer from the aqueous medium by separating the wet form of the fluorinated polymer resin from the aqueous medium, and the step of drying to produce the fluorinated polymer resin in the dry form. , The method comprises a step of exposing the fluorinated polymer resin in a wet or dry form to an oxidizing agent.
  • Patent Document 5 describes a modified polytetrafluoroethylene that can be produced without using a fluorine-based surfactant. Specifically, it is a modified polytetrafluoroethylene containing a polymer having a unit based on tetrafluoroethylene and a polymer having a unit based on a monomer represented by the following formula, and is represented by the following formula.
  • the content of the unit based on the monomer is 10 to 500 mass ppm with respect to all the units of the modified polytetrafluoroethylene, and the standard specific gravity is 2.155 to 2.175.
  • L represents a single bond, -CO-O- *, -O-CO- * or -O-. * Represents the coupling position with R 2z .
  • R 2z represents a hydrogen atom, an alkyl group or a nitrile group.
  • the present disclosure provides a production method capable of obtaining a high molecular weight fluoropolymer.
  • the present disclosure is characterized by comprising a polymerization step of polymerizing a fluoromonomer to obtain a fluoropolymer in an aqueous medium having a pH of 4.0 or higher in the presence of a hydrocarbon-based surfactant and a polymerization initiator.
  • a method for producing a polymer hereinafter, also referred to as “the first production method of the present disclosure”.
  • the present disclosure also comprises a polymerization step of polymerizing a fluoromonomer in an aqueous medium in the presence of an anionic hydrocarbon surfactant and a polymerization initiator to obtain a fluoropolymer, wherein the hydrocarbon surfactant is:
  • the present invention provides a method for producing a fluoropolymer (hereinafter, also referred to as “the second production method of the present disclosure”), which comprises a salt of the above-mentioned hydrocarbon-based surfactant.
  • the polymerization step is carried out in the absence of the hydrocarbon-based surfactant in the form of an organic acid.
  • the hydrocarbon-based surfactant is preferably of the carboxylic acid type.
  • the polymerization initiator is preferably a redox initiator, and the redox initiator is preferably a combination of a salt oxidizing agent and a salt reducing agent.
  • the redox initiator is preferably at least one selected from the group consisting of potassium permanganate / ammonium oxalate, potassium bromate / ammonium sulfite, and ammonium cerium nitrate / ammonium oxalate.
  • the polymerization step preferably includes an addition step of adding a composition containing a hydrocarbon-based surfactant after the start of polymerization.
  • the composition is preferably an aqueous solution having a pH of 5.0 or higher.
  • the hydrocarbon-based surfactant contained in the composition is preferably in the carboxylic acid type.
  • the fluoromonomer is polymerized substantially in the absence of a fluorine-containing surfactant.
  • the fluoropolymer is preferably polytetrafluoroethylene.
  • the polytetrafluoroethylene is preferably stretchable.
  • the present disclosure is characterized in that it contains polytetrafluoroethylene and at least one atom selected from the group consisting of manganese, bromine and cerium, and is substantially free of fluorine-containing surfactants.
  • a fluoroethylene composition is provided. At least one atom selected from the group consisting of manganese, bromine and cerium is preferably manganese.
  • the polytetrafluoroethylene composition of the present disclosure preferably has a manganese content of 0.1% by mass or less.
  • the stretched bead produced under the following condition (A) by heat treatment at a temperature of 240 ° C. has a breaking strength of 29.0 N or more measured under the following condition (X), and is substantially a fluorine-containing surfactant.
  • a polytetrafluoroethylene powder characterized by not containing.
  • the lubricating resin is paste-extruded through an orifice (diameter 2.5 mm, land length 11 mm, introduction angle 30 °) at a reduction ratio of 100: 1 at room temperature to obtain a uniform bead.
  • the extrusion speed is 20 inches / minute.
  • the polytetrafluoroethylene extrusion bead containing the lubricant obtained by the above paste extrusion is dried at 230 ° C. for 30 minutes, and the lubricant is removed from the bead to obtain a dried polytetrafluoroethylene extrusion bead.
  • the dried polytetrafluoroethylene extruded bead is cut to an appropriate length, each end is fixed to a clamp so that the clamp interval is 1.5 inches, and the temperature is set to 300 ° C. in an air circulation furnace. Heat.
  • the clamps are then separated at 1000% / sec until a separation distance corresponding to 2400% is achieved and a stretch test is performed to obtain stretch beads.
  • the stretched bead produced under the following condition (B) by heat treatment at a temperature of 240 ° C. has a breaking strength of 22.0 N or more measured under the following condition (X), and is substantially a fluorine-containing surfactant.
  • a polytetrafluoroethylene powder characterized by not containing.
  • the lubricating resin is paste-extruded through an orifice (diameter 2.5 mm, land length 11 mm, introduction angle 30 °) at a reduction ratio of 100: 1 at room temperature to obtain a uniform bead.
  • the extrusion speed is 20 inches / minute.
  • the polytetrafluoroethylene extrusion bead containing the lubricant obtained by the above paste extrusion is dried at 230 ° C. for 30 minutes, and the lubricant is removed from the bead to obtain a dried polytetrafluoroethylene extrusion bead.
  • the dried polytetrafluoroethylene extruded bead is cut to an appropriate length, each end is fixed to a clamp so that the clamp interval is 2.0 inches, and the temperature is set to 300 ° C. in an air circulation furnace. Heat.
  • the clamps are then separated at 100% / sec until a separation distance corresponding to 2400% is achieved and a stretch test is performed to obtain stretch beads.
  • the present disclosure is also characterized in that the stretched bead produced under the following condition (A) has a breaking strength of 34.0 N or more measured under the following condition (X) and substantially does not contain a fluorine-containing surfactant.
  • a polytetrafluoroethylene powder Provided is a polytetrafluoroethylene powder.
  • the lubricating resin is paste-extruded through an orifice (diameter 2.5 mm, land length 11 mm, introduction angle 30 °) at a reduction ratio of 100: 1 at room temperature to obtain a uniform bead.
  • the extrusion speed is 20 inches / minute.
  • the polytetrafluoroethylene extrusion bead containing the lubricant obtained by the above paste extrusion is dried at 230 ° C. for 30 minutes, and the lubricant is removed from the bead to obtain a dried polytetrafluoroethylene extrusion bead.
  • the dried polytetrafluoroethylene extruded bead is cut to an appropriate length, each end is fixed to a clamp so that the clamp interval is 1.5 inches, and the temperature is set to 300 ° C. in an air circulation furnace. Heat.
  • the clamps are then separated at 1000% / sec until a separation distance corresponding to 2400% is achieved and a stretch test is performed to obtain stretch beads.
  • the stretched bead produced under the following condition (B) has a breaking strength of 29.0 N or more measured under the following condition (X) and substantially does not contain a fluorine-containing surfactant.
  • a polytetrafluoroethylene powder Provided is a polytetrafluoroethylene powder.
  • the lubricating resin is paste-extruded through an orifice (diameter 2.5 mm, land length 11 mm, introduction angle 30 °) at a reduction ratio of 100: 1 at room temperature to obtain a uniform bead.
  • the extrusion speed is 20 inches / minute.
  • the polytetrafluoroethylene extrusion bead containing the lubricant obtained by the above paste extrusion is dried at 230 ° C. for 30 minutes, and the lubricant is removed from the bead to obtain a dried polytetrafluoroethylene extrusion bead.
  • the dried polytetrafluoroethylene extruded bead is cut to an appropriate length, each end is fixed to a clamp so that the clamp interval is 2.0 inches, and the temperature is set to 300 ° C. in an air circulation furnace. Heat.
  • the clamps are then separated at 100% / sec until a separation distance corresponding to 2400% is achieved and a stretch test is performed to obtain stretch beads.
  • the production method of the present disclosure can obtain a high molecular weight fluoropolymer.
  • the fluororesin is a partially crystalline fluoropolymer and is a fluoroplastic.
  • the fluororesin has a melting point and is thermoplastic, but may be melt-processable or non-melt-processable.
  • the melt processability means that the polymer can be melted and processed by using conventional processing equipment such as an extruder and an injection molding machine. Therefore, the melt-processable fluororesin usually has a melt flow rate of 0.01 to 500 g / 10 minutes as measured by a measuring method described later.
  • fluororubber is an amorphous fluoropolymer. “Amorphous” means a melting peak ( ⁇ H) that appears in differential scanning calorimetry [DSC] (difference heating rate 10 ° C./min) or differential thermal analysis [DTA] (heating rate 10 ° C./min) of a fluoropolymer. ) Is 4.5 J / g or less. Fluororubber exhibits elastomeric properties by cross-linking. Elastomer properties mean properties that allow the polymer to be stretched and retain its original length when the force required to stretch the polymer is no longer applied.
  • the partially fluorinated rubber is a fluoropolymer containing a fluoromonomer unit and having a perfluoromonomer unit content of less than 90 mol% with respect to all polymerization units, and has a glass transition temperature of 20 ° C. or less. It is a fluoropolymer having a melting peak ( ⁇ H) of 4.5 J / g or less.
  • the perfluoro rubber is a fluoropolymer having a perfluoromonomer unit content of 90 mol% or more with respect to all polymerization units, and has a glass transition temperature of 20 ° C. or less. It is a fluoropolymer having a melting peak ( ⁇ H) of 4.5 J / g or less, and further, a polymer having a concentration of fluorine atoms contained in the fluoropolymer of 71% by mass or more.
  • the concentration of fluorine atoms contained in the fluoropolymer is obtained by calculating the concentration (mass%) of the fluorine atoms contained in the fluoropolymer from the type and content of each monomer constituting the fluoropolymer. ..
  • the perfluoromonomer is a monomer that does not contain a carbon atom-hydrogen atom bond in the molecule.
  • the perfluoromonomer may be a monomer in which some of the fluorine atoms bonded to carbon atoms are replaced with chlorine atoms, and in addition to carbon atoms, nitrogen atoms and oxygen atoms. , Sulfur atom, phosphorus atom, boron atom or silicon atom.
  • the perfluoromonomer is preferably a monomer in which all hydrogen atoms are replaced with fluorine atoms.
  • the perfluoromonomer does not contain a monomer that provides a cross-linking site.
  • the monomer that gives a cross-linking site is a monomer (cure site monomer) having a cross-linking group that gives a cross-linking site to the fluoropolymer for forming a cross-link with a curing agent.
  • the polytetrafluoroethylene [PTFE] is preferably a fluoropolymer having a tetrafluoroethylene content of 99.0% by mass or more based on all the polymerization units.
  • both the fluororesin (excluding polytetrafluoroethylene) and the fluororubber are fluoropolymers in which the content of tetrafluoroethylene with respect to the total polymerization unit is less than 99.0% by mass. preferable.
  • the content of each monomer constituting the fluoropolymer can be calculated by appropriately combining NMR, FT-IR, elemental analysis, and fluorescent X-ray analysis according to the type of monomer.
  • organic group means a group containing one or more carbon atoms or a group formed by removing one hydrogen atom from an organic compound.
  • An example of the "organic group” is Alkyl groups, which may have one or more substituents, An alkenyl group which may have one or more substituents, An alkynyl group, which may have one or more substituents, A cycloalkyl group which may have one or more substituents, Cycloalkenyl groups, which may have one or more substituents, A cycloalkazienyl group which may have one or more substituents, Aryl groups, which may have one or more substituents, An aralkyl group which may have one or more substituents, A non-aromatic heterocyclic group, which may have one or more substituents, Heteroaryl groups, which may have one or more substituents, Cyanide group, Holmil group, RaO-, RaCO-, RaSO 2- , RaC
  • Rb is an independently alkyl group that may have H or one or more substituents) Including.
  • an alkyl group which may have one or more substituents is preferable.
  • substituteduent means a substitutable group. Examples of the "substituent” include an aliphatic group, an aromatic group, a heterocyclic group, an acyl group, an acyloxy group, an acylamino group, an aliphatic oxy group, an aromatic oxy group, a heterocyclic oxy group, and an aliphatic oxycarbonyl group.
  • the aliphatic group may be saturated or unsaturated, and may be a hydroxy group, an aliphatic oxy group, a carbamoyl group, an aliphatic oxycarbonyl group, an aliphatic thio group, an amino group, or an aliphatic amino group. , Acylamino group, carbamoylamino group and the like.
  • Examples of the aliphatic group include alkyl groups having a total carbon atom number of 1 to 8, preferably 1 to 4, such as a methyl group, an ethyl group, a vinyl group, a cyclohexyl group, and a carbamoylmethyl group.
  • the aromatic group includes, for example, a nitro group, a halogen atom, an aliphatic oxy group, a carbamoyl group, an aliphatic oxycarbonyl group, an aliphatic thio group, an amino group, an aliphatic amino group, an acylamino group, a carbamoylamino group and the like. You may be doing it.
  • the aromatic group include aryl groups having 6 to 12 carbon atoms, preferably 6 to 10 total carbon atoms, for example, a phenyl group, a 4-nitrophenyl group, a 4-acetylaminophenyl group, and a 4-methanesulfonylphenyl group. And so on.
  • the heterocyclic group has a halogen atom, a hydroxy group, an aliphatic oxy group, a carbamoyl group, an aliphatic oxycarbonyl group, an aliphatic thio group, an amino group, an aliphatic amino group, an acylamino group, a carbamoylamino group and the like. You may.
  • Examples of the heterocyclic group include a 5- to 6-membered heterocycle having a total carbon number of 2 to 12, preferably 2 to 10, such as a 2-tetrahydrofuryl group and a 2-pyrimidyl group.
  • the acyl group includes an aliphatic carbonyl group, an arylcarbonyl group, a heterocyclic carbonyl group, a hydroxy group, a halogen atom, an aromatic group, an aliphatic oxy group, a carbamoyl group, an aliphatic oxycarbonyl group, an aliphatic thio group and an amino group. , It may have an aliphatic amino group, an acylamino group, a carbamoylamino group and the like.
  • acyl group examples include an acyl group having a total carbon atom number of 2 to 8, preferably 2 to 4, such as an acetyl group, a propanoyl group, a benzoyl group, and a 3-pyridinecarbonyl group.
  • the acylamino group may have an aliphatic group, an aromatic group, a heterocyclic group and the like, and has, for example, an acetylamino group, a benzoylamino group, a 2-pyridinecarbonylamino group, a propanoylamino group and the like. May be.
  • the acylamino group include an acylamino group having a total carbon number of 2 to 12, preferably 2 to 8, and an alkylcarbonylamino group having a total carbon number of 2 to 8, such as an acetylamino group, a benzoylamino group, and a 2-pyridinecarbonylamino group.
  • Groups, propanoylamino groups and the like can be mentioned.
  • the aliphatic oxycarbonyl group may be saturated or unsaturated, and may be a hydroxy group, an aliphatic oxy group, a carbamoyl group, an aliphatic oxycarbonyl group, an aliphatic thio group, an amino group, or an aliphatic group. It may have an amino group, an acylamino group, a carbamoylamino group and the like.
  • Examples of the aliphatic oxycarbonyl group include an alkoxycarbonyl group having a total carbon atom number of 2 to 8, preferably 2 to 4, such as a methoxycarbonyl group, an ethoxycarbonyl group, and a (t) -butoxycarbonyl group.
  • the carbamoyl group may have an aliphatic group, an aromatic group, a heterocyclic group and the like.
  • Examples of the carbamoyl group include an unsubstituted carbamoyl group, an alkylcarbamoyl group having a total carbon number of 2 to 9, preferably an unsubstituted carbamoyl group, and an alkylcarbamoyl group having a total carbon number of 2 to 5, for example, an N-methylcarbamoyl group. Examples thereof include N, N-dimethylcarbamoyl group and N-phenylcarbamoyl group.
  • the aliphatic sulfonyl group may be saturated or unsaturated, and may be a hydroxy group, an aromatic group, an aliphatic oxy group, a carbamoyl group, an aliphatic oxycarbonyl group, an aliphatic thio group, or an amino group. , It may have an aliphatic amino group, an acylamino group, a carbamoylamino group and the like.
  • Examples of the aliphatic sulfonyl group include an alkylsulfonyl group having a total carbon number of 1 to 6, preferably a total carbon number of 1 to 4, such as a methanesulfonyl group.
  • the aromatic sulfonyl group includes a hydroxy group, an aliphatic group, an aliphatic oxy group, a carbamoyl group, an aliphatic oxycarbonyl group, an aliphatic thio group, an amino group, an aliphatic amino group, an acylamino group, a carbamoylamino group and the like. You may be doing it.
  • Examples of the aromatic sulfonyl group include an arylsulfonyl group having a total carbon atom number of 6 to 10, such as a benzenesulfonyl group.
  • the amino group may have an aliphatic group, an aromatic group, a heterocyclic group and the like.
  • the acylamino group may have, for example, an acetylamino group, a benzoylamino group, a 2-pyridinecarbonylamino group, a propanoylamino group and the like.
  • the acylamino group includes an acylamino group having a total carbon number of 2 to 12, preferably a total carbon number of 2 to 8, and more preferably an alkylcarbonylamino group having a total carbon number of 2 to 8, such as an acetylamino group and a benzoylamino group. Examples include a group, a 2-pyridinecarbonylamino group, a propanoylamino group and the like.
  • the aliphatic sulfonamide group, aromatic sulfonamide group, and heterocyclic sulfonamide group may be, for example, a methanesulfonamide group, a benzenesulfonamide group, a 2-pyridinesulfonamide group, or the like.
  • the sulfamoyl group may have an aliphatic group, an aromatic group, a heterocyclic group and the like.
  • the sulfamoyl group includes a sulfamoyl group, an alkylsulfamoyl group having a total carbon number of 1 to 9, a dialkylsulfamoyl group having a total carbon number of 2 to 10, and an arylsulfamoyl group having a total carbon number of 7 to 13.
  • Heterocyclic sulfamoyl group having 2 to 12 total carbon atoms more preferably sulfamoyl group, alkyl sulfamoyl group having 1 to 7 total carbon atoms, dialkyl sulfamoyl group having 3 to 6 total carbon atoms, total carbon
  • Examples include groups, 4-pyridinesulfamoyl groups and the like.
  • the aliphatic oxy group may be saturated or unsaturated, and may have a methoxy group, an ethoxy group, an i-propyloxy group, a cyclohexyloxy group, a methoxyethoxy group and the like.
  • Examples of the aliphatic oxy group include an alkoxy group having a total carbon atom number of 1 to 8, preferably 1 to 6, such as a methoxy group, an ethoxy group, an i-propyloxy group, a cyclohexyloxy group, and a methoxyethoxy group.
  • the aromatic amino group and the heterocyclic amino group are an aliphatic group, an aliphatic oxy group, a halogen atom, a carbamoyl group, a heterocyclic group fused with the aryl group, an aliphatic oxycarbonyl group, preferably a total number of carbon atoms.
  • the aliphatic thio group may be saturated or unsaturated, and an alkyl thio group having a total carbon atom number of 1 to 8, more preferably a total carbon atom number of 1 to 6, for example, a methyl thio group or an ethyl thio group. , Carbamoylmethylthio group, t-butylthio group and the like.
  • the carbamoylamino group may have an aliphatic group, an aryl group, a heterocyclic group and the like.
  • Examples of the carbamoylamino group include a carbamoylamino group, an alkylcarbamoylamino group having a total carbon number of 2 to 9, a dialkylcarbamoylamino group having a total carbon number of 3 to 10, and an arylcarbamoylamino group having a total carbon number of 7 to 13.
  • Heterocyclic carbamoylamino group having 3 to 12 total carbon atoms preferably carbamoylamino group, alkylcarbamoylamino group having 2 to 7 total carbon atoms, dialkylcarbamoylamino group having 3 to 6 total carbon atoms, total number of carbon atoms 7-11 arylcarbamoylamino groups, heterocyclic carbamoylamino groups with 3-10 total carbon atoms, such as carbamoylamino groups, methylcarbamoylamino groups, N, N-dimethylcarbamoylamino groups, phenylcarbamoylamino groups, 4- Examples thereof include a pyridinecarbamoylamino group.
  • the range represented by the end points includes all the numerical values included in the range (for example, 1 to 10 are 1.4, 1.9, 2.33, 5. 75, 9.98, etc. are included).
  • At least 1 includes all numbers greater than or equal to 1 (eg, at least 2, at least 4, at least 6, at least 8, at least 10, at least 25, at least 50, at least. 100 etc.).
  • ppm and ppb mean values obtained in terms of mass unless otherwise specified.
  • the first production method of the present disclosure includes a polymerization step of polymerizing a fluoromonomer to obtain a fluoropolymer in an aqueous medium having a pH of 4.0 or higher in the presence of a hydrocarbon-based surfactant and a polymerization initiator. ..
  • an acidic polymerization initiator has been used in the polymerization step for producing a fluoropolymer, so that the pH of the aqueous medium used in the polymerization was less than 4.0.
  • the first production method of the present disclosure polymerizes a fluoromonomer in an aqueous medium having a pH of 4.0 or higher.
  • the pH may be 4.0 or more, preferably more than 4.0, more preferably 4.5 or more, further preferably 5.0 or more, even more preferably 5.5 or more, and particularly preferably 6.0 or more.
  • the upper limit of the pH is not particularly limited, but may be, for example, 13.0 or less. From the viewpoint of corrosion of the polymerization tank, it is preferably 12.0 or less, more preferably 11.5 or less, and even more preferably 11.0 or less.
  • the pH can be measured with a pH meter.
  • the method of setting the pH of the aqueous medium to 4.0 or higher is not limited, but for example, an alkaline aqueous solution can be used, an aqueous dispersion showing alkalinity can be used, or a pH adjuster.
  • the pH can be set to 4.0 or higher by using the above, but the pH is not particularly limited. Further, even when a polymerization initiator that shows acidity when dissolved in an aqueous medium is used, the pH can be adjusted to 4.0 or more by further adding an alkaline compound such as sodium hydroxide.
  • the alkaline compound may be a compound that dissolves in water and ionizes to generate OH ⁇ , and may be, for example, a hydroxide of an alkali metal such as sodium hydroxide or potassium hydroxide; a hydroxide of an alkaline earth metal; Ammonia; amine and the like can be mentioned, but are not particularly limited.
  • the polymerization step may include a step of adding an alkaline compound to an aqueous medium.
  • the pH of the aqueous medium may be 4.0 or higher during the entire period of the polymerization step. Further, the pH may be 4.0 or more in the middle of the polymerization step, or the pH may be 4.0 or more in the latter half of the polymerization step. Further, the pH may be 4.0 or more in the middle and the latter half of the polymerization step.
  • the pH of the aqueous medium is preferably 4.0 or more.
  • the first production method of the present disclosure includes a polymerization step of polymerizing a fluoromonomer in an aqueous medium to obtain a fluoropolymer in the presence of a hydrocarbon-based surfactant and a polymerization initiator, and the aqueous medium is
  • the pH is preferably 4.0 or more.
  • the aqueous medium preferably has a pH of 4.0 or more when the polymer solid content concentration is 5% by mass or more, and has a pH of 4.0 or more when the polymer solid content concentration is 8% by mass or more.
  • the pH is 4.0 or more when the polymer solid content concentration is 10% by mass or more, and the pH is 4.0 or more when the polymer solid content concentration is 15% by mass or more. It is particularly preferable that the pH is 4.0 or more when the polymer solid content concentration is 18% by mass or more, and the pH is 4.0 or more when the polymer solid content concentration is 20% by mass or more. It is preferable that the pH is 4.0 or more when it is 25% by mass or more. Further, in the above polymerization step, the pH of the aqueous medium is preferably maintained at 4.0 or more from the time when the polymer solid content concentration reaches 25% by mass until the end of the polymerization, and from the time when it reaches 20% by mass.
  • the pH of the aqueous medium is maintained at 4.0 or higher until the end of the polymerization, and the pH of the aqueous medium is maintained at 4.0 or higher from the time when the pH reaches 18% by mass until the completion of the polymerization. Is even more preferable, and the pH of the aqueous medium is maintained at 4.0 or more from the time when the content reaches 15% by mass until the end of the polymerization. It is particularly preferable that the pH is maintained at 4.0 or higher, and it is particularly preferable that the pH of the aqueous medium is maintained at 4.0 or higher from the time when the pH reaches 8% by mass until the end of the polymerization.
  • the pH of the aqueous medium is maintained at 4.0 or more from the time when it reaches 3% by mass until the end of the polymerization, and the pH of the aqueous medium is 4.0 or more from the time when it reaches 3% by mass until the end of the polymerization. It is more preferable that the polymer is maintained at. Further, in the above polymerization step, it is also preferable that the pH of the aqueous medium is 4.0 or more when the polymer solid content concentration is less than 15% by mass.
  • the pH of the aqueous medium when the polymer solid content concentration is 3% by mass or more and less than 15% by mass, the pH of the aqueous medium is more preferably 4.0 or more, and 5% by mass or more and less than 15% by mass.
  • the pH of the aqueous medium is more preferably 4.0 or more, and when it is 8% by mass or more and less than 15% by mass, the pH of the aqueous medium is more preferably 4.0 or more, 10% by mass.
  • the pH of the aqueous medium when it is less than 15% by mass, it is even more preferable that the pH of the aqueous medium is 4.0 or more.
  • the pH of the aqueous medium is preferably maintained at 4.0% by mass or more, preferably 8% by mass or more and 15% by mass, while the polymer solid content concentration is 10% by mass or more and up to 15% by mass. It is more preferable that the pH of the aqueous medium is maintained at 4.0 or more up to%, and the pH of the aqueous medium is maintained at 4.0% or more up to 5% by mass or 15% by mass. Is more preferable.
  • the pH of the aqueous medium is preferably more than 4.0, more preferably 4.5 or more, further preferably 5.0 or more, further preferably 5.5 or more, and 6.0 or more. Particularly preferably, 6.5 or more is particularly preferable, 7.0 or more is more preferable, 7.5 or more is further preferable, and 8.0 or more is even more preferable.
  • the polymer solid content concentration is 3% by mass (preferably 5% by mass, more preferably 8% by mass, still more preferably 10% by mass, still more preferably 15% by mass, particularly further, from the time of starting the polymerization.
  • 60% or more preferably 70% or more, more preferably 80% or more, still more preferably 90% or more, further up to the time point of preferably 18% by mass, particularly more preferably 20% by mass, particularly preferably 25% by mass.
  • the pH of the aqueous medium is 4.0 or more, particularly preferably 99% or more, and particularly preferably 100%).
  • the polymer solid content concentration is 15 from the time when the polymer solid content concentration is 10% by mass (preferably 8% by mass, more preferably 5% by mass, further preferably 3% by mass, still more preferably the initiation of polymerization).
  • 60% or more preferably 70% or more, more preferably 80% or more, still more preferably 90% or more, even more preferably 95% or more, particularly still more preferably 99% or more, particularly preferably 100 up to the point of mass%.
  • the pH of the aqueous medium is preferably 4.0 or higher during the period.
  • the polymer solid content concentration is 25% by mass (preferably 20% by mass, more preferably 18% by mass, still more preferably 15% by mass, still more preferably 10% by mass, particularly still more preferably 8% by mass, particularly.
  • the pH of the aqueous medium is preferably 4.0 or more in a period of 95% or more, more preferably 99% or more, and particularly preferably 100%).
  • the pH of the aqueous medium is preferably more than 4.0, more preferably 4.5 or more, further preferably 5.0 or more, further preferably 5.5 or more, and 6.0 or more.
  • Particularly preferably, 6.5 or more is particularly preferable, 7.0 or more is more preferable, 7.5 or more is further preferable, and 8.0 or more is even more preferable.
  • the hydrocarbon-based surfactant is preferably an anionic hydrocarbon-based surfactant, and more preferably a carboxylic acid-type hydrocarbon-based surfactant. ..
  • the second production method of the present disclosure includes a polymerization step of polymerizing a fluoromonomer in an aqueous medium in the presence of an anionic hydrocarbon-based surfactant and a polymerization initiator to obtain a fluoropolymer, and comprises the above-mentioned hydrocarbon.
  • the based surfactant comprises a salt of the hydrocarbon based surfactant.
  • at least a part of the anionic hydrocarbon surfactant in the polymerization step is in the form of a salt.
  • the anionic hydrocarbon-based surfactant contains a salt of the anionic hydrocarbon-based surfactant, which improves the stability of polymerization and has a molecular weight. It has been found that large fluoropolymers can be produced.
  • the anionic hydrocarbon-based surfactant will be described later. It can be confirmed by measuring the conductivity that the anionic hydrocarbon-based surfactant contains a salt of the hydrocarbon-based surfactant.
  • the concentration of the salt of the anionic hydrocarbon-based surfactant is the total mass of the anionic hydrocarbon-based surfactant.
  • the hydrocarbon-based surfactant is a carboxylic acid-type hydrocarbon-based surfactant.
  • the cations (excluding the hydrogen atom) that replace the hydrogen atom of the acid are, for example, a metal atom and NR y 4 (R y are the same or different, respectively).
  • the Ry is preferably H or an alkyl group, more preferably H or an alkyl group having 1 to 10 carbon atoms, and even more preferably H or an alkyl group having 1 to 4 carbon atoms.
  • a metal atom or NR y 4 is preferable, NR y 4 is more preferable, and NH 4 is further preferable. Since the influence of temperature changes greatly, the conductivity is measured after keeping the sample liquid temperature at 25 ° C. and making the temperature of the cell of the pH meter the same using a constant temperature bath.
  • the polymerization step is polymerized in the absence of the hydrocarbon-based surfactant in the form of an organic acid.
  • the stability of the polymerization is further improved and a high molecular weight fluoropolymer can be obtained.
  • the concentration of the organic acid is preferably 1.0% by mass or less with respect to the mass of the obtained aqueous dispersion.
  • organic acid means an organic compound that exhibits acidity.
  • the form of an organic acid is a form in which H is not free of acid groups contained in the organic acid (e.g., -COOH group, -SO 3 H group).
  • the hydrocarbon-based surfactant is preferably an anionic hydrocarbon-based surfactant.
  • the term “manufacturing method of the present disclosure” is used without particular notice, both the first manufacturing method and the second manufacturing method are included.
  • the term “polymerization step” is described without particular notice, it includes both the polymerization step in the first production method and the polymerization step in the second production method.
  • the amount of the hydrocarbon-based surfactant at the start of polymerization is preferably more than 50 ppm with respect to the aqueous medium.
  • the amount of the hydrocarbon-based surfactant at the start of polymerization is preferably 60 ppm or more, more preferably 70 ppm or more, still more preferably 80 ppm or more, still more preferably 100 ppm or more.
  • the upper limit is not particularly limited, but for example, it is preferably 10000 ppm, and more preferably 5000 ppm.
  • Dispersion polymerization of tetrafluoroethylene in an aqueous medium consisting of growth stages is disclosed.
  • the polymerization is usually started when both the monomer to be polymerized and the polymerization initiator are filled in the reactor.
  • an additive related to the formation of a nucleation site is referred to as a nucleation agent.
  • the polymerization step preferably includes an addition step of adding a composition containing a hydrocarbon-based surfactant after the start of polymerization.
  • a composition containing a hydrocarbon-based surfactant may be, for example, in the form of a solid (for example, powder of a hydrocarbon-based surfactant) or in the form of a liquid.
  • the composition may be any one containing a hydrocarbon-based surfactant, may be composed of only a hydrocarbon-based surfactant, or may be a hydrocarbon containing a hydrocarbon-based surfactant and a liquid medium.
  • the addition step can also be said to be a step of adding the hydrocarbon-based surfactant alone or the composition containing the hydrocarbon-based surfactant after the start of polymerization.
  • the hydrocarbon-based surfactant is not limited to one type, and may be a mixture of two or more types.
  • the liquid medium may be either an aqueous medium or an organic solvent, and the aqueous medium and the organic solvent may be used in combination.
  • compositions include an aqueous solution in which a hydrocarbon-based surfactant is dissolved in an aqueous medium, an aqueous dispersion in which a hydrocarbon-based surfactant is dispersed in an aqueous medium, and the like.
  • the hydrocarbon-based surfactant added in the above addition step is preferably 0.0001 to 10% by mass with respect to the aqueous medium. It is more preferably 0.001% by mass or more, still more preferably 0.01% by mass or more, and particularly preferably 0.05% by mass or more with respect to the aqueous medium. Further, it is more preferably 5% by mass or less, still more preferably 3% by mass or less, and particularly preferably 1% by mass or less with respect to the aqueous medium.
  • the composition is preferably an aqueous solution containing a hydrocarbon-based surfactant and having a pH of 5.0 or higher, because the stability of the polymerization is improved and a higher molecular weight fluoropolymer can be obtained.
  • the pH of the aqueous solution is more preferably 6.0 or higher, further preferably 6.5 or higher, even more preferably 7.0 or higher, particularly preferably 7.5 or higher, and particularly preferably 8.0 or higher.
  • the upper limit of pH is not particularly limited, but may be 12.0 or less, or may be 11.0 or less.
  • the hydrocarbon-based surfactant in the above addition step is preferably an anionic hydrocarbon-based surfactant, and more preferably a carboxylic acid-type hydrocarbon-based surfactant.
  • the anionic hydrocarbon-based surfactant and the carboxylic acid-type hydrocarbon-based surfactant are not particularly limited, but for example, the anionic hydrocarbon-based surfactant exemplified in the hydrocarbon-based surfactants described later. Agents and carboxylic acid-type hydrocarbon-based surfactants can be preferably used.
  • the polymerization step may further include a step of continuously adding a hydrocarbon-based surfactant.
  • the continuous addition of the hydrocarbon-based surfactant is, for example, the addition of the hydrocarbon-based surfactant not all at once, but over time, without interruption, or in divided portions.
  • the step of continuously adding the hydrocarbon-based surfactant is to add the hydrocarbon-based surfactant when the concentration of the fluoropolymer formed in the aqueous medium is less than 0.60% by mass. It is preferably the one that begins to be added into the aqueous medium.
  • the above-mentioned hydrocarbon-based surfactant when the above-mentioned concentration is 0.50% by mass or less, and further preferably to start adding when the above-mentioned concentration is 0.36% by mass or less. It is even more preferable to start adding when the content is 30% by mass or less, particularly preferably when the content is 0.20% by mass or less, and the addition is started when the content is 0.10% by mass or less. Is particularly preferable, and it is most preferable to start adding the mixture at the start of polymerization.
  • the above concentration is the concentration with respect to the total of the aqueous medium and the fluoropolymer.
  • the concentration of the fluoropolymer formed in the aqueous medium is less than 0.60% by mass, the hydrocarbon-based surfactant is started to be added to the aqueous medium
  • the concentration of the fluoropolymer is 0.
  • it is less than 60% by mass at least a part of the hydrocarbon-based surfactant added continuously may be added, and it may be continuously added even after it becomes 0.60% by mass or more.
  • the amount of the hydrocarbon-based surfactant added is preferably 0.0001 to 10% by mass with respect to 100% by mass of the aqueous medium.
  • a more preferable lower limit is 0.001% by mass
  • a further preferable lower limit is 0.01% by mass
  • a more preferable upper limit is 5% by mass
  • a further preferable upper limit is 1% by mass.
  • the total amount of the hydrocarbon-based surfactant added is preferably 0.001 to 10% by mass with respect to 100% by mass of the aqueous medium.
  • a more preferable lower limit is 0.01% by mass, and a more preferable upper limit is 1% by mass.
  • the total amount is the total amount of the hydrocarbon-based surfactant at the start of polymerization and the hydrocarbon-based surfactant added after the start of polymerization, and is the total amount of the hydrocarbon-based surfactant added after the completion of polymerization. The amount is not included.
  • an aqueous medium, the above-mentioned hydrocarbon-based surfactant, a monomer and, if necessary, other additives are charged into the polymerization reactor, the contents of the reactor are agitated, and the reactor is polymerized in a predetermined manner. It can be carried out by keeping the temperature at a temperature, then adding a predetermined amount of a polymerization initiator to initiate the polymerization reaction. After the start of the polymerization reaction, a monomer, a polymerization initiator, a chain transfer agent, the above-mentioned hydrocarbon-based surfactant and the like may be additionally added depending on the purpose. The above-mentioned hydrocarbon-based surfactant may be added after the polymerization reaction has started.
  • the polymerization temperature and polymerization pressure in the above polymerization step are appropriately determined by the type of monomer used, the molecular weight of the target fluoropolymer, and the reaction rate.
  • the polymerization temperature is preferably 10 to 150 ° C.
  • the polymerization temperature is more preferably 30 ° C. or higher, and even more preferably 50 ° C. or higher. Further, 120 ° C. or lower is more preferable, and 100 ° C. or lower is further preferable.
  • the polymerization pressure is preferably 0.05 to 10 MPaG.
  • the polymerization pressure is more preferably 0.3 MPaG or more, and further preferably 0.5 MPaG or more.
  • 5.0 MPaG or less is more preferable, and 3.0 MPaG or less is further preferable.
  • 1.0 MPaG or more is preferable, 1.2 MPaG or more is more preferable, 1.5 MPaG or more is even more preferable, 1.8 MPaG or more is particularly preferable, and 2.0 MPaG or more. Is particularly preferable.
  • the aqueous medium is a reaction medium for polymerizing and means a liquid containing water.
  • the aqueous medium is not particularly limited as long as it contains water, and water and a fluorine-free organic solvent such as alcohol, ether, and ketone, and / or a fluorine-containing organic solvent having a boiling point of 40 ° C. or lower are used. And may be included.
  • the polymerization initiator is not particularly limited as long as it can generate radicals in the above polymerization temperature range, and known oil-soluble and / or water-soluble polymerization initiators can be used. Further, the polymerization can be started as a redox in combination with a reducing agent or the like. As the polymerization initiator, an oil-soluble radical polymerization initiator, a water-soluble radical polymerization initiator or a redox initiator can be used. The concentration of the polymerization initiator is appropriately determined depending on the type of monomer, the molecular weight of the target fluoropolymer, and the reaction rate.
  • the amount of the polymerization initiator added is not particularly limited, but an amount (for example, several ppm to water concentration) or more that does not significantly reduce the polymerization rate is collectively, sequentially, or continuously in the initial stage of polymerization. And add it.
  • the upper limit is a range in which the reaction temperature may be raised while removing heat from the apparatus surface with the heat of the polymerization reaction, and a more preferable upper limit is a range in which the heat of the polymerization reaction can be removed from the apparatus surface.
  • the oil-soluble radical polymerization initiator may be a known oil-soluble peroxide, for example, dialkyl peroxy carbonates such as diisopropyl peroxy dicarbonate and disec-butyl peroxy dicarbonate, and t-butyl peroxy.
  • Peroxyesters such as isobutyrate and t-butylperoxypivalate, dialkyl peroxides such as dit-butyl peroxide, and di ( ⁇ -hydro-dodecafluorohexanoyl) peroxides, di ( ⁇ -Hydro-TetradecafluoroHeptanoyl) Peroxide, Di ( ⁇ -Hydro-Hexadecafluorononanoyl) Peroxide, Di (Perfluorobutyl) Peroxide, Di (Perfluorovaleryl) Peroxide, Di (Perfluorohexanoyl) Peroxide, Di (Perfluoroheptanoyle) Peroxide, Di (Perfluorooctanoyl) Peroxide, Di (Perfluorononanoyl) Peroxide, Di ( ⁇ -Chloro-Hexafluorobutyryl) Peroxide, Di ( ⁇ -Chloro-Decaflu
  • the water-soluble radical polymerization initiator may be a known water-soluble peroxide, for example, ammonium salts such as persulfate, perboric acid, perchloric acid, perphosphoric acid, and percarbonate, potassium salts, and sodium salts.
  • ammonium salts such as persulfate, perboric acid, perchloric acid, perphosphoric acid, and percarbonate, potassium salts, and sodium salts.
  • Organic peroxides such as disuccinic acid peroxide and diglutaric acid peroxide, t-butyl permalate, t-butyl hydroperoxide and the like.
  • a reducing agent such as sulfites may also be included, and the amount used thereof may be 0.1 to 20 times that of the peroxide.
  • the polymerization initiator is preferably a redox initiator, and more preferably a redox initiator in which an oxidizing agent and a reducing agent are combined.
  • the oxidizing agent include persulfates such as ammonium persulfate and potassium persulfate; organic peroxides such as disuccinic acid peroxide and diglutaric acid peroxide; alkali metal salts of permanganate, ammonium permanganate and permanganate.
  • triacetate manganese C 6 H 9 MnO 6 ;; ( potassium permanganate or the like), permanganates such as alkaline earth metal salts of permanganate, cerium ammonium nitrate, cerium (IV) salts such as cerium ammonium sulfate; bromine
  • bromine acids such as acids, ammonium bromine, alkali metal salts of bromine acid, and alkaline earth metal salts of bromine acid, or salts thereof.
  • the reducing agent include dicarboxylic acids such as oxalic acid, malonic acid, succinic acid and glutaric acid or salts thereof; bromic acid or salts thereof; diimine; and the like.
  • dicarboxylic acid or a salt thereof oxalic acid or a salt thereof is preferable.
  • bromic acid or a salt thereof potassium bromate is preferable.
  • a copper salt and an iron salt to the combination of the redox initiator.
  • the copper salt include copper (II) sulfate
  • the iron salt include iron (II) sulfate.
  • the oxidizing agent is permanganate or a salt thereof, persulfate, manganese triacetate, cerium (IV) salt, or bromic acid or a salt thereof, and the reducing agent is dicarboxylic acid or a salt thereof. It is preferably salt or diimine. More preferably, the oxidizing agent is permanganate or a salt thereof, persulfate, or bromic acid or a salt thereof, and the reducing agent is dicarboxylic acid or a salt thereof.
  • Examples of the redox initiator include potassium permanganate / oxalic acid, potassium permanganate / ammonium oxalate, manganese triacetate / oxalic acid, manganese triacetate / ammonium oxalate, ammonium cerium nitrate / oxalic acid, ammonium cerium nitrate /. Examples include combinations of ammonium oxalate and the like. When a redox initiator is used, either an oxidizing agent or a reducing agent may be charged in advance in the polymerization tank, and then the other may be continuously or intermittently added to initiate polymerization.
  • potassium permanganate / ammonium oxalate when potassium permanganate / ammonium oxalate is used, it is preferable to charge ammonium oxalate in the polymerization tank and continuously add potassium permanganate to the polymerization tank.
  • potassium permanganate / ammonium oxalate When the term "potassium permanganate / ammonium oxalate" is used in the redox initiator of the present specification, it means a combination of potassium permanganate and ammonium oxalate. The same applies to other compounds.
  • the redox initiator it is preferable to use an oxidizing agent or a reducing agent capable of setting the pH of the redox initiator aqueous solution to 4.0 or higher.
  • the redox initiator aqueous solution means a 0.50% by mass aqueous solution of an oxidizing agent or a 0.50% by mass aqueous solution of a reducing agent. That is, the pH of at least one of the 0.50% by mass aqueous solution of the oxidizing agent and the 0.50% by mass aqueous solution of the reducing agent may be 4.0 or more, and the 0.50% by mass aqueous solution of the oxidizing agent. , And the pH of both the 0.50 mass% aqueous solution of the reducing agent is preferably 4.0 or more.
  • the pH of the redox initiator aqueous solution (0.50 mass% concentration aqueous solution of the oxidizing agent or 0.50 mass% concentration aqueous solution of the reducing agent) is more preferably 5.0 or more, and further preferably 5.5 or more, respectively. Preferably, 6.0 or more is particularly preferable.
  • the redox initiator is particularly preferably a combination of a salt oxidizing agent and a salt reducing agent.
  • the oxidizing agent which is the salt is more preferably at least one selected from the group consisting of persulfate, permanganate, cerium (IV) salt and bromate, and even more preferably permanganate. Potassium permanganate is particularly preferred.
  • the reducing agent which is the salt at least one selected from the group consisting of oxalate, malonic acid, succinate, glutarate and bromate is more preferable, and oxalate is further preferable. Ammonium oxalate is particularly preferred.
  • the redox initiator is at least selected from the group consisting of potassium permanganate / ammonium oxalate, potassium bromate / ammonium sulfite, manganese triacetate / ammonium oxalate, and ammonium cerium nitrate / ammonium oxalate. It is preferably one kind, and it is preferable that it is at least one kind selected from the group consisting of potassium permanganate / ammonium oxalate, potassium bromate / ammonium sulfite, and ammonium cerium nitrate / ammonium oxalate.
  • the molecular weight of the obtained fluoropolymer can be increased. Therefore, when the fluoropolymer is PTFE, the SSG can be made small and can be stretched. Further, by using the redox initiator in the above polymerization step, the number of particles of the fluoropolymer produced in the aqueous dispersion can be increased. In addition, the amount of fluoropolymer obtained can be increased.
  • the oxidizing agent and the reducing agent may be added all at once at the initial stage of polymerization, the reducing agent may be added all at once at the initial stage of polymerization, and the oxidizing agent may be added continuously.
  • the oxidizing agent may be added all at once at the initial stage of polymerization, and the reducing agent may be added continuously, or both the oxidizing agent and the reducing agent may be added continuously.
  • the amount of the oxidizing agent added is preferably 5 to 10000 ppm, more preferably 10 to 1000 ppm, and the amount of the reducing agent added is 5 with respect to the aqueous medium. It is preferably from to 10000 ppm, more preferably from 10 to 1000 ppm.
  • the polymerization temperature is preferably 100 ° C. or lower, more preferably 95 ° C. or lower, and even more preferably 90 ° C. or lower. Further, 10 ° C. or higher is preferable, 20 ° C. or higher is more preferable, and 30 ° C. or higher is further preferable.
  • the fluoropolymer when the above redox initiator is used is not limited, and (I) the TFE polymer (PTFE) as the non-melt processable fluororesin described later is (II) ethylene / TFE as the melt processable fluororesin.
  • PTFE TFE polymer
  • FEP TFE / HFP copolymers
  • PFA perfluoro (alkyl vinyl ether) copolymers
  • electrolyte polymer precursors are (III).
  • TFE / propylene copolymer As fluororubber, from TFE / propylene copolymer, TFE / propylene / third monomer copolymer (the third monomer is VDF, HFP, CTFE, fluoroalkyl vinyl ethers, etc.), TFE and fluoroalkyl vinyl ethers.
  • the polymerization step may further polymerize the fluoromonomer in the presence of a nucleating agent.
  • the nucleating agent is preferably at least one selected from the group consisting of, for example, fluoropolyether, nonionic surfactant, and chain transfer agent.
  • the above-mentioned polymerization step has a pH in the presence of a hydrocarbon-based surfactant (excluding a nonionic surfactant), a nucleating agent and a polymerization initiator.
  • a fluoropolymer may be obtained by polymerizing a fluoromonomer in an aqueous medium of 4.0 or more.
  • the polymerization step polymerizes a fluoromonomer in an aqueous medium in the presence of an anionic hydrocarbon-based surfactant, a nucleating agent and a polymerization initiator to obtain a fluoropolymer. It may be what you get.
  • fluoropolyether perfluoropolyether is preferable.
  • the fluoropolyester preferably has a repeating unit represented by the formulas (1a) to (1d).
  • (-CFCF 3- CF 2- O-) n (1a) (-CF 2- CF 2- CF 2- O-) n (1b) (-CF 2 -CF 2 -O-) n - (- CF 2 -O-) m
  • (1c) (-CF 2 -CFCF 3 -O-) n - (- CF 2 -O-) m (1d)
  • m and n are integers of 1 or more.
  • fluoropolyetheric acid or a salt thereof is preferable, and the fluoropolyetheric acid is preferably a carboxylic acid, a sulfonic acid, a sulfonamide, or a phosphonic acid, and more preferably a carboxylic acid.
  • a salt of fluoropolyetheric acid is preferable, an ammonium salt of fluoropolyetheric acid is more preferable, and an ammonium salt of fluoropolyethercarboxylic acid is further preferable.
  • the fluoropolyether acid or a salt thereof can have any chain structure in which the oxygen atom in the main chain of the molecule is separated by a saturated fluorocarbon group having 1 to 3 carbon atoms. Two or more types of fluorocarbon groups may be present in the molecule.
  • the fluoropolyetheric acid or a salt thereof has the following formula: CF 3 -CF 2 -CF 2 -O ( -CFCF 3 -CF 2 -O-) n CFCF 3 -COOH, CF 3 -CF 2 -CF 2 -O (-CF 2 -CF 2 -CF 2 -O- ) N- CF 2- CF 2 COOH, or HOOC-CF 2 -O (-CF 2 -CF 2 -O-) n - (- CF 2 -O-) m CF 2 COOH (In the formula, m and n are the same as above.) It is preferably a compound represented by or a salt thereof.
  • fluoropolyesters can have a carboxylic acid group or a salt thereof at one end or both ends.
  • fluoropolyethers may have a sulfonic acid or phosphonic acid group or a salt thereof at one end or both ends.
  • fluoropolyesters having acid functional groups at both ends may have different groups at each end.
  • the other end of the molecule is usually hyperfluorinated, but may contain hydrogen or chlorine atoms.
  • Fluoropolyethers having acid groups at one or both ends have at least two ether oxygens, preferably at least four ether oxygens, and even more preferably at least six ether oxygens.
  • at least one of the fluorocarbon groups that separate the ether oxygen more preferably at least two of such fluorocarbon groups, has two or three carbon atoms. Even more preferably, at least 50% of the fluorocarbon groups that separate ether oxygen have 2 or 3 carbon atoms.
  • the fluoropolyester has at least 15 carbon atoms in total, and for example, the preferable minimum value of n or n + m in the above repeating unit structure is at least 5.
  • fluoropolyesters having an acid group at one end or both ends can be used in the methods according to the present disclosure.
  • a fluoropolyether may contain multiple compounds in various proportions within the molecular weight range relative to the average molecular weight. ..
  • the fluoropolyether preferably has a number average molecular weight of 800 g / mol or more.
  • the number average molecular weight of fluoropolyetheric acid or a salt thereof is preferably less than 6000 g / mol because it may be difficult to disperse in an aqueous medium.
  • the number average molecular weight of the fluoropolyether acid or a salt thereof is more preferably 800 to 3500 g / mol, and further preferably 1000 to 2500 g / mol.
  • the amount of the fluoropolyether is preferably 5 to 3000 ppm, more preferably 5 to 2000 ppm, a further preferable lower limit of 10 ppm, and a further preferable upper limit of 100 ppm with respect to the aqueous medium.
  • nonionic surfactant as the nucleating agent examples include a nonionic surfactant as a hydrocarbon-based surfactant described later, and a fluorine-free nonionic surfactant is preferable. ..
  • R 3z - OA 1- H (i) (In the formula, R 3z is a linear or branched primary or secondary alkyl group having 8 to 18 carbon atoms, and A 1 is a polyoxyalkylene chain.) Can be mentioned.
  • the carbon number of R 3z is preferably 10 to 16, and more preferably 12 to 16. When the carbon number of R 3z is 18 or less, good dispersion stability of the aqueous dispersion can be easily obtained.
  • the polyoxyalkylene chain may be composed of oxyethylene and oxypropylene.
  • the polyoxyalkylene chain is preferably a polyoxyalkylene chain having an average number of repetitions of 5 to 20 oxyethylene groups and an average number of repetitions of 0 to 2 oxypropylene groups, and is a hydrophilic group.
  • the number of oxyethylene units can include either the broad or narrow monomodal distribution normally provided, or the broader or bimodal distribution obtained by blending. When the average number of repetitions of the oxypropylene group is more than 0, the oxyethylene group and the oxypropylene group in the polyoxyalkylene chain may be arranged in a block shape or a random shape.
  • a polyoxyalkylene chain composed of an average number of repetitions of oxyethylene groups of 7 to 12 and an average number of repetitions of oxypropylene groups of 0 to 2 is preferable.
  • a 1 has an average of 0.5 to 1.5 oxypropylene groups because low foaming property is good.
  • R 3z is (R') (R ′′) HC-, where R'and R ′′ are linear, branched, or cyclic alkyl groups of the same or different.
  • the total amount of carbon atoms is at least 5, preferably 7 to 17.
  • at least one of R'or R'' is a branched or cyclic hydrocarbon group.
  • Specific examples of the compound (polyoxyethylene alkyl ether) represented by the above general formula (i) include C 13 H 27- O- (C 2 H 4 O) 10- H and C 13 H 27- O- (. C 2 H 4 O) 8- H, C 12 H 25- O- (C 2 H 4 O) 10- H, C 10 H 21 CH (CH 3 ) CH 2- O- (C 2 H 4 O) 9 -H, C 13 H 27 -O- ( C 2 H 4 O) 9 - (CH (CH 3) CH 2 O) -H, C 16 H 33 -O- (C 2 H 4 O) 10 -H, HC (C 5 H 11 ) (C 7 H 15 ) -O- (C 2 H 4 O) 9- H and the like can be mentioned.
  • Examples of commercially available products of the compound (polyoxyethylene alkyl ether) represented by the general formula (i) include Genapol X080 (product name, manufactured by Clariant) and Neugen TDS-80 (trade name).
  • TDS series manufactured by Daiichi Kogyo Seiyaku Co., Ltd.
  • Leocol TD-90 trade name
  • Leocol TD series manufactured by Lion
  • Lionol registered trademark
  • TD series manufactured by Lion
  • T-Det A138 Examples thereof include the T-Det A series (manufactured by Harcros Chemicals) and the Tagitol (registered trademark) 15S series (manufactured by Dow Chemicals).
  • the nonionic surfactant has an ethoxylate of 2,6,8-trimethyl-4-nonanol having an average of about 4 to about 18 ethylene oxide units, and an average of about 6 to about 12 ethylene oxide units 2, It is also preferable that it is an ethoxylate of 6,8-trimethyl-4-nonanol, or a mixture thereof.
  • This type of nonionic surfactant is also commercially available, for example, as TERGITOR TMN-6, TERGITOR TMN-10, and TERGITOR TMN-100X (all product names, manufactured by Dow Chemical Co., Ltd.).
  • the hydrophobic group of the nonionic surfactant may be any of an alkylphenol group, a linear alkyl group and a branched alkyl group.
  • examples of the polyoxyethylene alkyl phenyl ether-based nonionic compound include the following general formula (ii).
  • R 4z- C 6 H 4- O-A 2- H (ii) (In the formula, R 4z is a linear or branched primary or secondary alkyl group having 4 to 12 carbon atoms, and A 2 is a polyoxyalkylene chain.)
  • R 4z is a linear or branched primary or secondary alkyl group having 4 to 12 carbon atoms
  • a 2 is a polyoxyalkylene chain.
  • Specific examples of the polyoxyethylene alkyl phenyl ether-based nonionic compound include Triton (registered trademark) X-100 (trade name, manufactured by Dow Chemical Co., Ltd.) and the like.
  • nonionic surfactant examples include polyol compounds. Specific examples thereof include those described in International Publication No. 2011/014715.
  • a typical example of a polyol compound is a compound having one or more sugar units as a polyol unit.
  • the sugar unit may be modified to contain at least one long chain.
  • Suitable polyol compounds containing at least one long chain moiety include, for example, alkyl glycosides, modified alkyl glycosides, sugar esters, and combinations thereof.
  • sugars include, but are not limited to, monosaccharides, oligosaccharides, and sorbitan. Examples of monosaccharides include pentose and hexose.
  • Typical examples of monosaccharides include ribose, glucose, galactose, mannose, fructose, arabinose and xylose.
  • Examples of oligosaccharides include 2 to 10 oligomers of the same or different monosaccharides.
  • Examples of oligosaccharides include, but are not limited to, saccharose, maltose, lactose, raffinose, and isomaltose.
  • a suitable sugar for use as a polyol compound is a five-membered ring of four carbon atoms and one heteroatom (typically oxygen or sulfur, but preferably an oxygen atom).
  • examples thereof include a cyclic compound containing, or a cyclic compound containing a six-membered ring of five carbon atoms and one heteroatom as described above, preferably an oxygen atom. They further contain at least 2 or at least 3 hydroxy groups (-OH groups) attached to the carbocyclic atom.
  • the sugar is a hydrogen atom of a hydroxy group (and / or a hydroxyalkyl group) attached to a carbocyclic atom such that an ether or ester bond is formed between the long chain residue and the sugar moiety.
  • the sugar-based polyol may contain one sugar unit or a plurality of sugar units.
  • One sugar unit or a plurality of sugar units may be modified with the long chain portion as described above.
  • Specific examples of sugar-based polyol compounds include glycosides, sugar esters, sorbitan esters, and mixtures and combinations thereof.
  • Preferred types of polyol compounds are alkyl or modified alkyl glucosides. These types of surfactants contain at least one glucose moiety. (In the formula, x represents 0, 1, 2, 3, 4, or 5, and R 1y and R 2y independently represent H or a long chain unit containing at least 6 carbon atoms. However, compounds represented by (but at least one of R 1y and R 2y is not H) can be mentioned. Typical examples of R 1y and R 2y include aliphatic alcohol residues.
  • fatty alcohols examples include hexanol, heptanol, octanol, nonanol, decanol, undecanol, dodecanol (lauryl alcohol), tetradecanol, hexadecanol (cetyl alcohol), heptadecanol, octadecanol (stearyl alcohol), Eikosanoic acid and combinations thereof can be mentioned.
  • the above formula represents a specific example of an alkylpolyglucoside exhibiting a pyranose form of glucose, although other sugars or sugars of the same but different enantiomers or diastereomeric forms may be used. Understood.
  • Alkyl glucosides are available, for example, by acid-catalyzed reactions of glucose, starch, or n-butyl glucosides with fatty alcohols, from which a mixture of various alkyl glucosides is typically obtained (Alkylporygylcosine, Rombp). , Lexikon Chemie, Version 2.0, Starch / New York, Georg Timee Verlag, 1999).
  • fatty alcohols examples include hexanol, heptanol, octanol, nonanol, decanol, undecanol, dodecanol (lauryl alcohol), tetradecanol, hexadecanol (cetyl alcohol), heptadecanol, octadecanol (stearyl alcohol), Eikosanoic acid and combinations thereof can be mentioned.
  • alkyl glucosides are commercially available from Cognis GmbH, Dusseldorf, Germany under the trade names GLUCOPON or DISPONIL.
  • nonionic surfactants include bifunctional block copolymers supplied by BASF as the Pluronic® R series, and tridecyl alcohol alkoxylates supplied by BASF as the Iconol® TDA series. Examples thereof include hydrocarbon-containing siloxane surfactants.
  • the amount of the nonionic surfactant is preferably 0.1 to 0.000000001% by mass, more preferably 0.01 to 0.000001% by mass, based on the aqueous medium.
  • chain transfer agent examples include esters such as dimethyl malonate, diethyl malonate, methyl acetate, ethyl acetate, butyl acetate and dimethyl succinate, as well as isopentan, methane, ethane, propane, isobutane, methanol, ethanol and isopropanol. , Acetone, various mercaptans, various halogenated hydrocarbons such as carbon tetrachloride, cyclohexane and the like.
  • a bromine compound or an iodine compound may be used as the chain transfer agent.
  • Examples of the polymerization method using a bromine compound or an iodine compound include a method in which a fluoromonomer is polymerized in an aqueous medium in the presence of a bromine compound or an iodine compound in a substantially oxygen-free state ( Iodine transfer polymerization method).
  • Typical examples of the bromine compound or iodine compound used include, for example, the general formula: R a I x Br y (In the formula, x and y are integers of 0 to 2, respectively, and satisfy 1 ⁇ x + y ⁇ 2, and Ra is a saturated or unsaturated fluorohydrocarbon group having 1 to 16 carbon atoms or chlorofluoro. Examples thereof include a compound represented by a hydrocarbon group, or a hydrocarbon group having 1 to 3 carbon atoms, which may contain an oxygen atom).
  • a bromine compound or an iodine compound iodine or bromine is introduced into the polymer and functions as a cross-linking point.
  • bromine compound or iodine compound examples include 1,3-diiodoperfluoropropane, 2-iodoperfluoropropane, 1,3-diiodo-2-chloroperfluoropropane, 1,4-diiodoperfluorobutane, and 1 , 5-Diode-2,4-dichloroperfluoropentane, 1,6-diiodoperfluorohexane, 1,8-diiodoperfluorooctane, 1,12-diiodoperfluorododecane, 1,16-diiodine perfluoro hexadecane, diiodomethane, 1,2-diiodoethane, 1,3-diiodo -n- propane, CF 2 Br 2, BrCF 2 CF 2 Br, CF 3 CFBrCF 2 Br, CFClBr 2, BrCF 2 CFClB
  • At least one selected from the group consisting of alkanes and alcohols is preferable from the viewpoints of polymerization reactivity, cross-linking reactivity, availability, and the like.
  • the number of carbon atoms of the alkane is preferably 1 to 6, and more preferably 1 to 5.
  • the alcohol preferably has 1 to 5 carbon atoms, and more preferably 1 to 4 carbon atoms.
  • the chain transfer agent at least one selected from the group consisting of methane, ethane, propane, isobutane, methanol, ethanol, propanol, and isopropanol is particularly preferable.
  • the amount of the chain transfer agent is preferably 0.001 to 10000 ppm with respect to the aqueous medium.
  • the amount of the chain transfer agent is more preferably 0.01 ppm or more, further preferably 0.05 ppm or more, and particularly preferably 0.1 ppm or more with respect to the aqueous medium. Further, 1000 ppm or less is more preferable, 500 ppm or less is further preferable, and 100 ppm or less is particularly preferable with respect to the aqueous medium.
  • the chain transfer agent may be added collectively into the reaction vessel before the start of the polymerization, may be added collectively after the start of the polymerization, or may be added in a plurality of times during the polymerization. It may be added continuously during the polymerization.
  • an additive in addition to the above-mentioned hydrocarbon-based surfactant, polymerization initiator, nucleating agent used if desired, and the like, an additive can be used to stabilize each compound.
  • the additive include a buffer, a pH adjuster, a stabilizing aid, and a dispersion stabilizer.
  • paraffin wax paraffin wax, fluorine-based oil, fluorine-based solvent, silicone oil and the like are preferable.
  • the stabilizing aid may be used alone or in combination of two or more. Paraffin wax is more preferable as the stabilizing aid.
  • the paraffin wax may be liquid, semi-solid, or solid at room temperature, but saturated hydrocarbons having 12 or more carbon atoms are preferable.
  • the melting point of the paraffin wax is usually preferably 40 to 65 ° C, more preferably 50 to 65 ° C.
  • the amount of the stabilizing aid used is preferably 0.1 to 12% by mass, more preferably 0.1 to 8% by mass, based on the mass of the aqueous medium used. It is desirable that the stabilizing aid is sufficiently hydrophobic and is completely separated from the aqueous emulsion containing the fluoropolymer such as PTFE emulsion after the polymerization of the fluoromonomer such as TFE so as not to become a contaminated component.
  • the fluoromonomer used in the above polymerization step is preferably one having at least one double bond.
  • the fluoromonomer include tetrafluoroethylene [TFE], hexafluoropropylene [HFP], chlorotrifluoroethylene [CTFE], vinyl fluoride, vinylidene fluoride [VDF], trifluoroethylene, fluoroalkyl vinyl ether, and fluoroalkylethylene.
  • a fluoromonomer represented by General formula (120): CF 2 CF-OCH 2- Rf 121 (In the formula, Rf 121 is a perfluoroalkyl group having 1 to 5 carbon atoms).
  • CF 2 CFOCF 2 ORf 131
  • Rf 131 is a linear or branched perfluoroalkyl group having 1 to 6 carbon atoms, a cyclic perfluoroalkyl group having 5 to 6 carbon atoms, and 2 to 6 carbon atoms containing 1 to 3 oxygen atoms. It is a linear or branched perfluorooxyalkyl group of.).
  • General formula (140): CF 2 CFO (CF 2 CF (Y 141 ) O) m (CF 2 ) n F (In the formula, Y 141 represents a fluorine atom or a trifluoromethyl group.
  • M is an integer of 1 to 4.
  • n is an integer of 1 to 4.
  • CF 2 CF-O- (CF 2 CFY 151- O) n- (CFY 152 ) m- A 151
  • Y 151 represents a fluorine atom, a chlorine atom, a -SO 2 F group or a perfluoroalkyl group.
  • the perfluoroalkyl group may contain etheric oxygen and a -SO 2 F group. , 0 to 3.
  • n Y 151 may be the same or different.
  • Y 152 represents a fluorine atom, a chlorine atom or a -SO 2 F group. M is.
  • Y 152 represents an integer of 1 to 5 may be different or may be the same .
  • a 151 represents the -SO 2 X 151, -COZ 151 or -POZ 152 Z 153.
  • X 151 represents F, Cl, Br, I, -OR 151 or -NR 152 R 153 ;
  • Z 151 , Z 152 and Z 153 represent the same or different, -NR 154 R 155 or -OR 156 .
  • R 151 , R 152 , R 153 , R 154 , R 155 and R 156 represent alkyl, aryl, or sulfonyl-containing groups that may contain H, ammonium, alkali metal, or fluorine atoms, which may be identical or different. It is preferable that it is at least one selected from the group consisting of fluoromonomers represented by.).
  • perfluoroorganic group means an organic group in which all hydrogen atoms bonded to carbon atoms are replaced with fluorine atoms.
  • the perfluoroorganic group may have ether oxygen.
  • Examples of the fluoromonomer represented by the general formula (110) include a fluoromonomer in which Rf 111 is a perfluoroalkyl group having 1 to 10 carbon atoms.
  • the number of carbon atoms of the perfluoroalkyl group is preferably 1 to 5.
  • Examples of the perfluoroorganic group in the general formula (110) include a perfluoromethyl group, a perfluoroethyl group, a perfluoropropyl group, a perfluorobutyl group, a perfluoropentyl group, a perfluorohexyl group and the like.
  • Rf 111 is a perfluoro (alkoxyalkyl) group having 4 to 9 carbon atoms, and Rf 111 is the following formula:
  • Rf 111 is the following formula:
  • n an integer of 1 to 4.
  • CF 2 CF-ORf 161
  • Rf 161 represents a perfluoroalkyl group having 1 to 10 carbon atoms.
  • a fluoromonomer represented by is preferable.
  • Rf 161 is preferably a perfluoroalkyl group having 1 to 5 carbon atoms.
  • the fluoroalkyl vinyl ether is preferably at least one selected from the group consisting of fluoromonomers represented by the general formulas (160), (130) and (140).
  • the fluoromonomer represented by the general formula (160) at least one selected from the group consisting of perfluoro (methyl vinyl ether), perfluoro (ethyl vinyl ether), and perfluoro (propyl vinyl ether) is preferable. At least one selected from the group consisting of fluoro (methyl vinyl ether) and perfluoro (propyl vinyl ether) is more preferable.
  • CF 2 CFOCF 2 CF (CF 3 ) O (CF 2 ) 3 F
  • CF 2 CFO (CF 2 CF (CF 3 ) O) 2 (CF 2 ) ) 3 F
  • CF 2 CFO (CF 2 CF (CF 3 ) O) 2 (CF 2 )
  • CF 2 CFOCF 2 CF 2 SO 2 F
  • CF 2 CFOCF 2 CF (CF 3 ) OCF 2 CF 2 SO 2 F
  • CF 2 CFOCF 2 CF ( CF 2 CF 2 SO 2 F) OCF 2 CF 2 SO 2 F
  • CF 2 CFOCF 2 CF (SO 2 F) 2
  • At least one selected from the group is preferable.
  • CH 2 CFCF 2 CF 2 CF 2 CF 3
  • CH 2 CFCF 3 is 2, 3 , 3 , 3-Tetrafluoropropylene is preferred.
  • fluoroalkylallyl ether examples include, for example.
  • General formula (180): CF 2 CF-CF 2- ORf 111 (In the formula, Rf 111 represents a perfluoroorganic group.) Fluoromonomer represented by.
  • Rf 111 of the general formula (180) is the same as Rf 111 of the general formula (110).
  • Rf 111 a perfluoroalkyl group having 1 to 10 carbon atoms or a perfluoroalkoxyalkyl group having 1 to 10 carbon atoms is preferable.
  • the general formula (230) (In the formula, X 231 and X 232 are independently F, Cl, methoxy group or fluorinated methoxy group, and Y 231 is formula Y 232 or formula Y 233 .
  • Z 231 and Z 232 are independently F or a fluorinated alkyl group having 1 to 3 carbon atoms.)
  • Fluorinated vinyl heterocyclic bodies are mentioned.
  • CX 181 2 CX 182- R f 181 CHR 181 X 183
  • X 181 and X 182 are independently hydrogen atoms, fluorine atoms or CH 3
  • R f 181 are fluoroalkylene groups, perfluoroalkylene groups, fluoro (poly) oxyalkylene groups or perfluoro (poly).
  • An oxyalkylene group, R 181 is a hydrogen atom or CH 3
  • X 183 is a fluoromonomer represented by an iodine atom or a bromine atom.
  • CX 191 2 CX 192- R f 191 X 193
  • X 191 and X 192 are independent hydrogen atoms, fluorine atoms or CH 3
  • R f 191 is a fluoroalkylene group, a perfluoroalkylene group, a fluoropolyoxyalkylene group or a perfluoropolyoxyalkylene group.
  • X 193 is a fluoromonomer represented by an iodine atom or a bromine atom.
  • CF 2 CFO (CF 2 CF (CF 3 ) O) m (CF 2 ) n- X 201
  • m is an integer of 0 to 5
  • n is an integer of 1 to 3
  • X 201 is a cyano group, a carboxyl group, an alkoxycarbonyl group, an iodine atom, a bromine atom, or -CH 2 I.
  • Fluoromonomono represented by and General formula (210): CH 2 CFCF 2 O (CF (CF 3 ) CF 2 O) m (CF (CF 3 )) n- X 211
  • m is an integer of 0 to 5
  • n is an integer of 1 to 3
  • X 211 is a cyano group, a carboxyl group, an alkoxycarbonyl group, an iodine atom, a bromine atom, or -CH 2 OH.
  • Z 221 is linear or branched.
  • P is 0 or 1.
  • M / n is 0.2 to 5.
  • the molecular weight is 500 to 10000 (par). It is a fluoropolyoxyalkylene group.
  • X 183 and X 193 are iodine atoms.
  • R f 181 and R f 191 are preferably perfluoroalkylene groups having 1 to 5 carbon atoms.
  • R181 is preferably a hydrogen atom.
  • X 201 is preferably a cyano group, an alkoxycarbonyl group, an iodine atom, a bromine atom, or -CH 2 I.
  • X 211 is preferably a cyano group, an alkoxycarbonyl group, an iodine atom, a bromine atom, or -CH 2 OH.
  • CF 2 CFOCF 2 CF (CF 3 ) OCF 2 CF 2 CN
  • CF 2 CFOCF 2 CF (CF 3 ) OCF 2 CF 2 COOH
  • CF 2 CFOCF 2 CF (CF 3 ) OCF 2 CF 2 CH 2 I
  • CF 2 CFOCF 2 CF 2 CH 2 I
  • CH 2 CFCF 2 OCF (CF 3 ) CF 2 OCF (CF 3 ) CN
  • CH 2 CFCF 2 OCF (CF 3 ) CF 2 OCF (CF 3 ) COOH
  • CH 2 CFCF 2 OCF (CF 3 ) CF 2 OCF (CF 3 ) CH 2 OH
  • CH 2 CHCF 2 CF 2 I
  • CF 2 CFO (CF 2 ) 5
  • the fluoromonomer and the fluorine-free monomer may be polymerized.
  • the fluorine-free monomer include hydrocarbon-based monomers having reactivity with the fluoromonomer.
  • hydrocarbon-based monomer include alkens such as ethylene, propylene, butylene, and isobutylene; alkyl vinyl ethers such as ethyl vinyl ether, propyl vinyl ether, butyl vinyl ether, isobutyl vinyl ether, and cyclohexyl vinyl ether; vinyl acetate, vinyl propionate, n.
  • the fluorine-free monomer may also be a functional group-containing hydrocarbon-based monomer (excluding the monomer that provides a cross-linking site).
  • the functional group-containing hydrocarbon monomer include hydroxyalkyl vinyl ethers such as hydroxyethyl vinyl ether, hydroxypropyl vinyl ether, hydroxybutyl vinyl ether, hydroxyisobutyl vinyl ether, and hydroxycyclohexyl vinyl ether; itaconic acid, succinic acid, succinic anhydride, and fumal.
  • Fluoro-free monomer having a carboxyl group such as acid, fumaric anhydride, crotonic acid, maleic acid, maleic anhydride, perfluorobutenoic acid; fluorine-free monomer having a glycidyl group such as glycidyl vinyl ether and glycidyl allyl ether; aminoalkyl Fluoro-free monomers having an amino group such as vinyl ether and aminoalkylallyl ether; fluorine-free monomers having an amide group such as (meth) acrylamide and methylol acrylamide can be mentioned.
  • particles of a desired fluoropolymer can be obtained by polymerizing one or more of the fluoromonomers.
  • hydrocarbon-based surfactant for example, those described in Japanese Patent Publication No. 2013-542308, Japanese Patent Publication No. 2013-542309, and Japanese Patent Publication No. 2013-542310 can be used.
  • the hydrocarbon-based surfactant may be a surfactant having a hydrophilic portion and a hydrophobic portion on the same molecule. These may be cationic, nonionic or anionic.
  • Cationic hydrocarbon-based surfactants usually have a positively charged hydrophilic moiety such as alkylated ammonium halide such as alkylated ammonium bromide and a hydrophobic moiety such as long chain fatty acids.
  • Anionic hydrocarbon-based surfactants usually have a hydrophilic moiety such as a carboxylate, a sulfonate or a sulfate, and a hydrophobic moiety that is a long chain hydrocarbon moiety such as alkyl.
  • Nonionic hydrocarbon-based surfactants are usually free of charged groups and have hydrophobic moieties that are long-chain hydrocarbons.
  • the hydrophilic moiety of the nonionic hydrocarbon surfactant contains a water-soluble functional group such as a chain of ethylene ether derived from polymerization with ethylene oxide.
  • nonionic hydrocarbon surfactants Polyoxyethylene alkyl ethers, polyoxyethylene alkyl phenyl ethers, polyoxyethylene alkyl esters, sorbitan alkyl esters, polyoxyethylene sorbitan alkyl esters, glycerol esters, and derivatives thereof.
  • polyoxyethylene alkyl ethers polyoxyethylene lauryl ether, polyoxyethylene cetyl ether, polyoxyethylene stearyl ether, polyoxyethylene oleyl ether, polyoxyethylene behenyl ether and the like.
  • polyoxyethylene alkyl phenyl ether polyoxyethylene nonyl phenyl ether, polyoxyethylene octyl phenyl ether and the like.
  • polyoxyethylene alkyl esters polyethylene glycol monolaurylate, polyethylene glycol monooleate, polyethylene glycol monostearate, etc.
  • sorbitan alkyl ester polyoxyethylene sorbitan monolaurate, polyoxyethylene sorbitan monopalmitate, polyoxyethylene sorbitan monostearate, polyoxyethylene sorbitan monooleate, etc.
  • polyoxyethylene sorbitan alkyl ester polyoxyethylene sorbitan monolaurate, polyoxyethylene sorbitan monopalmitate, polyoxyethylene sorbitan monostearate and the like.
  • glycerol ester glycerol monomyristate, glycerol monostearate, glycerol monooleate and the like.
  • polyoxyethylene alkylamine polyoxyethylene alkylphenyl-formaldehyde condensate, polyoxyethylene alkyl ether phosphate and the like.
  • the ethers and esters may have an HLB value of 10-18.
  • Nonionic hydrocarbon-based surfactants include Triton® X-series (X15, X45, X100, etc.), Tergitol® 15-S series, and Tergitol® TMN manufactured by Dow Chemical Co., Ltd. Series (TMN-6, TMN-10, TMN-100, etc.), Tergitol (registered trademark) L series, BASF's Pluronic (registered trademark) R series (31R1, 17R2, 10R5, 25R4 (m-22, n ⁇ ) 23), Iconol® TDA series (TDA-6, TDA-9, TDA-10) and the like.
  • anionic hydrocarbon-based surfactant examples include Versatic (registered trademark) 10 of Resolution Performance Products and Avanel S series (S-70, S-74, etc.) manufactured by BASF.
  • the anionic hydrocarbon-based surfactant includes Rz- LM (in the formula, Rz is a linear or branched alkyl group having 1 or more carbon atoms which may have a substituent. Or, it is a cyclic alkyl group having 3 or more carbon atoms which may have a substituent, and when it has 3 or more carbon atoms, it may contain a monovalent or divalent heterocyclic ring or forms a ring.
  • R 5z is, H, or an organic group
  • -ArSO 3 - is the aryl sulfonate Anionic surfactants represented by.)
  • R 5z is preferably H or an organic group having 1 to 10 carbon atoms, and more preferably H or an organic group having 1 to 4 carbon atoms.
  • CH 3- (CH 2 ) n- LM (in the formula, n is an integer of 6 to 17) such as lauryl acid and lauryl sulfate (dodecyl sulfate).
  • M is represented by (same as above).
  • R z is an alkyl group having 12 to 16 carbon atoms and LM is a sulfate can also be used.
  • R 6z ( -LM ) 2 in the formula, R 6z may have a substituent and has a linear or branched chain having 1 or more carbon atoms.
  • R 7z (-LM) 3 (in the formula, R 7z may have a substituent and has a linear or branched chain having 1 or more carbon atoms. It is a cyclic alkylidine group having 3 or more carbon atoms which may have a substituent or a substituent, and when the number of carbon atoms is 3 or more, it may contain a monovalent or divalent heterocycle, or the ring may be formed.
  • the R 5z is preferably H or an alkyl group, more preferably H or an alkyl group having 1 to 10 carbon atoms, and even more preferably H or an alkyl group having 1 to 4 carbon atoms.
  • substituted means a substitutable group. Examples of the "substituent” include an aliphatic group, an aromatic group, a heterocyclic group, an acyl group, an acyloxy group, an acylamino group, an aliphatic oxy group, an aromatic oxy group, a heterocyclic oxy group, and an aliphatic oxycarbonyl group.
  • hydrocarbon-based surfactant examples include a siloxane hydrocarbon-based surfactant.
  • siloxane hydrocarbon-based surfactant examples include Silicone Surfactants, R.M. M. Hill, Marcel Dekker, Inc. , ISBN: 0-8247-00104.
  • the structure of siloxane hydrocarbon-based surfactants includes distinct hydrophobic and hydrophilic moieties.
  • the hydrophobic moiety comprises one or more dihydrocarbylsiloxane units, where the substituents on the silicone atom are completely hydrocarbons.
  • siloxane hydrocarbon-based surfactants should be considered hydrocarbon-based surfactants in the sense that they are completely substituted by hydrogen atoms when the carbon atoms of the hydrocarbyl group can be replaced by halogens such as fluorine. That is, the monovalent substituent on the carbon atom of the hydrocarbyl group is hydrogen.
  • hydrophilic moieties of siloxane hydrocarbon surfactants are sulfate, sulfonate, phosphonate, phosphate ester, carboxylate, carbonate, sulfosuccinate, taurate (as free acid, salt or ester), phosphine oxide, betaine, betaine. It may contain one or more polar moieties containing ionic groups such as copolyols, quaternary ammonium salts. The ionic hydrophobic moiety may also include an ionically functionalized siloxane graft.
  • siloxane hydrocarbon-based surfactant examples include polydimethylsiloxane-graft- (meth) acrylate, polydimethylsiloxane-graft-polyacrylate salt and polydimethylsiloxane-grafted quaternary amine. ..
  • the polar part of the hydrophilic portion of the siloxane hydrocarbon surfactant is polyethylene oxide (PEO), and a mixed polyether such as polyethylene oxide / propylene oxide polyether (PEO / PPO); monosaccharides and disaccharides; and It may contain nonionic groups formed by water-soluble heterocycles such as pyrrolidinone.
  • the ratio of ethylene oxide to propylene oxide (EO / PO) can be varied in the mixed polyethylene oxide / propylene oxide polyether.
  • the hydrophilic moiety of the siloxane hydrocarbon surfactant may also include a combination of an ionic moiety and a nonionic moiety.
  • Such moieties include, for example, ionic terminal-functionalized or randomly functionalized polyethers or polyols.
  • Preferred for carrying out the present disclosure is a siloxane having a nonionic moiety, i.e., a nonionic siloxane hydrocarbon-based surfactant.
  • siloxane hydrocarbon surfactants The arrangement of hydrophobic and hydrophilic moieties in the structure of siloxane hydrocarbon surfactants is diblock polymer (AB), triblock polymer (ABA) (where "B” represents the siloxane moiety of the molecule), Alternatively, it may take the form of a multi-block polymer. Alternatively, the siloxane surfactant may include a graft polymer.
  • Siloxane hydrocarbon-based surfactants are also disclosed in US Pat. No. 6,841,616.
  • siloxane-based anionic hydrocarbon-based surfactants examples include Lubrizol Advanced Materials, Inc. Examples thereof include SilSense TM PE-100 Silicone and SilSense TM CA-1 Silicone, which are available from Consumer Specialties of Noveon®.
  • anionic hydrocarbon-based surfactant examples include the sulfosuccinate surfactant Lankropol (registered trademark) K8300 of Akzo Nobel Interface Chemistry LLC.
  • sulfosuccinate surfactant examples include diisodecyl sulfosuccinate salt (Clariant's Emulsogen® SB10), diisotridecyl sulfosuccinate Na salt (Cesapinia Chemicals' Polar® TR / LNA) and the like.
  • hydrocarbon-based surfactant examples include Omniova Solutions, Inc. PolyFox® surfactants (PolyFox TM PF-156A, PolyFox TM PF-136A, etc.) are also mentioned.
  • an anionic hydrocarbon-based surfactant is preferable.
  • the anionic hydrocarbon-based surfactant the above-mentioned ones can be adopted, and for example, the following compounds can be preferably adopted.
  • anionic hydrocarbon-based surfactant examples include the following formula ( ⁇ ): R 100- COMM ( ⁇ ) (Wherein, R 100 is a is .M monovalent organic group containing 1 or more carbon atoms, H, a metal atom, NR 101 4, good imidazolium be substituted, substituted
  • the compound ( ⁇ ) represented by ( ⁇ ) is a pyridinium which may have a group or a phosphonium which may have a substituent, and R 101 is H or an organic group, which may be the same or different. Can be mentioned.
  • An alkyl group is preferable as the organic group of R 101 .
  • an organic group having H or 1 to 10 carbon atoms is preferable, an organic group having H or 1 to 4 carbon atoms is more preferable, and an alkyl group having H or 1 to 4 carbon atoms is further preferable.
  • the number of carbon atoms of R 100 is preferably 2 or more, 3 or more is more preferable. From the viewpoint of water solubility, the number of carbon atoms of R 100 is, preferably 29 or less, more preferably 23 or less.
  • the metal atom of M include alkali metals (Group 1) and alkaline earth metals (Group 2), and Na, K or Li are preferable.
  • the M, H, a metal atom or NR 101 4 are preferable, H, an alkali metal (Group 1), alkaline earth metal (Group 2) or NR 101 4, more preferably, H, Na, K, Li or NH 4 Is even more preferred, Na, K or NH 4 is even more preferred, Na or NH 4 is particularly preferred, and NH 4 is most preferred.
  • Examples of the compound ( ⁇ ) include R 102- COMM (in the formula, R 102 may have a substituent, a linear or branched alkyl group having 1 or more carbon atoms, an alkenyl group, an alkylene group, or the like. It is an alkenylene group or a cyclic alkyl group having 3 or more carbon atoms, an alkenyl group, an alkylene group or an alkenylene group which may have a substituent, and these may contain an ether bond. When the number of carbon atoms is 3 or more. May contain a monovalent or divalent heterocycle, or may form a ring. M is the same as above), and an anionic hydrocarbon-based surfactant is also mentioned. Specifically, those represented by CH 3- (CH 2 ) n- COOM (in the equation, n is an integer of 2 to 28; M is the same as above) can be mentioned.
  • the compound ( ⁇ ) may not contain a carbonyl group (excluding the carbonyl group in the carboxyl group) from the viewpoint of emulsion stability.
  • the hydrocarbon-containing surfactant containing no carbonyl group include the following formula (A): R 103- COO-M (A) (Wherein, R 103 is an alkyl group, an alkenyl group, an alkylene group or alkenylene group, which may contain an ether bond .M is H, a metal atom, NR 101 4, have a substituent A compound of imidazolium, pyridinium which may have a substituent, or phosphonium which may have a substituent. R 101 is the same or different, H or an organic group).
  • R 103 is preferably an alkyl group or an alkenyl group (these may contain an ether group).
  • the alkyl group or alkenyl group in R 103 may be linear or branched.
  • the carbon number of R 103 is not limited, but is, for example, 2 to 29.
  • the carbon number of R 103 is preferably 3 to 29, and more preferably 5 to 23.
  • the number of carbon atoms of R 103 is preferably 5 to 25, more preferably 11 to 23.
  • the carbon number of R 103 is preferably 2 to 29, more preferably 9 to 23.
  • the number of carbon atoms of R 103 is preferably 2 to 29, more preferably 3 to 29, and even more preferably 9 to 23.
  • alkyl group and alkenyl group examples include a methyl group, an ethyl group, an isobutyl group, a t-butyl group, a vinyl group and the like.
  • anionic hydrocarbon-based surfactant examples include butyric acid, valeric acid, caproic acid, enanthic acid, capric acid, pelargonic acid, capric acid, undecanoic acid, lauric acid, myristic acid, pentadecic acid and palmitic acid.
  • lauric acid undecanoic acid, capric acid, myristic acid, pentadecic acid, palmitic acid, and salts thereof is preferable, and lauric acid and its salts are more preferable, and lauric acid and its salts are more preferable. Salts are particularly preferred, with sodium laurate or ammonium laurate being most preferred.
  • the metal atom of the formula M hydrogen of the carboxyl groups mentioned above, NR 101 4, which may imidazolium substituted, pyridinium which may have a substituent, or a substituent Examples thereof include those which are phosphoniums which may be possessed, but are not particularly limited.
  • anionic hydrocarbon-based surfactant examples include hydrocarbon-based surfactants having one or more carbonyl groups (excluding the carbonyl group in the carboxyl group).
  • R X -X X As the hydrocarbon-based surfactant having one or more of the above carbonyl groups (excluding the carbonyl group in the carboxyl group), the formula: R X -X X (Wherein, R X is a carbonyl group (excluding the carbonyl group in the carboxyl group) and is one or more having fluorine-containing organic group of 1-2000 carbon atoms, X X is -OSO 3 X X1 , -COOX X1 or -SO 3 X X1 (X X1 is H, metal atom, NR X1 4 , imidazolium which may have a substituent, pyridinium which may have a substituent or a substituent.
  • RX1 is an H or an organic group, and may be the same or different.
  • the surfactant represented by) is preferable.
  • R X preferably has a carbon number is 500 or less, more preferably 100 or less, more preferably 50 or less, still more preferably is 30 or less.
  • the organic group of R X1 is preferably an alkyl group. As RX1 , H or an organic group having 1 to 10 carbon atoms is preferable, H or an organic group having 1 to 4 carbon atoms is more preferable, and H or an alkyl group having 1 to 4 carbon atoms is further preferable.
  • the specific hydrocarbon-based surfactant includes the following formula (a):
  • R 1a is a linear or branched alkyl group having 1 or more carbon atoms or a cyclic alkyl group having 3 or more carbon atoms, and the hydrogen atom bonded to the carbon atom has a hydroxy group or an ester bond. It may be substituted with a monovalent organic group containing it, may contain a carbonyl group when it has 2 or more carbon atoms, and may contain a monovalent or divalent heterocyclic ring when it has 3 or more carbon atoms. It may be formed.
  • R 2a and R 3a are independently single-bonded or divalent linking groups.
  • R 1a , R 2a and R 3a have a total of 6 or more carbon atoms.
  • X a. Is H, a metal atom, NR 4a 4 , imidazolium which may have a substituent, pyridinium which may have a substituent or phosphonium which may have a substituent, and R 4a is It may be H or an organic group, and may be the same or different.
  • R 1a , R 2a and R 3a may be bonded to each other to form a ring).
  • R 1b is a linear or branched alkyl group having 1 or more carbon atoms which may have a substituent or a cyclic alkyl group having 3 or more carbon atoms which may have a substituent. If the number of carbon atoms is 3 or more, a monovalent or divalent heterocycle may be contained or a ring may be formed.
  • R 2b and R 4b are independently H or a substituent.
  • R 3b is an H or a substituent.
  • N is an integer of 1 or more.
  • P and q are independently integers of 0 or more.
  • X b is H.
  • R 5b is H or organic. It is a group and may be the same or different. Any two of R 1b , R 2b , R 3b and R 4b may be bonded to each other to form a ring.
  • L is a single bond, ⁇ CO 2 -B- *, -OCO-B- *, -CONR 6b -B- *, -NR 6b CO-B- *, or -CO- (However, -CO 2 -B-, -OCO-B -, -CONR 6b -B-, -NR 6 Excluding the carbonyl group contained in CO-B-), where B is an alkylene group having 1 to 10 carbon atoms which may have a single bond or a substituent. Yes , R 6b is an alkyl group having 1 to 4 carbon atoms, which may have H or a substituent. * Indicates the side bonded to -OSO 3 X b in the formula).
  • R 1c is a linear or branched alkyl group having 1 or more carbon atoms or a cyclic alkyl group having 3 or more carbon atoms, and the hydrogen atom bonded to the carbon atom has a hydroxy group or an ester bond. It may be substituted with a monovalent organic group containing it, may contain a carbonyl group when it has 2 or more carbon atoms, and may contain a monovalent or divalent heterocycle when it has 3 or more carbon atoms.
  • R 2c and R 3c are independently a single bond or a divalent linking group .
  • R 1c, R 2c and R 3c are 5 or more total carbon atoms .
  • a c Is -COOX c or -SO 3 X c (X c is H, metal atom, NR 4c 4 , imidazolium which may have a substituent, pyridinium which may have a substituent or a substituent.
  • R 4c is an H or an organic group and may be the same or different.) In R 1c , R 2c and R 3c , any two of them are bonded to each other.
  • the surfactant (c) represented by () and the following formula (d):
  • R 1d is a linear or branched alkyl group having 1 or more carbon atoms which may have a substituent or a cyclic alkyl group having 3 or more carbon atoms which may have a substituent. If the number of carbon atoms is 3 or more, a monovalent or divalent heterocycle may be contained or a ring may be formed.
  • R 2d and R 4d are independently H or a substituent.
  • R 3d is an H or a substituent.
  • a is .n alkylene group having 1 to 10 carbon atoms which may have a substituent
  • a is .p and q is an integer of 1 or more, independently, an integer of 0 or more .
  • a d is - SO 3 X d or -COOX d (X d has an H, a metal atom, NR 5d 4 , an imidazolium which may have a substituent, a pyridinium which may have a substituent, or a substituent.
  • R 5d is H or an organic group and may be the same or different.
  • R 1d, R 2d, R 3d and R 4d are coupled to either 2 Tsugaotagai
  • a ring may be formed.
  • L is a single bond, -CO 2 -B- *, -OCO -B- *, -CONR 6d -B- *, -NR 6d CO-B- *, or. , -CO- (excluding the carbonyl group contained in -CO 2 -B-, -OCO -B-, -CONR 6d -B-, -NR 6d CO-B-), where B is a single bond.
  • R 6d is H or an alkyl group having 1 to 4 carbon atoms which may have a substituent.
  • at least one member selected from the group consisting of surfactant (d) represented by the point.) the side to be bonded to a d in the formula are more preferred.
  • the surfactant (a) will be described.
  • R 1a is a linear or branched alkyl group having 1 or more carbon atoms or a cyclic alkyl group having 3 or more carbon atoms.
  • the alkyl group may contain a monovalent or divalent heterocycle when the number of carbon atoms is 3 or more, or may form a ring.
  • a monovalent or divalent heterocycle when the number of carbon atoms is 3 or more, or may form a ring.
  • an unsaturated heterocycle is preferable, an oxygen-containing unsaturated heterocycle is more preferable, and examples thereof include a furan ring.
  • a monovalent heterocycle may be located at the end of the alkyl group.
  • the "carbon number" of the alkyl group includes the number of carbon atoms constituting the carbonyl group and the number of carbon atoms constituting the heterocycle.
  • the group represented by CH 3- C ( O)-has 2 carbon atoms.
  • the hydrogen atom bonded to the carbon atom may be substituted with a functional group, for example, a hydroxy group (-OH) or a monovalent organic group containing an ester bond may be substituted. It is preferably not substituted with any functional group.
  • 75% or less of the hydrogen atom bonded to the carbon atom may be substituted with a halogen atom, 50% or less may be substituted with a halogen atom, and 25% or less may be substituted with a halogen atom.
  • R 2a and R 3a are independently single-bonded or divalent linking groups. It is preferable that R 2a and R 3a are independently a single bond or a linear or branched alkylene group having 1 or more carbon atoms or a cyclic alkylene group having 3 or more carbon atoms.
  • the alkylene groups constituting R 2a and R 3a preferably do not contain a carbonyl group.
  • the hydrogen atom bonded to the carbon atom may be substituted with a functional group, for example, a hydroxy group (-OH) or a monovalent organic group containing an ester bond may be substituted. It is preferably not substituted with any functional group.
  • 75% or less of the hydrogen atom bonded to the carbon atom may be substituted with a halogen atom, 50% or less may be substituted with a halogen atom, and 25% or less may be substituted with a halogen atom.
  • R 1a , R 2a and R 3a have a total of 6 or more carbon atoms. As the total number of carbon atoms, 8 or more is preferable, 9 or more is more preferable, 10 or more is further preferable, 20 or less is more preferable, 18 or less is more preferable, and 15 or less is further preferable. Any two of R 1a , R 2a and R 3a may be bonded to each other to form a ring.
  • X a is, H, a metal atom, NR 4a 4, which may imidazolium substituted, may have an optionally substituted pyridinium or substituent It is a good phosphonium and R4a is H or an organic group.
  • the four R4a may be the same or different.
  • the alkyl group is preferable as the organic group in R 4a .
  • R 4a H or an organic group having 1 to 10 carbon atoms is preferable, H or an organic group having 1 to 4 carbon atoms is more preferable, and H or an alkyl group having 1 to 4 carbon atoms is further preferable.
  • Examples of the metal atom include monovalent and divalent metal atoms, and examples thereof include alkali metals (Group 1) and alkaline earth metals (Group 2), with Na, K or Li being preferable.
  • alkali metals (Group 1) alkaline earth metals (Group 2) or NR 4a 4 is preferable, and H, Na, K, Li or NH 4 is more preferable because it is easily dissolved in water. Further since the easily soluble in water, Na, K or NH 4 are more preferred, particularly preferably Na or NH 4 is, since removal is easy, NH 4 being the most preferred.
  • X a is NH 4 , the solubility of the above-mentioned surfactant in an aqueous medium is excellent, and metal components are less likely to remain in PTFE or the final product.
  • R 1a includes a linear or branched alkyl group having 1 to 8 carbon atoms that does not contain a carbonyl group, a cyclic alkyl group having 3 to 8 carbon atoms that does not contain a carbonyl group, and 1 to 10 carbonyl groups.
  • Alkyl groups containing rings are preferred.
  • R 1a the following formula: (In the formula, n 11a is an integer of 0 to 10, R 11a is a linear or branched alkyl group having 1 to 5 carbon atoms or a cyclic alkyl group having 3 to 5 carbon atoms, and R 12a. Is an alkylene group having 0 to 3 carbon atoms. When n 11a is an integer of 2 to 10, R 12a may be the same or different from each other.) The group represented by is more preferable.
  • n 11a an integer of 0 to 5 is preferable, an integer of 0 to 3 is more preferable, and an integer of 1 to 3 is further preferable.
  • the alkyl group as R 11a preferably does not contain a carbonyl group.
  • the hydrogen atom bonded to the carbon atom may be substituted with a functional group, for example, a hydroxy group (-OH) or a monovalent organic group containing an ester bond. It may be, but it is preferable that it is not substituted with any functional group.
  • the hydrogen atom bonded to the carbon atom may be substituted with a halogen atom, 50% or less may be substituted with a halogen atom, and 25% or less is a halogen.
  • it may be substituted with an atom, it is preferably a non-halogenated alkyl group containing no halogen atom such as a fluorine atom or a chlorine atom.
  • R 12a is an alkylene group having 0 to 3 carbon atoms. The number of carbon atoms is preferably 1 to 3.
  • the alkylene group as R 12a may be linear or branched.
  • the alkylene group as R 12a preferably does not contain a carbonyl group.
  • the R 12a an ethylene group (-C 2 H 4 -) or propylene group (-C 3 H 6 -) is more preferred.
  • the alkylene group as R 12a may have a hydrogen atom bonded to a carbon atom substituted with a functional group, for example, a hydroxy group (-OH) or a monovalent organic group containing an ester bond. It may be, but it is preferable that it is not substituted with any functional group.
  • R 104a is an alkyl group.
  • 75% or less of the hydrogen atom bonded to the carbon atom may be substituted with a halogen atom, 50% or less may be substituted with a halogen atom, and 25% or less is halogen.
  • it may be substituted with an atom, it is preferably a non-halogenated alkylene group containing no halogen atom such as a fluorine atom or a chlorine atom.
  • the R 2a and R 3a independently, preferably an alkylene group having 1 or more carbon containing no carbonyl group, more preferably an alkylene group having 1 to 3 carbon atoms which does not contain a carbonyl group, an ethylene group (-C 2 H 4 -) or propylene group (-C 3 H 6 -) is more preferred.
  • surfactant (a) examples include the following surfactants.
  • X a is as described above.
  • R 1b is a linear or branched alkyl group having 1 or more carbon atoms which may have a substituent or a cyclic alkyl having 3 or more carbon atoms which may have a substituent. It is a group. When the number of carbon atoms is 3 or more, the alkyl group may contain a monovalent or divalent heterocycle, or may form a ring. As the heterocycle, an unsaturated heterocycle is preferable, an oxygen-containing unsaturated heterocycle is more preferable, and examples thereof include a furan ring.
  • a monovalent heterocycle may be located at the end of the alkyl group.
  • the "carbon number" of the alkyl group also includes the number of carbon atoms constituting the heterocycle.
  • alkyl group as R 1b may have include a halogen atom, a linear or branched alkyl group having 1 to 10 carbon atoms, or a cyclic alkyl group having 3 to 10 carbon atoms.
  • a hydroxy group is preferable, and a methyl group and an ethyl group are particularly preferable.
  • the alkyl group as R 1b preferably does not contain a carbonyl group.
  • 75% or less of the hydrogen atom bonded to the carbon atom may be substituted with a halogen atom, 50% or less may be substituted with a halogen atom, and 25% or less may be substituted with a halogen atom.
  • it is preferably a non-halogenated alkyl group that does not contain a halogen atom such as a fluorine atom or a chlorine atom.
  • the alkyl group preferably does not have any substituents.
  • a linear or branched alkyl group having 1 to 10 carbon atoms which may have a substituent or a cyclic alkyl group having 3 to 10 carbon atoms which may have a substituent is preferable.
  • a linear or branched alkyl group having 1 to 10 carbon atoms containing no carbonyl group or a cyclic alkyl group having 3 to 10 carbon atoms containing no carbonyl group is more preferable, and the number of carbon atoms having no substituent is preferable.
  • a linear or branched alkyl group of 1 to 10 is more preferable, and a linear or branched alkyl group having 1 to 3 carbon atoms having no substituent is even more preferable, and a methyl group (-CH). 3 ) or an ethyl group (-C 2 H 5 ) is particularly preferable, and a methyl group (-CH 3 ) is most preferable.
  • R 2b and R 4b are independently H or substituents.
  • the plurality of R 2b and R 4b may be the same or different from each other.
  • a halogen atom a linear or branched alkyl group having 1 to 10 carbon atoms, a cyclic alkyl group having 3 to 10 carbon atoms, and a hydroxy group are preferable, and methyl.
  • a group and an ethyl group are particularly preferable.
  • the alkyl groups as R 2b and R 4b preferably do not contain a carbonyl group.
  • 75% or less of the hydrogen atom bonded to the carbon atom may be substituted with a halogen atom, 50% or less may be substituted with a halogen atom, and 25% or less may be substituted with a halogen atom.
  • it is preferably a non-halogenated alkyl group that does not contain a halogen atom such as a fluorine atom or a chlorine atom.
  • the alkyl group preferably does not have any substituents.
  • the alkyl groups as R 2b and R 4b include linear or branched alkyl groups having 1 to 10 carbon atoms which do not contain a carbonyl group, or cyclic alkyl groups having 3 to 10 carbon atoms which do not contain a carbonyl group. Is preferable, a linear or branched alkyl group having 1 to 10 carbon atoms containing no carbonyl group is more preferable, and a linear or branched alkyl group having 1 to 3 carbon atoms having no substituent is preferable. Is more preferable, and a methyl group (-CH 3 ) or an ethyl group (-C 2 H 5 ) is particularly preferable.
  • linear or branched alkyl groups having 1 to 10 carbon atoms which do not contain H or a carbonyl group are preferable, and 1 to 3 carbon atoms which do not have H or a substituent are preferable.
  • the linear or branched alkyl group of H, methyl group (-CH 3 ) or ethyl group (-C 2 H 5 ) is even more preferable, and H is particularly preferable.
  • R 3b is an alkylene group having 1 to 10 carbon atoms which may have a substituent. When a plurality of R 3b are present, they may be the same or different.
  • the alkylene group preferably does not contain a carbonyl group.
  • 75% or less of the hydrogen atom bonded to the carbon atom may be substituted with a halogen atom, 50% or less may be substituted with a halogen atom, and 25% or less may be substituted with a halogen atom.
  • it is preferably a non-halogenated alkyl group that does not contain a halogen atom such as a fluorine atom or a chlorine atom.
  • the alkylene group preferably does not have any substituents.
  • alkylene group a linear or branched alkylene group having 1 to 10 carbon atoms which may have a substituent or a cyclic alkylene group having 3 to 10 carbon atoms which may have a substituent may be used.
  • a linear or branched alkylene group having 1 to 10 carbon atoms containing no carbonyl group or a cyclic alkylene group having 3 to 10 carbon atoms containing no carbonyl group is preferable, and the number of carbon atoms having no substituent is preferable.
  • R 1b , R 2b , R 3b and R 4b may be bonded to each other to form a ring, but it is preferable that the ring is not formed.
  • n is an integer of 1 or more.
  • an integer of 1 to 40 is preferable, an integer of 1 to 30 is more preferable, an integer of 5 to 25 is further preferable, and an integer of 5 to 9, 11 to 25 is particularly preferable.
  • p and q are independently integers greater than or equal to 0.
  • p an integer of 0 to 10 is preferable, and 0 or 1 is more preferable.
  • q an integer of 0 to 10 is preferable, and an integer of 0 to 5 is more preferable.
  • n, p and q are integers having a total of 5 or more. It is more preferable that the sum of n, p and q is an integer of 8 or more. The sum of n, p and q is also preferably an integer of 60 or less, more preferably an integer of 50 or less, and even more preferably an integer of 40 or less.
  • X b may have H, a metal atom, NR 5b 4 , imidazolium which may have a substituent, pyridinium which may have a substituent, or a substituent. It is a good phosphonium and R 5b is an H or organic group. The four R 5b may be the same or different.
  • An alkyl group is preferable as the organic group in R 5b .
  • R 5b an organic group having H or 1 to 10 carbon atoms is preferable, an organic group having H or 1 to 4 carbon atoms is more preferable, and an alkyl group having H or 1 to 4 carbon atoms is further preferable.
  • Examples of the metal atom include monovalent and divalent metal atoms, and examples thereof include alkali metals (Group 1) and alkaline earth metals (Group 2), with Na, K or Li being preferable.
  • X b may be a metal atom or NR 5b 4 (R 5b is as described above).
  • R 5b is as described above.
  • H, alkali metal (Group 1), alkaline earth metal (Group 2) or NR 5b 4 is preferable, and H, Na, K, Li or NH 4 is more preferable because it is easily dissolved in water.
  • Na, K or NH 4 are more preferred, particularly preferably Na or NH 4 is, since removal is easy, NH 4 being the most preferred.
  • X b is NH 4
  • the solubility of the above-mentioned surfactant in an aqueous medium is excellent, and metal components are unlikely to remain in PTFE or the final product.
  • L is a single bond, -CO 2 -B- *, -OCO-B- *, -CONR 6b -B- *, -NR 6b CO-B- *, or -CO- ( However, the carbonyl group contained in -CO 2 -B-, -OCO-B-, -CONR 6b -B-, and -NR 6 CO-B- is excluded), and B has a single bond or a substituent. It is an alkylene group having 1 to 10 carbon atoms, and R 6b is an alkyl group having 1 to 4 carbon atoms which may have H or a substituent. The alkylene group more preferably has 1 to 5 carbon atoms. Further, it is more preferable that R 6 is H or a methyl group. * Refers to the side that binds to -OSO 3 X b in the equation.
  • L is preferably a single bond.
  • the surfactant (b) has the following formula: (In the formula, R 1b , R 2b , L, n and X b are as described above.)
  • the compounds represented by are preferable.
  • the surfactant (b) preferably has an integral value of the total peak intensity observed in the region of 2.0 to 5.0 ppm of chemical shift of 10% or more in the 1 H-NMR spectrum.
  • the integrated value of the total peak intensities observed in the region of chemical shift 2.0 to 5.0 ppm is within the above range in the 1 H-NMR spectrum.
  • the surfactant preferably has a ketone structure in the molecule.
  • the integral value is more preferably 15 or more, preferably 95 or less, more preferably 80 or less, and further preferably 70 or less.
  • the above integrated value is measured in a heavy water solvent at room temperature. Heavy water is 4.79 ppm.
  • surfactant (b) for example, CH 3 C (O) CH 2 CH 2 CH 2 CH 2 CH 2 CH 2 CH 2 CH 2 CH 2 CH 2 CH 2 CH 2 OSO 3 Na, CH 3 C (O) CH 2 CH 2 CH 2 CH 2 CH 2 CH 2 CH 2 OSO 3 Na, CH 3 C (O) CH 2 CH 2 CH 2 CH 2 CH 2 CH 2 OSO 3 Na, CH 3 C (O) CH 2 CH 2 CH 2 CH 2 CH 2 OSO 3 Na, CH 3 C (O) CH 2 CH 2 CH 2 CH 2 OSO 3 Na, CH 3 C (O) CH 2 CH 2 CH 2 OSO 3 Na, (CH 3 ) 3 CC (O) CH 2 CH 2 CH 2 CH 2 CH 2 CH 2 CH 2 CH 2 OSO 3 Na, (CH 3 ) 2 CHC (O) CH 2 CH 2 CH 2 CH 2 CH 2 CH 2 CH 2 CH 2 OSO 3 Na, (CH 2 ) 5 CHC (O) CH 2 CH 2 CH 2 CH 2 CH 2 CH 2 CH 2 CH 2 OSO 3 Na, (CH 2 ) 5 CHC (
  • the surfactant (c) will be described.
  • R 1c is a linear or branched alkyl group having 1 or more carbon atoms or a cyclic alkyl group having 3 or more carbon atoms.
  • the alkyl group may contain a monovalent or divalent heterocycle when the number of carbon atoms is 3 or more, or may form a ring.
  • a monovalent or divalent heterocycle when the number of carbon atoms is 3 or more, or may form a ring.
  • an unsaturated heterocycle is preferable, an oxygen-containing unsaturated heterocycle is more preferable, and examples thereof include a furan ring.
  • a monovalent heterocycle may be located at the end of the alkyl group.
  • the "carbon number" of the alkyl group includes the number of carbon atoms constituting the carbonyl group and the number of carbon atoms constituting the heterocycle.
  • the group represented by CH 3- C ( O)-has 2 carbon atoms.
  • the hydrogen atom bonded to the carbon atom may be substituted with a functional group, for example, a hydroxy group (-OH) or a monovalent organic group containing an ester bond may be substituted. It is preferably not substituted with any functional group.
  • 75% or less of the hydrogen atom bonded to the carbon atom may be substituted with a halogen atom, 50% or less may be substituted with a halogen atom, and 25% or less may be substituted with a halogen atom.
  • R 2c and R 3c are independently single-bonded or divalent linking groups. It is preferable that R 2c and R 3c are independently a single bond or a linear or branched alkylene group having 1 or more carbon atoms or a cyclic alkylene group having 3 or more carbon atoms.
  • the alkylene groups constituting R 2c and R 3c preferably do not contain a carbonyl group.
  • the hydrogen atom bonded to the carbon atom may be substituted with a functional group, for example, a hydroxy group (-OH) or a monovalent organic group containing an ester bond may be substituted. It is preferably not substituted with any functional group.
  • 75% or less of the hydrogen atom bonded to the carbon atom may be substituted with a halogen atom, 50% or less may be substituted with a halogen atom, and 25% or less may be substituted with a halogen atom.
  • R 1c , R 2c and R 3c have a total of 5 or more carbon atoms.
  • the total number of carbon atoms is preferably 7 or more, more preferably 9 or more, preferably 20 or less, more preferably 18 or less, and even more preferably 15 or less. Any two of R 1c , R 2c and R 3c may be bonded to each other to form a ring.
  • a c is, -COOX c or -SO 3 X c
  • X c is, H, a metal atom, NR 4c 4, good imidazolium be substituted, the substituent It is a pyridinium which may have a substituent or a phosphonium which may have a substituent
  • R 4c is H or an organic group, which may be the same or different).
  • the alkyl group is preferable as the organic group in R 4c .
  • R 4c H or an organic group having 1 to 10 carbon atoms is preferable, H or an organic group having 1 to 4 carbon atoms is more preferable, and H or an alkyl group having 1 to 4 carbon atoms is further preferable.
  • Examples of the metal atom include monovalent and divalent metal atoms, and examples thereof include alkali metals (Group 1) and alkaline earth metals (Group 2), with Na, K or Li being preferable.
  • alkali metals (Group 1) alkaline earth metals (Group 2) or NR 4c 4 is preferable, and H, Na, K, Li or NH 4 is more preferable because it is easily dissolved in water. Further since the easily soluble in water, Na, K or NH 4 are more preferred, particularly preferably Na or NH 4 is, since removal is easy, NH 4 being the most preferred.
  • X c is NH 4 , the solubility of the above-mentioned surfactant in an aqueous medium is excellent, and metal components are unlikely to remain in PTFE or the final product.
  • R 1c includes a linear or branched alkyl group having 1 to 8 carbon atoms that does not contain a carbonyl group, a cyclic alkyl group having 3 to 8 carbon atoms that does not contain a carbonyl group, and 1 to 10 carbonyl groups.
  • Alkyl groups containing rings are preferred.
  • R 1c the following formula: (In the formula, n 11c is an integer of 0 to 10, R 11c is a linear or branched alkyl group having 1 to 5 carbon atoms or a cyclic alkyl group having 3 to 5 carbon atoms, and R 12c. Is an alkylene group having 0 to 3 carbon atoms. When n 11c is an integer of 2 to 10, R 12c may be the same or different from each other.) The group represented by is more preferable.
  • n 11c an integer of 0 to 5 is preferable, an integer of 0 to 3 is more preferable, and an integer of 1 to 3 is further preferable.
  • the alkyl group as R 11c preferably does not contain a carbonyl group.
  • the hydrogen atom bonded to the carbon atom may be substituted with a functional group, for example, a hydroxy group (-OH) or a monovalent organic group containing an ester bond is substituted. It may be, but it is preferable that it is not substituted with any functional group.
  • the hydrogen atom bonded to the carbon atom may be substituted with a halogen atom, 50% or less may be substituted with a halogen atom, and 25% or less is a halogen.
  • it may be substituted with an atom, it is preferably a non-halogenated alkyl group containing no halogen atom such as a fluorine atom or a chlorine atom.
  • R 12c is an alkylene group having 0 to 3 carbon atoms. The number of carbon atoms is preferably 1 to 3.
  • the alkylene group as R 12c may be linear or branched.
  • the alkylene group as R 12c preferably does not contain a carbonyl group.
  • the R 12c an ethylene group (-C 2 H 4 -) or propylene group (-C 3 H 6 -) is more preferred.
  • the alkylene group as R 12c may have a hydrogen atom bonded to a carbon atom substituted with a functional group, for example, a hydroxy group (-OH) or a monovalent organic group containing an ester bond. It may be, but it is preferable that it is not substituted with any functional group.
  • R 12c 75% or less of the hydrogen atom bonded to the carbon atom may be substituted with a halogen atom, 50% or less may be substituted with a halogen atom, and 25% or less is halogen.
  • it may be substituted with an atom, it is preferably a non-halogenated alkylene group containing no halogen atom such as a fluorine atom or a chlorine atom.
  • R 2c and R 3c independently, preferably an alkylene group having 1 or more carbon containing no carbonyl group, more preferably an alkylene group having 1 to 3 carbon atoms which does not contain a carbonyl group, an ethylene group (-C 2 H 4 -) or propylene group (-C 3 H 6 -) is more preferred.
  • surfactant (c) examples include the following surfactants.
  • Ac is as described above.
  • the surfactant (d) will be described.
  • the "carbon number" of the alkyl group also includes the number of carbon atoms constituting the heterocycle.
  • alkyl group as R 1d may have include a halogen atom, a linear or branched alkyl group having 1 to 10 carbon atoms, or a cyclic alkyl group having 3 to 10 carbon atoms.
  • a hydroxy group is preferable, and a methyl group and an ethyl group are particularly preferable.
  • the alkyl group as R 1d preferably does not contain a carbonyl group.
  • 75% or less of the hydrogen atom bonded to the carbon atom may be substituted with a halogen atom, 50% or less may be substituted with a halogen atom, and 25% or less may be substituted with a halogen atom.
  • it is preferably a non-halogenated alkyl group that does not contain a halogen atom such as a fluorine atom or a chlorine atom.
  • the alkyl group preferably does not have any substituents.
  • a linear or branched alkyl group having 1 to 10 carbon atoms which may have a substituent or a cyclic alkyl group having 3 to 10 carbon atoms which may have a substituent is preferable.
  • a linear or branched alkyl group having 1 to 10 carbon atoms containing no carbonyl group or a cyclic alkyl group having 3 to 10 carbon atoms containing no carbonyl group is more preferable, and the number of carbon atoms having no substituent is preferable.
  • a linear or branched alkyl group of 1 to 10 is more preferable, and a linear or branched alkyl group having 1 to 3 carbon atoms having no substituent is even more preferable, and a methyl group (-CH). 3 ) or an ethyl group (-C 2 H 5 ) is particularly preferable, and a methyl group (-CH 3 ) is most preferable.
  • R 2d and R 4d are independently H or substituents.
  • the plurality of R 2d and R 4d may be the same or different from each other.
  • a halogen atom a linear or branched alkyl group having 1 to 10 carbon atoms, a cyclic alkyl group having 3 to 10 carbon atoms, or a hydroxy group is preferable, and methyl A group and an ethyl group are particularly preferable.
  • the alkyl groups as R 2d and R 4d preferably do not contain a carbonyl group.
  • 75% or less of the hydrogen atom bonded to the carbon atom may be substituted with a halogen atom, 50% or less may be substituted with a halogen atom, and 25% or less may be substituted with a halogen atom.
  • it is preferably a non-halogenated alkyl group that does not contain a halogen atom such as a fluorine atom or a chlorine atom.
  • the alkyl group preferably does not have any substituents.
  • the alkyl groups as R 2d and R 4d include linear or branched alkyl groups having 1 to 10 carbon atoms which do not contain a carbonyl group, or cyclic alkyl groups having 3 to 10 carbon atoms which do not contain a carbonyl group. Is preferable, a linear or branched alkyl group having 1 to 10 carbon atoms containing no carbonyl group is more preferable, and a linear or branched alkyl group having 1 to 3 carbon atoms having no substituent is preferable. Is more preferable, and a methyl group (-CH 3 ) or an ethyl group (-C 2 H 5 ) is particularly preferable.
  • linear or branched alkyl groups having 1 to 10 carbon atoms which do not contain H or a carbonyl group are preferable, and 1 to 3 carbon atoms which do not have H or a substituent are preferable.
  • the linear or branched alkyl group of H, methyl group (-CH 3 ) or ethyl group (-C 2 H 5 ) is even more preferable, and H is particularly preferable.
  • R 3d is an alkylene group having 1 to 10 carbon atoms which may have a substituent. When a plurality of R3d are present, they may be the same or different.
  • the alkylene group preferably does not contain a carbonyl group.
  • 75% or less of the hydrogen atom bonded to the carbon atom may be substituted with a halogen atom, 50% or less may be substituted with a halogen atom, and 25% or less may be substituted with a halogen atom.
  • it is preferably a non-halogenated alkyl group that does not contain a halogen atom such as a fluorine atom or a chlorine atom.
  • the alkylene group preferably does not have any substituents.
  • alkylene group a linear or branched alkylene group having 1 to 10 carbon atoms which may have a substituent or a cyclic alkylene group having 3 to 10 carbon atoms which may have a substituent may be used.
  • a linear or branched alkylene group having 1 to 10 carbon atoms containing no carbonyl group or a cyclic alkylene group having 3 to 10 carbon atoms containing no carbonyl group is preferable, and the number of carbon atoms having no substituent is preferable.
  • R 1d , R 2d , R 3d and R 4d may be bonded to each other to form a ring.
  • n is an integer of 1 or more. As n, an integer of 1 to 40 is preferable, an integer of 1 to 30 is more preferable, and an integer of 5 to 25 is further preferable.
  • p and q are independently integers greater than or equal to 0.
  • p an integer of 0 to 10 is preferable, and 0 or 1 is more preferable.
  • q an integer of 0 to 10 is preferable, and an integer of 0 to 5 is more preferable.
  • n, p and q are integers having a total of 6 or more. It is more preferable that the sum of n, p and q is an integer of 8 or more. The sum of n, p and q is also preferably an integer of 60 or less, more preferably an integer of 50 or less, and even more preferably an integer of 40 or less.
  • a d is -SO 3 X d or -COOX d
  • X d has H, a metal atom, NR 5d 4, good imidazolium be substituted, the substituent It is a pyridinium which may be present or a phosphonium which may have a substituent
  • R5d is H or an organic group, which may be the same or different).
  • An alkyl group is preferable as the organic group in R 5d .
  • R 5d an organic group having H or 1 to 10 carbon atoms is preferable, an organic group having H or 1 to 4 carbon atoms is more preferable, and an alkyl group having H or 1 to 4 carbon atoms is further preferable.
  • Examples of the metal atom include monovalent and divalent metal atoms, and examples thereof include alkali metals (Group 1) and alkaline earth metals (Group 2), with Na, K or Li being preferable.
  • X d may be a metal atom or NR 5d 4 (R 5d is as described above).
  • R 5d is as described above.
  • H, alkali metal (Group 1), alkaline earth metal (Group 2) or NR 5d 4 is preferable, and H, Na, K, Li or NH 4 is more preferable because it is easily dissolved in water.
  • Na, K or NH 4 are more preferred, particularly preferably Na or NH 4 is, since removal is easy, NH 4 being the most preferred.
  • X d is NH 4
  • the solubility of the above-mentioned surfactant in an aqueous medium is excellent, and metal components are unlikely to remain in PTFE or the final product.
  • L is a single bond, -CO 2 -B- *, -OCO -B- *, -CONR 6d -B- *, -NR 6d CO-B- *, or -CO- ( However, the carbonyl group contained in -CO 2 -B-, -OCO -B-, -CONR 6d -B-, and -NR 6d CO-B- is excluded), and B has a single bond or a substituent.
  • It is an alkylene group having 1 to 10 carbon atoms
  • R 6d is an alkyl group having 1 to 4 carbon atoms which may have H or a substituent.
  • the alkylene group more preferably has 1 to 5 carbon atoms.
  • the R 6d is more preferably H or a methyl group.
  • L is preferably a single bond.
  • the above-mentioned surfactant preferably has an integral value of 10 or more of the total peak intensities observed in the region of chemical shift 2.0 to 5.0 ppm.
  • the integrated value of the total peak intensities observed in the region of chemical shift 2.0 to 5.0 ppm is within the above range in the 1 H-NMR spectrum.
  • the surfactant preferably has a ketone structure in the molecule.
  • the integral value is more preferably 15 or more, preferably 95 or less, more preferably 80 or less, and further preferably 70 or less.
  • the above integrated value is measured in a heavy water solvent at room temperature. Heavy water is 4.79 ppm.
  • surfactant (d) examples include, for example. CH 3 C (O) CH 2 CH 2 CH 2 CH 2 CH 2 CH 2 CH 2 CH 2 CH 2 CH 2 COOK, CH 3 C (O) CH 2 CH 2 CH 2 CH 2 CH 2 CH 2 COONa, CH 3 C (O) CH 2 CH 2 CH 2 CH 2 CH 2 COONa, CH 3 C (O) CH 2 CH 2 CH 2 CH 2 CH 2 COONa, CH 3 C (O) CH 2 CH 2 CH 2 CH 2 COONa, CH 3 C (O) CH 2 CH 2 CH 2 COONa, CH 3 C (O) CH 2 CH 2 CH 2 CH 2 CH 2 CH 2 CH 2 CH 2 COONa, CH 3 C (O) CH 2 CH 2 CH 2 CH 2 CH 2 CH 2 CH 2 CH 2 COONa, CH 3 C (O) CH 2 CH 2 CH 2 CH 2 CH 2 CH 2 CH 2 CH 2 CH 2 COONa, CH 3 C (O) CH 2 CH 2 CH 2 CH 2 CH 2 CH 2 CH 2 CH 2 CH 2 COONa, CH 3 C (O) CH 2 CH
  • the anionic hydrocarbon-based surfactant includes the following general formula (1): (In the formula, R 1 to R 5 represent H or a monovalent substituent, except that at least one of R 1 and R 3 is a group represented by the general formula: -Y-R 6 , R 2 and of R 5, at least one of the general formula: a group represented by -X-a, or the general formula: represents a group represented by -Y-R 6.
  • X is the same or different at each appearance, and is a divalent linking group or a bond;
  • A is identical or different at each occurrence, -COOM, is -SO 3 M or -OSO 3 M (M, H, a metal atom, NR 7 4, which may imidazolium have a substituent, Pyridineium which may have a substituent or phosphonium which may have a substituent (R 7 is H or an organic group);
  • R 6 is an alkyl group having 1 or more carbon atoms which may contain at least one selected from the group consisting of a carbonyl group, an ester group, an amide group and a sulf
  • R 1 to R 5 represent H or a monovalent substituent, provided that at least one of R 1 and R 3 is a group represented by the general formula: —Y—R 6 , R 2 and At least one of R 5 represents a group represented by the general formula: -X-A or a group represented by the general formula: -Y-R 6 . Any two of R 1 to R 5 may be bonded to each other to form a ring.
  • alkyl group as R 1 may have include a halogen atom, a linear or branched alkyl group having 1 to 10 carbon atoms, or a cyclic alkyl group having 3 to 10 carbon atoms.
  • a hydroxy group is preferable, and a methyl group and an ethyl group are particularly preferable.
  • the alkyl group as R 1 preferably does not contain a carbonyl group.
  • 75% or less of the hydrogen atom bonded to the carbon atom may be substituted with a halogen atom, 50% or less may be substituted with a halogen atom, and 25% or less may be substituted with a halogen atom.
  • it is preferably a non-halogenated alkyl group that does not contain a halogen atom such as a fluorine atom or a chlorine atom.
  • the alkyl group preferably does not have any substituents.
  • the R 1, is preferably a straight chain or branched cyclic alkyl group of an alkyl group or substituent to 3 carbon atoms which may have a 10 having 1 to 10 carbon atoms which may have a substituent ,
  • a linear or branched alkyl group having 1 to 10 carbon atoms containing no carbonyl group or a cyclic alkyl group having 3 to 10 carbon atoms containing no carbonyl group is more preferable, and the number of carbon atoms having no substituent is preferable.
  • a linear or branched alkyl group of 1 to 10 is more preferable, and a linear or branched alkyl group having 1 to 3 carbon atoms having no substituent is even more preferable, and a methyl group (-CH). 3 ) or an ethyl group (-C 2 H 5 ) is particularly preferable, and a methyl group (-CH 3 ) is most preferable.
  • the alkyl group preferably has 1 to 10 carbon atoms.
  • X represents the same or different divalent linking group or bond in each appearance.
  • R 6 does not contain any of a carbonyl group, an ester group, an amide group and a sulfonyl group
  • X is a divalent containing at least one selected from the group consisting of a carbonyl group, an ester group, an amide group and a sulfonyl group. It is preferable that it is a linking group of.
  • R 8 represents H or an organic group.
  • the organic group in R 8 is preferably an alkyl group.
  • R 8 an organic group of H or C 1-10 is preferable, an organic group of H or C 1-4 is more preferable, an alkyl group of H or C 1-4 is more preferable, and H is even more preferable.
  • A identical or different at each occurrence, -COOM, is -SO 3 M or -OSO 3 M (M, H, a metal atom, NR 7 4, good imidazolium be substituted , phosphonium may have a good pyridinium or substituted group which may have a substituent, R 7 .4 one R 7 is H or an organic group represents a good.) to be identical or different ..
  • the alkyl group is preferable as the organic group in R 7 .
  • R 7 an organic group of H or C 1-10 is preferable, an organic group of H or C 1-4 is more preferable, and an alkyl group of H or C 1-4 is further preferable.
  • the metal atom include alkali metals (Group 1) and alkaline earth metals (Group 2), and Na, K or Li is preferable.
  • the M, H, a metal atom or NR 7 4 are preferable, H, an alkali metal (Group 1), alkaline earth metal (Group 2) or NR 7 4, more preferably, H, Na, K, Li or NH 4 Is even more preferred, Na, K or NH 4 is even more preferred, Na or NH 4 is particularly preferred, and NH 4 is most preferred.
  • the organic group in R 8 is preferably an alkyl group.
  • R 8 an organic group of H or C 1-10 is preferable, an organic group of H or C 1-4 is more preferable, an alkyl group of H or C 1-4 is more preferable, and H is even more preferable.
  • R 6 has one or more carbon atoms which may contain at least one selected from the group consisting of a carbonyl group, an ester group, an amide group and a sulfonyl group, which is the same or different at each appearance, between carbon atoms.
  • the number of carbon atoms of the organic group of R 6 is preferably 2 or more, preferably 20 or less, more preferably 2 to 20, and even more preferably 2 to 10.
  • the alkyl group of R 6 contains at least one or two selected from the group consisting of a carbonyl group, an ester group, an amide group and a sulfonyl group between carbon-carbon atoms. However, these groups are not contained at both ends of the above alkyl groups.
  • 75% or less of the hydrogen atom bonded to the carbon atom may be substituted with a halogen atom, 50% or less may be substituted with a halogen atom, and 25% or less may be a halogen atom.
  • a non-halogenated alkyl group containing no halogen atom such as a fluorine atom or a chlorine atom is preferable.
  • R 6 General formula: -R 10 -Group represented by -CO-R 11 , General formula: -R 10 -Group represented by COO-R 11 General formula: a group represented by -R 11, General formula: -R 10- NR 8 Group represented by CO-R 11 or General formula: -R 10- CONR 8- R 11 groups, (In the formula, R 8 represents H or an organic group.
  • R 10 is an alkylene group and R 11 is an alkyl group which may have a substituent).
  • R 6 the group represented by the general formula: ⁇ R 10 ⁇ CO—R 11 is more preferable.
  • the organic group in R 8 is preferably an alkyl group.
  • R 8 an organic group of H or C 1-10 is preferable, an organic group of H or C 1-4 is more preferable, an alkyl group of H or C 1-4 is more preferable, and H is even more preferable.
  • the carbon number of the alkylene group of R 10 is preferably 1 or more, more preferably 3 or more, more preferably 20 or less, further preferably 12 or less, further preferably 10 or less, and particularly preferably 8 or less.
  • the carbon number of the alkylene group of R 10 is preferably 1 to 20, more preferably 1 to 10, and even more preferably 3 to 10.
  • the alkyl group of R 11 may have 1 to 20 carbon atoms, preferably 1 to 15, more preferably 1 to 12, further preferably 1 to 10, further preferably 1 to 8, and 1 to 6. Particularly preferably, 1 to 3 is even more preferable, 1 or 2 is particularly preferable, and 1 is most preferable. Further, the alkyl group of R 11 is preferably composed of only primary carbon, secondary carbon and tertiary carbon, and particularly preferably composed of only primary carbon and secondary carbon. That is, as the R 11, a methyl group, an ethyl group, n- propyl group, an isopropyl group are preferable, especially a methyl group is most preferred.
  • a compound represented by the general formula (1-1), a compound represented by the general formula (1-2) or a compound represented by the general formula (1-3) is preferable, and the compound represented by the general formula (1-3) is preferable.
  • the compound represented by 1-1) or the compound represented by the general formula (1-2) is more preferable.
  • R 12 is an alkylene group of C 1-10 .) Is preferable. In the alkylene group of R 12 , 75% or less of the hydrogen atom bonded to the carbon atom may be substituted with a halogen atom, 50% or less may be substituted with a halogen atom, and 25% or less may be a halogen atom. Although it may be substituted with, a non-halogenated alkylene group containing no halogen atom such as a fluorine atom or a chlorine atom is preferable.
  • Examples of the group represented by -Y-R 6, the general formula General formula: -R 10 -Group represented by -CO-R 11 , General formula: -OCO-R 10 -Group represented by -CO-R 11 General formula: -COO-R 10 -Group represented by -CO-R 11 General formula: -OCO-R 10 -Group represented by -COO-R 11 General formula: -Group represented by COO-R 11 General formula: -NR 8 CO-R 10 -Group represented by -CO-R 11 or General formula: -CONR 8- R 10- NR 8 A group represented by CO-R 11 (in the formula, R 8 , R 10 and R 11 are as described above) is preferable.
  • R 4 and R 5 are independently preferably H or C 1-4 alkyl groups.
  • 75% or less of hydrogen atoms bonded to carbon atoms may be substituted with halogen atoms, 50% or less may be substituted with halogen atoms, and 25% or less. May be substituted with a halogen atom, but a non-halogenated alkyl group containing no halogen atom such as a fluorine atom or a chlorine atom is preferable.
  • an alkyl group of C 1-20 which may have H or a substituent is preferable, and an alkyl group of C 1-20 which does not have H or a substituent is preferable. Is more preferable, and H is further preferable.
  • Alkyl group of the R 3 may be substituted by 75% or less halogen atom of the hydrogen atoms bonded to carbon atoms, may be 50% or less is optionally substituted by halogen atom, 25% or less halogen atom although it may be substituted with, a non-halogenated alkyl group containing no halogen atom such as a fluorine atom or a chlorine atom is preferable.
  • an alkyl group of C 1-20 which may have H, OH or a substituent is preferable, and C 1- which does not have H, OH or a substituent is preferable.
  • the alkyl group of 20 is more preferred, and H or OH is even more preferred.
  • 75% or less of the hydrogen atom bonded to the carbon atom may be substituted with a halogen atom, 50% or less may be substituted with a halogen atom, and 25% or less may be a halogen atom.
  • a non-halogenated alkyl group containing no halogen atom such as a fluorine atom or a chlorine atom is preferable.
  • anionic hydrocarbon-based surfactant examples include the following formula (1-0A): (Wherein, R 1A ⁇ R 5A is, H, carbon - may also be a monovalent hydrocarbon group containing an ester group between carbon atoms, or the general formula:. A group represented by -X A -A However , at least one of R 2A and R 5A has the general formula: represents a group represented by -X a -A.
  • X A is the same or different at each appearance, a divalent hydrocarbon group, or a bond; A may be the same or different at each occurrence, -COOM (M is H, a metal atom, NR 7 4, which may imidazolium substituted, pyridinium which may have a substituent group or a substituted phosphonium may have a group, R 7 is, H, or an organic group); Any two of R 1A to R 5A may be bonded to each other to form a ring. ), And the like, as well as the surfactant (1-0A).
  • the monovalent hydrocarbon group which may contain an ester group between carbon atoms preferably has 1 to 50 carbon atoms, preferably 5 to 20 carbon atoms. Is more preferable. Any two of R 1A to R 5A may be bonded to each other to form a ring.
  • An alkyl group is preferable as the monovalent hydrocarbon group which may contain an ester group between carbon atoms.
  • the divalent carbon number of the hydrocarbon group is 1 to 50, more preferably 5 to 20.
  • the divalent hydrocarbon group include an alkylene group and an alkanediyl group, and an alkylene group is preferable.
  • any one of R 2A and R 5A is preferably a group represented by the above general formula: -X A- A, and R 2A is the above general formula: -X A-. More preferably, it is the group represented by A.
  • R 2A is a group represented by the general formula: ⁇ XAA— A
  • R 1A , R 3A , R 4A and R 5A are H. Is.
  • X A is an alkylene group having a bond or a C 1-5.
  • R 2A is the general formula: a group represented by -X A -A, R 1A and R 3A are represented by -Y A -R 6 a group, Y a is the same or different at each occurrence, -COO -, - OCO-, or a bond, R 6 is identical or different at each occurrence, with one or more alkyl groups having a carbon number It is an aspect. In this case, it is preferable that R 4A and R 5A are H.
  • hydrocarbon-based surfactant represented by the general formula (1-0A) examples include glutaric acid or a salt thereof, adipic acid or a salt thereof, pimelic acid or a salt thereof, suberic acid or a salt thereof, azelaic acid or a salt thereof. Examples thereof include salt, sebacic acid or a salt thereof.
  • the aliphatic carboxylic acid type hydrocarbon surfactant represented by the general formula (1-0A) may be a double chain 2 hydrophilic group type synthetic surfactant, for example, a Gemini type surfactant. Examples thereof include Geminisurf (Chukyo Yushi Co., Ltd.), Gemsulf ⁇ 142 (12 lauryl groups), Gemsulf ⁇ 102 (10 carbons), Gemsulf ⁇ 182 (14 carbon atoms) and the like.
  • the hydrocarbon-based surfactant may be one that has been subjected to radical treatment or oxidation treatment.
  • the radical treatment may be any treatment for generating radicals in the hydrocarbon-based surfactant.
  • deionized water and a hydrocarbon-based surfactant are added to the reactor, the reactor is sealed, and the system is used. This is a process in which the inside is replaced with nitrogen, the temperature of the reactor is raised and the pressure is raised, a polymerization initiator is charged, the reactor is stirred for a certain period of time, and then the reactor is depressurized to atmospheric pressure to cool it.
  • the above-mentioned oxidation treatment is a treatment in which an oxidizing agent is added to a hydrocarbon-based surfactant.
  • the oxidizing agent examples include oxygen, ozone, hydrogen peroxide solution, manganese oxide (IV), potassium permanganate, potassium dichromate, nitric acid, sulfur dioxide and the like.
  • the radical treatment or the oxidation treatment may be carried out in a pH-adjusted aqueous solution.
  • the pH of the aqueous solution for radical treatment or oxidation treatment is preferably less than 7, and the pH of the aqueous solution can be adjusted by using, for example, sulfuric acid, nitric acid, hydrochloric acid or the like.
  • two or more of the above hydrocarbon-based surfactants may be used at the same time, and the hydrocarbon-based surfactants used in the above-mentioned polymerization step and addition step may be the same or different.
  • the hydrocarbon-based surfactant in the polymerization step and the addition step is preferably an anionic hydrocarbon-based surfactant, and the compound ( ⁇ ), the surfactant (a), the surfactant (b), and the above.
  • the hydrocarbon-based surfactant is a carboxylic acid-type hydrocarbon-based surfactant.
  • the carboxylic acid type hydrocarbon-based surfactant is usually an anionic hydrocarbon-based surfactant having a hydrophilic portion of a carboxylate and a hydrophobic portion which is a long-chain hydrocarbon portion such as alkyl. is there. Specifically, it may have a carboxyl group (-COOH) or a group in which the hydrogen atom of the carboxyl group is substituted with an inorganic cation (for example, a metal atom, ammonium, etc.).
  • the carboxylic acid-type hydrocarbon-based surfactant may be an aliphatic-type carboxylic acid-type hydrocarbon-based surfactant, or may be a carboxylic acid-type hydrocarbon-based surfactant other than the aliphatic-type.
  • the "aliphatic carboxylic acid type hydrocarbon surfactant” is a carboxylic acid type hydrocarbon containing no carbonyl group (excluding the carbonyl group in the carboxyl group and the ester group). It means a hydrocarbon-based surfactant.
  • the ester group means a group represented by -COO- or -OCO-.
  • the carboxylic acid type hydrocarbon-based surfactant is, for example, a hydrocarbon-based surfactant having a carboxyl group or a group in which the hydrogen atom of the carboxyl group is replaced with an inorganic cation from the above-mentioned hydrocarbon-based surfactants.
  • Surfactants can be used.
  • the carboxylic acid type surfactant used in the polymerization step and the addition step includes the above-mentioned surfactant (1) and the above-mentioned formula: R 6z ( Among the anionic surfactant represented by -LM) 2 and the anionic surfactant represented by the above formula: R7z (-LM) 3 , the carboxyl group (-COOH) or Those having a group in which the hydrogen atom of the carboxyl group is substituted with an inorganic cation (for example, metal atom, ammonium, etc.), the above compound ( ⁇ ), the above surfactant (1-0A), and these surfactants.
  • R 6z Among the anionic surfactant represented by -LM) 2 and the anionic surfactant represented by the above formula: R7z (-LM) 3 , the carboxyl group (-COOH) or Those having a group in which the hydrogen atom of the carboxyl group is substituted with an inorganic cation (for example, metal atom, ammonium
  • the above-mentioned carboxylic acid type hydrocarbon-based surfactant may be used alone or in a mixture of two or more.
  • the compound ( ⁇ ) includes an anionic hydrocarbon-based surfactant (preferably the formula (A)) represented by the above formula: R 102- COOM (in the formula, R 102 and M are the same as above). ), As well as an anionic surfactant represented by the above formula: R z -LM (in the formula, R z , L and M are the same as above), the above-mentioned surfactant.
  • the carboxylic acid-type hydrocarbon surfactant is preferably the compound (alpha) is a compound represented by the above formula (A), Compound A c is -COOX c in the above formula (c), the formula compound a d is -COOX d (d), the compounds wherein a is -COOM in the formula (1), compounds wherein a is -COOM in the formula (1-0A), and, in these compounds It is more preferable that the compound is at least one selected from the group consisting of those subjected to radical treatment or oxidation treatment, and from the compound represented by the above formula (A) and those obtained by subjecting the compound to radical treatment or oxidation treatment. At least one selected from the group is more preferred.
  • At least one selected from the group consisting of lauric acid, undecanoic acid, capric acid, myristic acid, pentadecic acid, palmitic acid, and salts thereof, and radical treatment or oxidation treatment of these compounds are preferred, and at least one selected from the group consisting of lauric acid and salts thereof and those compounds that have been subjected to radical treatment or oxidation treatment is more preferable, and salts of lauric acid and salts thereof and radical treatment or oxidation thereof.
  • At least one selected from the group consisting of the treated products is further preferable, and at least one selected from the group consisting of sodium laurate and a radical treatment or an oxidation treatment thereof is further preferable.
  • the fluoromonomer is polymerized substantially in the absence of a fluorine-containing surfactant.
  • a fluorine-containing surfactant has been used for the polymerization of a fluoropolymer, but the production method of the present disclosure can obtain a high molecular weight fluoropolymer without using a fluorine-containing surfactant.
  • substantially in the absence of a fluorine-containing surfactant means that the amount of the fluorine-containing surfactant is 10 ppm or less, preferably 1 ppm or less, and more. It is preferably 100 ppb or less, more preferably 10 ppb or less, and even more preferably 1 ppb or less.
  • fluorine-containing surfactant examples include an anionic fluorine-containing surfactant and the like.
  • the anionic fluorine-containing surfactant may be, for example, a surfactant containing a fluorine atom having a total carbon number of 20 or less in a portion excluding the anionic group.
  • the fluorine-containing surfactant may also be a fluorine-containing surfactant having an anionic portion having a molecular weight of 800 or less.
  • the "anionic portion” means a portion of the fluorine-containing surfactant excluding the cation. For example, in the case of F (CF 2) n1 COOM of formula (I) to be described later, a part of the "F (CF 2) n1 COO".
  • Examples of the fluorine-containing surfactant include a fluorine-containing surfactant having a Log POW of 3.5 or less.
  • the LogPOW is the partition coefficient between 1-octanol and water.
  • P is the octanol when the octanol / water (1: 1) mixture containing the fluorine-containing interface active agent is phase-separated. Represents the fluorine-containing surfactant concentration / water-containing fluorine-containing surfactant concentration ratio].
  • anionic fluorine-containing surfactant As the anionic fluorine-containing surfactant, the following general formula (N 0 ): X n0- Rf n0- Y 0 (N 0 ) (In the formula, X n0 is H, Cl or F. Rf n0 has 3 to 20 carbon atoms, is chain-like, branched-chain or cyclic, and some or all H is substituted with F. The alkylene group may contain one or more ether bonds, and a part of H may be substituted with Cl. Y 0 is an anionic group). Can be mentioned. Anionic group Y 0 is, -COOM, -SO 2 M, or may be a -SO 3 M, -COOM, or may be a -SO 3 M.
  • M is H, a metal atom, NR 8y 4 , an imidazolium which may have a substituent, a pyridinium which may have a substituent, or a phosphonium which may have a substituent, and R 8y.
  • the metal atom include alkali metals (Group 1) and alkaline earth metals (Group 2), and examples thereof include Na, K and Li.
  • the alkyl group is preferable as the organic group in R 8y .
  • the R 8y may be an organic group of H or C 1-10 , an organic group of H or C 1-4 , or an alkyl group of H or C 1-4 .
  • M is, H, may be a metal atom or NR 8y 4, H, an alkali metal (Group 1), alkaline earth metal (Group 2) or NR 8y may be a 4, H, Na, K, Li or It may be NH 4 .
  • the Rf n0 may be such that 50% or more of H is replaced with fluorine.
  • N 0 As a compound represented by the above general formula (N 0 ), The following general formula (N 1 ): X n0- (CF 2 ) m1- Y 0 (N 1 ) (In the formula, X n0 is H, Cl and F, m1 is an integer of 3 to 15, and Y 0 is the one defined above.) The compound represented by the following general formula (N 2).
  • Rf n1 is a perfluoroalkyl group having 1 to 5 carbon atoms
  • m2 is an integer of 0 to 3
  • X n1 is F or CF 3
  • Y 0 is defined above.
  • Rf n2 (CH 2 ) m3- (Rf n3 ) q- Y 0 (N 3 )
  • Rf n2 is a partially or fully fluorinated alkyl group which may contain an ether bond having 1 to 13 carbon atoms
  • m3 is an integer of 1 to 3
  • Rf n3 is linear.
  • it is a branched perfluoroalkylene group having 1 to 3 carbon atoms
  • q is 0 or 1
  • Y 0 is the one defined above.
  • N 4 The compound represented by the above general formula (N 4 ).
  • Rf n4 is a linear or branched chain moiety or a fully fluorinated alkyl group that may contain an ether bond having 1 to 12 carbon atoms
  • Y n1 and Y n2 are the same or different.
  • X n2 , X n3 and X n4 may be the same or different, and may contain an ether bond of H, F, or 1 to 6 carbon atoms, which is a linear or branched chain portion or complete. It is a fluorinated alkyl group.
  • Rf n5 is a linear or branched chain moiety or a fully fluorinated alkylene group that may contain an ether bond having 1 to 3 carbon atoms, and L is a linking group.
  • Y 0 is as defined above. However, the total carbon number of X n2 , X n3 , X n4 and Rf n5 is 18 or less).
  • the perfluorocarboxylic acid (I) has the following general formula (I).
  • F (CF 2 ) n1 COM (I) (In the formula, n1 is an integer of 3 to 14, M is H, a metal atom, NR 8y 4 , imidazolium which may have a substituent, pyridinium which may have a substituent, or It is a phosphonium which may have a substituent, and R8y is represented by H or an organic group).
  • ⁇ -H perfluorocarboxylic acid (II) has the following general formula (II).
  • H (CF 2 ) n2 COMM (II) (In the formula, n2 is an integer of 4 to 15, and M is the one defined above.).
  • the perfluoropolyether carboxylic acid (III) has the following general formula (III).
  • Rf 1 is a perfluoroalkyl group having 1 to 5 carbon atoms
  • n3 is an integer of 0 to 3
  • M is the one defined above.
  • the perfluoroalkylalkylenecarboxylic acid (IV) has the following general formula (IV).
  • Rf 2 (CH 2 ) n4 Rf 3 COM (IV) (In the formula, Rf 2 is a perfluoroalkyl group having 1 to 5 carbon atoms, Rf 3 is a linear or branched perfluoroalkylene group having 1 to 3 carbon atoms, and n4 is a perfluoroalkylene group having 1 to 3 carbon atoms. It is an integer, and M is as defined above.).
  • the alkoxyfluorocarboxylic acid (V) has the following general formula (V).
  • Rf 4- O-CY 1 Y 2 CF 2- COOM (V) (In the formula, Rf 4 is a linear or branched chain moiety or a fully fluorinated alkyl group that may contain an ether bond having 1 to 12 carbon atoms, and Y 1 and Y 2 are the same or different. , H or F, where M is as defined above).
  • the perfluoroalkyl sulfonic acid (VI) has the following general formula (VI). F (CF 2 ) n5 SO 3 M (VI) (In the formula, n5 is an integer of 3 to 14, and M is the one defined above.).
  • ⁇ -H perfluorosulfonic acid has the following general formula (VII).
  • H (CF 2 ) n6 SO 3 M (VII) (In the formula, n6 is an integer of 4 to 14, and M is the one defined above.).
  • the perfluoroalkylalkylene sulfonic acid (VIII) has the following general formula (VIII).
  • Rf 5 (CH 2 ) n7 SO 3 M (VIII) (In the formula, Rf 5 is a perfluoroalkyl group having 1 to 13 carbon atoms, n7 is an integer of 1 to 3, and M is the one defined above.) ..
  • the alkylalkylene carboxylic acid (IX) has the following general formula (IX).
  • Rf 6 (CH 2 ) n8 COM (IX) (In the formula, Rf 6 is a linear or branched chain moiety or a fully fluorinated alkyl group that may contain an ether bond having 1 to 13 carbon atoms, and n8 is an integer of 1 to 3. M is as defined above).
  • the fluorocarboxylic acid (X) has the following general formula (X).
  • Rf 7- O-Rf 8- O-CF 2- COM (X) (In the formula, Rf 7 is a linear or branched chain moiety or a fully fluorinated alkyl group that may contain an ether bond having 1 to 6 carbon atoms, and Rf 8 is an alkyl group having 1 to 6 carbon atoms. It is a linear or branched chain moiety or a fully fluorinated alkyl group, where M is as defined above).
  • the above alkoxyfluorosulfonic acid (XI) has the following general formula (XI).
  • Rf 9- O-CY 1 Y 2 CF 2- SO 3 M (XI) (In the formula, Rf 9 is a partially or fully fluorinated alkyl group that is linear or branched and may contain chlorine and may contain ether bonds of 1-12 carbon atoms, Y. 1 and Y 2 are the same or different, H or F, and M is the one defined above).
  • the compound (XII) has the following general formula (XII): (In the formula, X 1 , X 2 and X 3 may be the same or different and may contain H, F and ether bonds of 1 to 6 carbon atoms in a linear or branched chain moiety or fully fluorinated.
  • Rf 10 is a perfluoroalkylene group having 1 to 3 carbon atoms
  • L is a linking group
  • Y 0 is an anionic group
  • Y 0 may be -COOM, -SO 2 M, or -SO 3 M, and may be -SO 3 M, or COM (in the formula, M is as defined above).
  • Examples of L include a single bond, a moiety capable of containing an ether bond having 1 to 10 carbon atoms, or a completely fluorinated alkylene group.
  • the compound (XIII) has the following general formula (XIII): Rf 11- O- (CF 2 CF (CF 3 ) O) n9 (CF 2 O) n10 CF 2 COM (XIII) (In the formula, Rf 11 is a fluoroalkyl group having 1 to 5 carbon atoms containing chlorine, n9 is an integer of 0 to 3, n10 is an integer of 0 to 3, and M is the above definition. It is represented by). As the compound (XIII), CF 2 ClO (CF 2 CF (CF 3 ) O) n9 (CF 2 O) n10 CF 2 COONH 4 (mixture having an average molecular weight of 750, in the formula, n9 and n10 are defined above. There is.).
  • examples of the anionic fluorine-containing surfactant include a carboxylic acid-based surfactant and a sulfonic acid-based surfactant.
  • an aqueous dispersion containing the particles made of the fluoropolymer, the hydrocarbon-based surfactant, and the aqueous medium is usually obtained.
  • particles made of a fluoropolymer are dispersed in an aqueous medium in the presence of the hydrocarbon-based surfactant.
  • the production method of the present disclosure may obtain a fluoropolymer aqueous dispersion.
  • the fluoropolymer aqueous dispersion obtained by the production method of the present disclosure may be the same as the aqueous dispersion obtained in the polymerization step, or may be a treated solution of the aqueous dispersion obtained in the polymerization step.
  • the solid content concentration of the fluoropolymer aqueous dispersion obtained by the production method of the present disclosure is not limited, but may be, for example, 1.0 to 70.0% by mass.
  • the solid content concentration is preferably 8.0% by mass or more, more preferably 10.0% by mass or more, and more preferably 60.0% by mass or less, more preferably 50.0% by mass or less.
  • the production method of the present disclosure may include a step of adding water to a fluoropolymer aqueous dispersion obtained in the polymerization step to dilute it.
  • the solid content concentration can be diluted to 10.0 to 25.0% by mass.
  • the fluoropolymer solid content concentration in the fluoropolymer aqueous dispersion is high.
  • concentration of the fluoropolymer solid content in the aqueous dispersion of the fluoropolymer for coagulation is high, the degree of association of the primary particles of the fluoropolymer increases, and the primary particles of the fluoropolymer are densely associated and aggregated to form granules.
  • the fluoropolymer solid content concentration of the fluoropolymer aqueous dispersion is less than 8% by mass, the aggregation density of the primary particles of the fluoropolymer tends to be sparse, and it is difficult to obtain a fluoropolymer powder having a high bulk density.
  • the fluoropolymer solid content concentration in the fluoropolymer aqueous dispersion is too high, the unaggregated fluoropolymer increases, and the unaggregated fluoropolymer solid content concentration in the coagulated wastewater increases. If the concentration of unaggregated fluoropolymer solids in the coagulated wastewater is high, pipe blockage and wastewater treatment are costly and troublesome.
  • the unaggregated fluoropolymer solid content concentration in the coagulated wastewater is preferably low from the viewpoint of productivity of the fluoropolymer powder, more preferably less than 0.4% by mass, further preferably less than 0.3% by mass, and 0. .. Less than 2% by mass is particularly preferable.
  • the fluoropolymer solid content concentration of the fluoropolymer aqueous dispersion exceeds 25% by mass, it is difficult to reduce the unaggregated fluoropolymer solid content concentration of the coagulated wastewater to less than 0.4% by mass.
  • the solid content concentration is preferably 10.0 to 25.0% by mass, preferably 10.0 to 22.0% by mass, and 10.0 to 20.0% by mass. % Is more preferable.
  • the fluoropolymer solid content concentration in the fluoropolymer aqueous dispersion obtained in the above polymerization step is about 8 to 45% by mass. Therefore, when the fluoropolymer solid content concentration is high, a diluting solvent such as water is added. It may be adjusted to 8 to 25% by mass.
  • the fluoropolymer aqueous dispersion can be used as it is as the fluoropolymer aqueous dispersion.
  • the temperature of the aqueous dispersion of the fluoropolymer for coagulation it is also preferable to set the temperature of the aqueous dispersion of the fluoropolymer for coagulation to 3 to 80 ° C.
  • the fluoropolymer aqueous dispersion preferably contains substantially no fluorine-containing surfactant.
  • substantially free of a fluorine-containing surfactant means that the amount of the fluorine-containing surfactant is 10 ppm or less with respect to the fluoropolymer.
  • the content of the fluorine-containing surfactant is preferably 1 ppm or less, more preferably 100 ppb or less, still more preferably 10 ppb or less, still more preferably 1 ppb or less, and particularly preferably liquid chromatography.
  • the fluorine-containing surfactant as measured by mass spectrometry (LC / MS / MS) is below the detection limit.
  • the amount of the fluorine-containing surfactant can be quantified by a known method. For example, it can be quantified by LC / MS / MS analysis.
  • the obtained aqueous dispersion is extracted with an organic solvent of methanol, the molecular weight information of the extract is extracted from the LC / MS / MS spectrum, and the agreement with the structural formula of the candidate surfactant is confirmed.
  • an aqueous solution having a concentration of 5 levels or higher is prepared for the confirmed surfactant, and LC / MS / MS analysis for each concentration is performed to prepare a calibration curve with the area area.
  • the obtained aqueous dispersion can be quantitatively measured by performing Soxhlet extraction with methanol and performing LC / MS / MS analysis on the extract. That is, the content of the fluorine-containing surfactant can be quantified by, for example, LC / MS / MS analysis.
  • methanol is added to the aqueous dispersion to perform extraction, and the obtained extract is subjected to LC / MS / MS analysis.
  • treatment by Soxhlet extraction, ultrasonic treatment or the like may be performed.
  • Molecular weight information is extracted from the obtained LC / MS / MS spectrum, and agreement with the structural formula of the candidate fluorine-containing surfactant is confirmed.
  • an aqueous solution having a content of 5 levels or more of the confirmed fluorine-containing surfactant was prepared, and LC / MS / MS analysis was performed on the aqueous solution having each content, and the content and the area area with respect to the content were determined. Plot the relationship and draw a calibration curve. Then, using the calibration curve, the area area of the LC / MS / MS chromatogram of the fluorine-containing surfactant in the extract can be converted into the content of the fluorine-containing surfactant.
  • the fluorine-containing surfactant is the same as that exemplified in the above-described production method of the present disclosure.
  • it may be a surfactant containing fluorine atoms having a total carbon number of 20 or less in the portion excluding the anionic group, or it may be a surfactant containing fluorine having a molecular weight of 800 or less in the anionic portion, and LogPOW may be used. It may be a fluorine-containing surfactant of 3.5 or less.
  • the anionic fluorine-containing surfactant include compounds represented by the above general formula (N 0 ), and specifically, compounds represented by the general formula (N 1 ) and general formula (N 2 ). Examples thereof include a compound represented by the general formula (N 3 ), a compound represented by the general formula (N 4 ), and a compound represented by the general formula (N 5 ).
  • perfluorocarboxylic acid (I) represented by the general formula (I), the ⁇ -H perfluorocarboxylic acid (II) represented by the general formula (II), and the general formula (III) are represented.
  • the average primary particle size of the fluoropolymer is, for example, 50 to 1000 nm.
  • the lower limit of the average primary particle size is preferably 100 nm, more preferably 150 nm.
  • the upper limit of the average primary particle size is preferably 400 nm, more preferably 350 nm.
  • the average primary particle size can be measured by a dynamic light scattering method.
  • a fluoropolymer aqueous dispersion was prepared with the average primary particle size adjusted to a fluoropolymer solid content concentration of about 1.0% by mass, and the refractive index of the solvent (water) was 25 ° C. using a dynamic light scattering method.
  • the dynamic light scattering method for example, ELSZ-1000S (manufactured by Otsuka Electronics Co., Ltd.) can be used.
  • the hydrocarbon-based surfactant can also be suitably used as a dispersant for dispersing the fluoropolymer in an aqueous medium.
  • the lower limit of the content of the hydrocarbon-based surfactant in the aqueous dispersion of the fluoropolymer is preferably 10 ppb, more preferably 100 ppb, still more preferably 1 ppm, and 10 ppm with respect to the fluoropolymer. Is even more preferable, and 50 ppm is particularly preferable.
  • the upper limit is preferably 100,000 ppm, more preferably 50,000 ppm, still more preferably 10,000 ppm, and even more preferably 5,000 ppm with respect to the fluoropolymer.
  • the content of the hydrocarbon-based surfactant in the fluoropolymer aqueous dispersion is, for example, the fluoropolymer aqueous dispersion is centrifuged using a high-speed centrifuge, and the obtained supernatant water is subjected to high-performance liquid chromatography (HPLC). It can be obtained by measuring with an analyzer.
  • HPLC high-performance liquid chromatography
  • the fluoropolymer aqueous dispersion obtained by the above-mentioned polymerization step may be concentrated or subjected to dispersion stabilization treatment to obtain a dispersion.
  • the fluoropolymer aqueous dispersion is a fluoropolymer aqueous dispersion obtained in the polymerization step, and (A) an anion exchange resin or an anion exchange resin and a cation exchange resin in the presence of a nonionic surfactant.
  • a nonionic surfactant is not particularly limited, but the one described as the above-mentioned nucleating agent can be used.
  • the anion exchange resin is not particularly limited, but known ones can be used.
  • the fluoropolymer aqueous dispersion can be produced by subjecting the aqueous dispersion obtained in the polymerization step to the step (A) and then performing the step (B) on the aqueous dispersion obtained in the step (A). .. It is also possible to carry out the manufacturing by performing the step (B) without performing the step (A). Further, the steps (A) and (B) can be repeated or combined.
  • anion exchange resin for example, -N as a functional group + X - (CH 3) 3 group (. X is representing Cl or OH) strongly basic anion exchange resin having a, -N + X -
  • X is representing Cl or OH
  • Known examples include a strongly basic anion exchange resin having a (CH 3 ) 3 (C 2 H 4 OH) group (X is the same as above).
  • those described in International Publication No. 99/62858, International Publication No. 03/020836, International Publication No. 2004/078836, International Publication No. 2013/027850, International Publication No. 2014/084399, etc. Can be mentioned.
  • cation exchange resins for example, -SO 3 as a functional group - strong acid cation exchange resins having a group, as a functional group -COO - such weakly acidic cation exchange resins having a group, known Among them, a strongly acidic cation exchange resin is preferable, and an H + type strongly acidic cation exchange resin is more preferable from the viewpoint of removal efficiency.
  • the above-mentioned "mixed bed composed of a cation exchange resin and an anion exchange resin” is not particularly limited, and when both are filled in the same column, when both are filled in different columns, both are filled. This includes the case where it is dispersed in an aqueous dispersion.
  • a known method is adopted as the method of concentration. Specific examples thereof include those described in International Publication No. 2007/046482 and International Publication No. 2014/084399. Examples thereof include phase separation, centrifugal sedimentation, cloud point concentration, electroconcentration, electrophoresis, filtration treatment using ultrafiltration, filtration treatment using a reverse osmosis membrane (RO membrane), nanofiltration treatment and the like.
  • the above concentration can concentrate the fluoropolymer concentration to 30 to 70% by mass depending on the application. Concentration may impair the stability of the dispersion, in which case a dispersion stabilizer may be added. As the dispersion stabilizer, the nonionic surfactant and various other surfactants may be added.
  • the nonionic surfactant is the same as the nonionic surfactant exemplified as the nucleating agent described above, and the nonionic surfactant described above can be appropriately adopted.
  • the nonionic surfactant preferably does not contain an aromatic moiety.
  • the cloud point of a nonionic surfactant is a measure of the solubility of the surfactant in water.
  • the surfactant used in the aqueous dispersions of the present disclosure has a cloud point of about 30 ° C. to about 90 ° C., preferably about 35 ° C. to about 85 ° C.
  • the total amount of the dispersion stabilizer is a concentration of 0.5 to 20% by mass with respect to the solid content of the dispersion. If it is less than 0.5% by mass, the dispersion stability may be inferior, and if it exceeds 20% by mass, there is no dispersion effect commensurate with the abundance and it is not practical.
  • the more preferable lower limit of the dispersion stabilizer is 2% by mass, and the more preferable upper limit is 12% by mass.
  • the method for producing a fluoropolymer of the present disclosure includes a step of recovering the fluoropolymer aqueous dispersion obtained in the above polymerization step, a step of aggregating the fluoropolymer in the fluoropolymer aqueous dispersion, and a step of recovering the agglomerated fluoropolymer. It is preferable to include at least one step of drying the recovered fluoropolymer at 100 to 300 ° C. (preferably 100 to 250 ° C.). By including such a step, a fluoropolymer powder can be obtained.
  • a powder can be produced by aggregating the fluoropolymer contained in the above fluoropolymer aqueous dispersion.
  • the above fluoropolymer aqueous dispersion can be used as a powder for various purposes after being post-treated such as concentration if necessary, and then agglomerated, washed, and dried.
  • concentration if necessary concentration if necessary
  • agglomerated washed, and dried.
  • the aqueous dispersion obtained by polymerization of polymer latex or the like is diluted with water to a polymer concentration of 10 to 25% by mass, and in some cases.
  • the mixture After adjusting the pH to acidic, neutral or alkaline, the mixture is stirred vigorously in a container equipped with a stirrer rather than during the reaction.
  • the aggregation may be carried out while adding a water-soluble organic compound such as methanol or acetone, an inorganic salt such as potassium nitrate or ammonium carbonate, or an inorganic acid such as hydrochloric acid, sulfuric acid or nitric acid as a coagulant.
  • the aggregation may also be continuously performed using an in-line mixer or the like.
  • the pigments and fillers are uniformly mixed with pigments or fluoros with fillers. Polymer powders can also be obtained.
  • drying of the wet powder obtained by coagulation of the fluoropolymer is usually carried out in a vacuum, high frequency, hot air while maintaining a state in which the wet powder does not flow so much, preferably in a stationary state.
  • This is done by means such as.
  • the fluoropolymer is PTFE
  • friction between the powders, especially at high temperatures generally has an unfavorable effect on the fine powder type PTFE. This is because particles made of this type of PTFE are easily fibrillated even by a small shearing force and have the property of losing their original stable particle structure.
  • the drying can be carried out at a drying temperature of 10 to 300 ° C.
  • the presence or absence of fibrillation can be determined by "paste extrusion", which is a typical method for molding "high molecular weight PTFE powder” which is a powder (fine powder) made from an emulsified polymer of TFE. ..
  • paste extrusion is possible because the high molecular weight PTFE powder has fibrillation properties. If the unbaked molded product obtained by paste extrusion does not have substantial strength or elongation, for example, if the elongation is 0% and it breaks when pulled, it can be considered that there is no fibrillation property.
  • the powder When the fluoropolymer obtained by the production method of the present disclosure is a powder, the powder preferably has an average particle size (average secondary particle size) of 100 to 2000 ⁇ m.
  • the lower limit of the average secondary particle diameter is more preferably 200 ⁇ m or more, and further preferably 300 ⁇ m or more.
  • the upper limit of the average secondary particle size is preferably 1000 ⁇ m or less, more preferably 800 ⁇ m or less, and particularly preferably 700 ⁇ m or less.
  • the average particle size is a value measured in accordance with JIS K 6891.
  • the powder may contain a hydrocarbon-based surfactant. It is preferable that the powder contains substantially no hydrocarbon-based surfactant.
  • substantially free of hydrocarbon-based surfactant means that the amount of the fluorine-containing surfactant is 10 ppm or less with respect to the powder.
  • the content of the hydrocarbon-based surfactant is preferably 1 ppm or less, more preferably 100 ppb or less, still more preferably 10 ppb or less, and even more preferably 1 ppb or less.
  • the amount of the above-mentioned hydrocarbon-based surfactant for example, powder is extracted with a mixed aqueous solution of water / methanol (1/1 vol), methanol is removed from the extract obtained by using an evaporator, and high performance liquid chromatography (high performance liquid chromatography) is performed. It can be determined by measuring with an HPLC) analyzer.
  • the powder preferably contains substantially no fluorine-containing surfactant.
  • substantially free of a fluorine-containing surfactant means that the amount of the fluorine-containing surfactant is 10 ppm or less with respect to the powder.
  • the content of the fluorine-containing surfactant is preferably 1 ppm or less, more preferably 100 ppb or less, still more preferably 10 ppb or less, still more preferably 1 ppb or less, and particularly preferably liquid chromatography.
  • the fluorine-containing surfactant as measured by mass spectrometry (LC / MS / MS) is below the detection limit.
  • the amount of the fluorine-containing surfactant can be quantified by a known method.
  • the obtained powder is extracted with an organic solvent of methanol, the molecular weight information of the extract is extracted from the LC / MS / MS spectrum, and the agreement with the structural formula of the candidate surfactant is confirmed. Then, an aqueous solution having a concentration of 5 levels or higher is prepared for the confirmed surfactant, and LC / MS / MS analysis for each concentration is performed to prepare a calibration curve with the area area.
  • the obtained powder can be quantitatively measured by performing Soxhlet extraction with methanol and performing LC / MS / MS analysis on the extract.
  • the content of the fluorine-containing surfactant can be quantified by, for example, LC / MS / MS analysis.
  • the obtained powder is added to methanol, extraction is performed, and the obtained extract is subjected to LC / MS / MS analysis.
  • treatment by Soxhlet extraction, ultrasonic treatment or the like may be performed.
  • Molecular weight information is extracted from the obtained LC / MS / MS spectrum, and agreement with the structural formula of the candidate fluorine-containing surfactant is confirmed.
  • an aqueous solution having a content of 5 levels or more of the confirmed fluorine-containing surfactant was prepared, and LC / MS / MS analysis was performed on the aqueous solution having each content, and the content and the area area with respect to the content were determined. Plot the relationship and draw a calibration curve. Then, using the calibration curve, the area area of the LC / MS / MS chromatogram of the fluorine-containing surfactant in the extract can be converted into the content of the fluorine-containing surfactant.
  • the fluorine-containing surfactant is the same as that exemplified in the above-mentioned production method.
  • it may be a surfactant containing fluorine atoms having a total carbon number of 20 or less in the portion excluding the anionic group, or it may be a surfactant containing fluorine having a molecular weight of 800 or less in the anionic portion, and LogPOW may be used. It may be a fluorine-containing surfactant of 3.5 or less.
  • the anionic fluorine-containing surfactant include compounds represented by the above general formula (N 0 ), and specifically, compounds represented by the general formula (N 1 ) and general formula (N 2 ). Examples thereof include a compound represented by the general formula (N 3 ), a compound represented by the general formula (N 4 ), and a compound represented by the general formula (N 5 ).
  • perfluorocarboxylic acid (I) represented by the general formula (I), the ⁇ -H perfluorocarboxylic acid (II) represented by the general formula (II), and the general formula (III) are represented.
  • the above-mentioned hydrocarbon-based surfactant and the above-mentioned by-produced from the above-mentioned hydrocarbon-based surfactant from wastewater generated by coagulation or washing and / or off-gas generated in the drying step By recovering and purifying decomposition products, by-products, residual monomers, etc. of hydrocarbon-based surfactants, the above-mentioned hydrocarbon-based surfactants and the above-mentioned hydrocarbon-based surfactants by-produced from the above-mentioned hydrocarbon-based surfactants. Decompositions and by-products of activators, residual monomers and the like may be reused.
  • the method for recovering and purifying is not particularly limited, but a known method can be used. For example, it can be carried out by the method described in Japanese Patent Publication No. 2011-520020.
  • the method for recovering and purifying the decomposition product, by-product, residual monomer, etc. of the above is not particularly limited, but a conventionally known method can be adopted, for example, US Patent Application Publication No. 2007/15937. No., US Patent Application Publication No. 2007/25902, US Patent Application Publication No. 2007/27251, and specific examples thereof include the following methods.
  • a method for recovering a hydrocarbon-based surfactant from the wastewater and decomposition products, by-products, residual monomers, etc. of the hydrocarbon-based surfactant produced as a by-product from the hydrocarbon-based surfactant ion exchange in the wastewater.
  • adsorbed particles such as resin, activated charcoal, silica gel, clay, and zeolite are brought into contact with each other to adsorb the above-mentioned hydrocarbon-based surfactant and the like, and then the wastewater and the adsorbed particles are separated. If the adsorbed particles adsorbing the hydrocarbon-based surfactant or the like are incinerated, it is possible to prevent the hydrocarbon-based surfactant or the like from being released into the environment.
  • the hydrocarbon-based surfactant and the like can be desorbed and eluted from the ion exchange resin particles adsorbed by the above-mentioned hydrocarbon-based surfactant and the like by a known method and recovered.
  • a surfactant or the like can be eluted by bringing the mineral acid into contact with the anion exchange resin.
  • a water-soluble organic solvent is added to the subsequently obtained eluate, it is usually separated into two phases. Therefore, by recovering and neutralizing the lower phase containing the hydrocarbon-based surfactant, etc., the hydrocarbon-based surfactant, etc. Can be recovered.
  • the water-soluble organic solvent include polar solvents such as alcohols, ketones, and ethers.
  • Another method for recovering the hydrocarbon-based surfactant or the like from the ion exchange resin particles includes a method using an ammonium salt and a water-soluble organic solvent, and a method using an alcohol and an acid if desired. In the latter method, an ester derivative such as the above-mentioned surfactant is produced, so that it can be easily separated from alcohol by distillation.
  • the wastewater contains fluoropolymer particles or other solids, it is preferable to remove them before contacting the wastewater with the adsorbed particles.
  • the method for removing the fluoropolymer particles and other solids include a method of precipitating these by adding an aluminum salt and the like, and then separating the waste water and the precipitate, an electrocoagulation method and the like. Further, it may be removed by a mechanical method, and examples thereof include a cross flow filtration method, a deep layer filtration method, and a precoat filtration method.
  • the concentration of the unaggregated fluoropolymer in the waste water is preferably low from the viewpoint of productivity, more preferably less than 0.4% by mass, and particularly preferably less than 0.3% by mass.
  • a scrubber As a method for recovering the hydrocarbon-based surfactant or the like from the off-gas, a scrubber is used and brought into contact with an organic solvent such as deionized water, an alkaline aqueous solution, or a glycol ether solvent to contain the surfactant or the like.
  • an organic solvent such as deionized water, an alkaline aqueous solution, or a glycol ether solvent to contain the surfactant or the like.
  • a method of obtaining a scrubber solution can be mentioned.
  • the scrubber solution can be recovered in a state where the surfactant and the like are phase-separated, so that the surfactant and the like can be easily recovered and reused.
  • the alkaline compound include alkali metal hydroxides and quaternary ammonium salts.
  • a scrubber solution containing the above hydrocarbon-based surfactant or the like may be concentrated using a reverse osmosis membrane or the like.
  • the concentrated scrubber solution usually contains fluorine ions, but after concentration, alumina can be further added to remove the fluorine ions, thereby facilitating the reuse of the above-mentioned surfactant and the like.
  • the hydrocarbon-based surfactant or the like may be recovered by bringing the adsorbed particles into contact with the scrubber solution to adsorb the hydrocarbon-based surfactant or the like by the method described above.
  • hydrocarbon-based surfactant or the like recovered by any of the above methods can be reused in the production of fluoropolymers.
  • the fluoropolymer obtained by the production method of the present disclosure is a TFE polymer in which the monomer having the highest molar proportion of the monomer in the polymer (hereinafter, “most monomer”) is TFE, and the most monomer is VDF.
  • TFE the monomer having the highest molar proportion of the monomer in the polymer
  • VDF the monomer having the highest molar proportion of the monomer in the polymer
  • CTFE polymers in which the most monomer is CTFE.
  • the TFE polymer may preferably be a TFE homopolymer, or (1) TFE, (2) one or more fluorine-containing monomers other than TFE having 2 to 8 carbon atoms.
  • it may be a copolymer composed of VDF, HFP or CTFE, and (3) other monomers.
  • (3) other monomer include fluoro (alkyl vinyl ether) having an alkyl group having 1 to 5 carbon atoms, particularly 1 to 3 carbon atoms; fluorodioxol; perfluoroalkylethylene; ⁇ -. Examples thereof include hydroperfluoroolefins.
  • the TFE polymer may also be a copolymer of TFE and one or more fluorine-free monomers.
  • fluorine-free monomer examples include alkenes such as ethylene and propylene; vinyl esters; and vinyl ethers.
  • the TFE polymer is also a copolymer of TFE, one or more fluorine-containing monomers having 2 to 8 carbon atoms, and one or more fluorine-free monomers. May be good.
  • the VDF polymer may preferably be a VDF copolymer [PVDF], and other than (1) VDF and (2) one or more VDFs having 2 to 8 carbon atoms.
  • PVDF VDF copolymer
  • the CTFE polymer may preferably be a CTFE homopolymer, or (1) CTFE, (2) one or more fluoroolefins other than CTFE having 2 to 8 carbon atoms, and the like.
  • CTFE may be a copolymer composed of TFE or HFP, and (3) perfluoro (alkyl vinyl ether) having an alkyl group having 1 to 5 carbon atoms, particularly 1 to 3 carbon atoms.
  • the CTFE polymer may also be a copolymer of CTFE and one or more fluorine-free monomers, and the fluorine-free monomers include alkenes such as ethylene and propylene; vinyl. Esters: Vinyl ethers and the like can be mentioned.
  • the fluoropolymer produced by the production method of the present disclosure can be glassy, plastic or elastomeric. These are amorphous or partially crystalline and can be subjected to compression firing, melting or non-melting.
  • TFE polymer PTFE
  • ethylene / TFE co-weight a melt processable fluorine resin
  • the electrolyte polymer precursor is (III) as a fluororubber, a TFE / propylene copolymer, a TFE / propylene / third monomer copolymer (the third monomer is VDF, HFP, CTFE, fluoroalkyl vinyl ethers, etc.), Copolymer consisting of TFE and fluoroalkyl vinyl ethers; HFP / ethylene copolymer, HFP / ethylene / TFE copolymer; PVDF; VDF / HFP copolymer, HFP / ethylene copolymer, VDF / TFE / HFP Thermoplastic elastomers such as cop
  • a fluororesin is preferable, a fluororesin having a fluororesin having a fluorine substitution rate of 50% or more calculated by the following formula is more preferable, and a fluororesin having a fluororesin having a fluorine substitution rate of more than 50% is more preferable.
  • a fluororesin having a substitution rate of 55% or more is even more preferable, a fluororesin having a fluorine substitution rate of 60% or more is even more preferable, and a fluororesin having a fluorine substitution rate of 75% or more is even more preferable.
  • a fluororesin having a value of 80% or more is particularly preferable, and a fluororesin having a fluorine substitution rate of 90 to 100%, that is, a perfluororesin is most preferable.
  • Fluorine substitution rate (%) (number of fluorine atoms bonded to carbon atoms constituting the fluoropolymer) / ((number of hydrogen atoms bonded to the carbon atoms constituting the fluoropolymer) + (carbon atoms constituting the fluoropolymer) Number of fluorine atoms and chlorine atoms bonded to)) ⁇ 100
  • the perfluororesin a fluororesin having a fluorine substitution rate of 95 to 100% is more preferable, PTFE, FEP, and PFA are more preferable, PTFE is particularly preferable, and high molecular weight PTFE is particularly preferable.
  • the fluoropolymer is preferably PTFE, and more preferably high molecular weight PTFE.
  • the fluoropolymer may have a core-shell structure.
  • Fluoropolymers having a core-shell structure include, for example, PTFE containing a high molecular weight PTFE core in the particles and a lower molecular weight PTFE or modified PTFE shell. Examples of such PTFE include PTFE described in JP-A-2005-527652.
  • the core-shell structure may have the following structure.
  • Core TFE homopolymer Shell: TFE homopolymer Core: Modified PTFE Shell: TFE homopolymer Core: Modified PTFE Shell: Modified PTFE Core: TFE homopolymer Shell: Modified PTFE Core: Low molecular weight PTFE Shell: High molecular weight PTFE Core: High molecular weight PTFE Shell: Low molecular weight PTFE
  • the lower limit of the core ratio is preferably 0.5% by mass, more preferably 1.0% by mass, still more preferably 3.0% by mass, and particularly preferably 5.0% by mass. , Most preferably 10.0% by mass.
  • the upper limit of the core ratio is preferably 99.5% by mass, more preferably 99.0% by mass, still more preferably 98.0% by mass, still more preferably 97.0% by mass, and particularly preferably 95.0% by mass. %, Most preferably 90.0% by mass.
  • the lower limit of the shell ratio is preferably 0.5% by mass, more preferably 1.0% by mass, still more preferably 3.0% by mass, and particularly preferably 5.0% by mass. , Most preferably 10.0% by mass.
  • the upper limit of the ratio of the shell is preferably 99.5% by mass, more preferably 99.0% by mass, further preferably 98.0% by mass, still more preferably 97.0% by mass, and particularly preferably 95.0% by mass. %, Most preferably 90.0% by mass.
  • the core or the shell may have two or more layers.
  • it may be a fluoropolymer having a three-layer structure having a core central portion of PTFE, a core outer layer portion of a TFE homopolymer, and a shell of modified PTFE.
  • the fluoropolymer having such a three-layer structure include PTFE described in International Publication No. 2006/054612.
  • the polymerization of TFE is usually carried out at a polymerization temperature of 10 to 150 ° C. and a polymerization pressure of 0.05 to 5 MPaG.
  • the polymerization temperature is more preferably 30 ° C. or higher, and even more preferably 50 ° C. or higher.
  • 120 ° C. or lower is more preferable, and 100 ° C. or lower is further preferable.
  • the polymerization pressure is more preferably 0.3 MPaG or more, further preferably 0.5 MPaG or more, still more preferably 5.0 MPaG or less, still more preferably 3.0 MPaG or less.
  • 1.0 MPaG or more is preferable, 1.2 MPaG or more is more preferable, 1.5 MPaG or more is further preferable, and 2.0 MPaG or more is more preferable.
  • pure water is charged in a pressure-resistant reaction vessel equipped with a stirrer, deoxidized, TFE is charged, the temperature is adjusted to a predetermined temperature, and a polymerization initiator is added to start the reaction. If the pressure decreases as the reaction progresses, additional TFE is supplied continuously or intermittently to maintain the initial pressure. When a predetermined amount of TFE is supplied, the supply is stopped, the TFE in the reaction vessel is purged, the temperature is returned to room temperature, and the reaction is terminated. Additional TFE may be supplied continuously or intermittently so that the pressure does not drop.
  • modified PTFE In the production of the TFE polymer (PTFE), various known modified monomers can also be used in combination.
  • the above-mentioned PTFE includes not only a TFE homopolymer but also a copolymer of TFE and a modified monomer, which is non-meltable (hereinafter, referred to as "modified PTFE"). It is a concept.
  • the above-mentioned PTFE may be a homopolymer of TFE, or may be a modified PTFE containing 99.0% by mass or more of TFE-based polymerization units and 1.0% by mass or less of modified monomer-based polymerization units. May be good.
  • the modified PTFE preferably has a polymerization unit based on the modified monomer (hereinafter, also referred to as “modified monomer unit”) in the range of 0.00001 to 1.0% by mass.
  • modified monomer unit a polymerization unit based on the modified monomer (hereinafter, also referred to as “modified monomer unit”) in the range of 0.00001 to 1.0% by mass.
  • the upper limit of the modified monomer unit is preferably 0.90% by mass, more preferably 0.50% by mass, further preferably 0.40% by mass, still more preferably 0.30% by mass, and 0.10% by mass.
  • 0.08% by mass is particularly preferable, 0.05% by mass is particularly preferable, and 0.01% by mass is particularly preferable.
  • the modified monomer unit means a portion of the molecular structure of PTFE that is derived from the modified monomer.
  • each monomer unit constituting PTFE can be calculated by appropriately combining NMR, FT-IR, elemental analysis, and fluorescent X-ray analysis according to the type of monomer. Further, the content of each monomer unit constituting PTFE can also be obtained by calculation from the amount of the modified monomer added used for the polymerization.
  • the modified monomer is not particularly limited as long as it can be copolymerized with TFE.
  • perfluoroolefin such as hexafluoropropylene [HFP]; hydrogen such as trifluoroethylene and vinylidene fluoride [VDF].
  • fluoroolefins; perhaloolefins such as chlorotrifluoroethylene; perfluorovinyl ethers; (perfluoroalkyl) ethylene, ethylene and the like can be mentioned.
  • the modified monomer used may be one kind or a plurality of kinds.
  • modified monomer examples include perhaloolefins such as HFP, CTFE, and perfluorovinyl ether; fluoro (alkyl vinyl ether) having an alkyl group having 1 to 5 carbon atoms, particularly 1 to 3 carbon atoms; fluorodioki. Cyclic fluorinated monomers such as soles; perhaloalkylethylenes such as (perfluoroalkyl) ethylene; ⁇ -hydroperhaloolefins and the like can be mentioned.
  • the modified monomer can be supplied by initial batch addition or continuous or intermittent divided addition depending on the purpose and the supply of TFE.
  • modified monomer examples include fluoromonomers and non-fluoromonomers.
  • the O-CO- * or an -O- * is bonding position of the R Q2 .R Q2 representing the a hydrogen atom, and monomers represented by the representative.) the alkyl group or a nitrile group.
  • non-fluoromonomonomer examples include methyl acrylate, methyl methacrylate, ethyl acrylate, ethyl methacrylate, propyl acrylate, propyl methacrylate butyl acrylate, butyl methacrylate, hexyl methacrylate, cyclohexyl methacrylate, vinyl methacrylate, vinyl acetate, acrylic acid, methacrylic acid and acrylonitrile. , Methacrylonitrile, ethyl vinyl ether, cyclohexyl vinyl ether and the like. Of these, butyl methacrylate, vinyl acetate, and acrylic acid are preferable as the non-fluoromonomer.
  • fluoromonomers for example, perfluoroolefins such as hexafluoropropylene [HFP]; hydrogen-containing fluoroolefins such as trifluoroethylene and vinylidene fluoride [VDF]; perhaloolefins such as chlorotrifluoroethylene; perfluorovinyl ethers; Perfluoroalkyl) ethylene; perfluoroallyl ether and the like can be mentioned.
  • HFP hexafluoropropylene
  • VDF vinylidene fluoride
  • perhaloolefins such as chlorotrifluoroethylene
  • perfluorovinyl ethers perfluorovinyl ethers
  • Perfluoroalkyl) ethylene perfluoroallyl ether and the like
  • Rf represents a perfluoroorganic group.
  • perfluoroorganic group means an organic group in which all hydrogen atoms bonded to carbon atoms are replaced with fluorine atoms.
  • the perfluoroorganic group may have ether oxygen.
  • perfluorovinyl ether examples include perfluoro (alkyl vinyl ether) [PAVE] in which Rf is a perfluoroalkyl group having 1 to 10 carbon atoms in the above general formula (A).
  • the number of carbon atoms of the perfluoroalkyl group is preferably 1 to 5.
  • Examples of the perfluoroalkyl group in PAVE include a perfluoromethyl group, a perfluoroethyl group, a perfluoropropyl group, a perfluorobutyl group, a perfluoropentyl group, a perfluorohexyl group and the like.
  • Rf is a perfluoro (alkoxyalkyl) group having 4 to 9 carbon atoms, and Rf is the following formula:
  • Rf is the following formula:
  • n an integer of 1 to 4.
  • the (perfluoroalkyl) ethylene (PFAE) is not particularly limited, and examples thereof include (perfluorobutyl) ethylene (PFBE) and (perfluorohexyl) ethylene.
  • perfluoroallyl ether examples include, for example.
  • General formula: CF 2 CF-CF 2- ORf (In the formula, Rf represents a perfluoroorganic group.) Fluoromonomer represented by.
  • Rf of the above general formula is the same as the Rf of the general formula (A).
  • Rf a perfluoroalkyl group having 1 to 10 carbon atoms or a perfluoroalkoxyalkyl group having 1 to 10 carbon atoms is preferable.
  • a modified monomer (3) having a monomer reactivity ratio of 0.1 to 8 is also preferably exemplified.
  • PTFE particles having a small particle size can be obtained, and an aqueous dispersion having high dispersion stability can be obtained.
  • the monomer reactivity ratio in the copolymerization with TFE is the rate constant when the growth radical reacts with TFE when the growth radical is less than the repeating unit based on TFE, and the growth radical is a comonomer. It is a value divided by the rate constant when reacting. The lower this value, the more reactive the comonomer with TFE.
  • the monomer reactivity ratio can be calculated from the Fineman-Loss formula by obtaining the composition in the produced polymer immediately after the start of copolymerization of TFE and comonomer.
  • the above copolymerization was carried out using 3600 g of deionized degassed water in a stainless steel autoclave having an internal volume of 6.0 L, 1000 ppm of ammonium perfluorooctane and 100 g of paraffin wax with respect to the water, at a pressure of 0.78 MPaG. It is carried out at a temperature of 70 ° C. 0.05 g, 0.1 g, 0.2 g, 0.5 g, and 1.0 g of comonomer were added to the reactor, and 0.072 g of ammonium persulfate (20 ppm with respect to water) was added to maintain the polymerization pressure of 0.78 MPaG. TFE is continuously supplied for this purpose.
  • the amount of TFE charged reaches 1000 g, stirring is stopped and decompression is performed until the reactor reaches atmospheric pressure. After cooling, the paraffin wax is separated to obtain an aqueous dispersion containing the produced polymer. The aqueous dispersion is stirred to coagulate the resulting polymer and dried at 150 ° C.
  • the composition in the obtained produced polymer is calculated by appropriately combining NMR, FT-IR, elemental analysis, and fluorescent X-ray analysis according to the type of monomer.
  • the modified monomer (3) having a monomer reactivity ratio of 0.1 to 8 is preferably at least one selected from the group consisting of comomers represented by the formulas (3a) to (3d).
  • CH 2 CH-Rf 1 (3a) (In the formula, Rf 1 is a perfluoroalkyl group having 1 to 10 carbon atoms.)
  • CF 2 CF-O-Rf 2 (3b) (In the formula, Rf 2 is a perfluoroalkyl group having 1 to 2 carbon atoms.)
  • CF 2 CF-O- (CF 2 )
  • n CF CF 2 (3c) (In the formula, n is 1 or 2.)
  • X 3 and X 4 are F, Cl or methoxy groups, and Y is the formula Y1 or Y2.
  • the content of the modified monomer (3) unit is preferably in the range of 0.00001 to 1.0% by mass with respect to the total polymerization units of PTFE.
  • 0.0001% by mass is more preferable, 0.0005% by mass is more preferable, 0.001% by mass is further preferable, and as the upper limit, 0.90% by mass is preferable, and 0.50% by mass is more preferable.
  • 0.40% by mass is further preferable, 0.30% by mass is even more preferable, 0.10% by mass is particularly preferable, 0.08% by mass is particularly preferable, 0.05% by mass is particularly preferable, and 0 0.01% by mass is particularly preferable.
  • the modified monomer hexafluoropropylene, vinylidene fluoride, and the like can be obtained because an aqueous dispersion having a small average primary particle size of the modified polytetrafluoroethylene particles, a small aspect ratio of the primary particles, and excellent stability can be obtained.
  • At least one selected from the group consisting of fluoro (alkyl vinyl ether), (perfluoroalkyl) ethylene, ethylene, and a modified monomer having a functional group and a hydrophilic group that can react with radical polymerization is preferable.
  • aqueous dispersion of PTFE having a smaller average primary particle diameter, a smaller aspect ratio of the primary particles, and excellent dispersion stability.
  • an aqueous dispersion containing less uncoagulated polymer can be obtained.
  • the modified monomer preferably contains at least one selected from the group consisting of hexafluoropropylene, perfluoro (alkyl vinyl ether) and (perfluoroalkyl) ethylene. More preferably, it is selected from the group consisting of hexafluoropropylene, perfluoro (methyl vinyl ether), perfluoro (propyl vinyl ether), (perfluorobutyl) ethylene, (perfluorohexyl) ethylene, and (perfluorooctyl) ethylene. At least one of them is included.
  • the total amount of the hexafluoropropylene unit, the perfluoro (alkyl vinyl ether) unit and the (perfluoroalkyl) ethylene unit is preferably in the range of 0.00001 to 1% by mass with respect to the total polymerization units of PTFE.
  • 0.0001% by mass is more preferable, 0.0005% by mass is more preferable, and 0.001% by mass is further preferable.
  • 0.50% by mass is more preferable, 0.40% by mass is further preferable, 0.30% by mass is further more preferable, 0.10% by mass is particularly preferable, and 0.08% by mass is particularly preferable.
  • 0.05% by mass is particularly preferable, and 0.01% by mass is particularly preferable.
  • the modified monomer contains a modified monomer having a functional group and a hydrophilic group capable of reacting by radical polymerization (hereinafter referred to as "modified monomer (A)").
  • PTFE particles having a small primary particle diameter can be obtained, and an aqueous dispersion having high dispersion stability can be obtained.
  • the amount of uncoagulated polymer can be reduced.
  • the aspect ratio of the primary particles can be reduced.
  • the amount of the modified monomer (A) used is preferably more than 0.1 ppm of the aqueous medium, more preferably more than 0.5 ppm, and more than 1.0 ppm. It is even more preferably 5 ppm or more, and particularly preferably 10 ppm or more. If the amount of the modified monomer (A) is too small, the average primary particle size of the obtained PTFE may not be reduced.
  • the amount of the modified monomer (A) used may be in the above range, but the upper limit can be, for example, 5000 ppm. Further, in the above production method, the modified monomer (A) may be added to the system during the reaction in order to improve the stability of the aqueous dispersion during or after the reaction.
  • the modified monomer (A) is highly water-soluble, even if the unreacted modified monomer (A) remains in the aqueous dispersion, it can be easily removed in the concentration step or the coagulation / washing step.
  • the modified monomer (A) is incorporated into the produced polymer in the process of polymerization, but the concentration of the modified monomer (A) in the polymerization system itself is low and the amount incorporated into the polymer is small, so that the heat resistance of PTFE is lowered. There is no problem of coloring after firing.
  • hydrophilic group in the modified monomer (A) examples include -NH 2 , -PO 3 M, -P (O) (OM) 2 , -OPO 3 M, -OP (O) (OM) 2 , and -SO. 3 M, -OSO 3 M, -COOM (In each formula, M is H, metal atom, NR 7y 4 , imidazolium which may have a substituent, pyridinium which may have a substituent or The phosphonium, R 7y , which may have a substituent, is an H or an organic group and may be the same or different. Either two may be bonded to each other to form a ring). Can be mentioned.
  • the hydrophilic group -SO 3 M or -COOM is particularly preferable.
  • the alkyl group is preferable as the organic group in R 7y .
  • R 7y an organic group of H or C 1-10 is preferable, an organic group of H or C 1-4 is more preferable, and an alkyl group of H or C 1-4 is further preferable.
  • the metal atom include monovalent and divalent metal atoms, and examples thereof include alkali metals (Group 1) and alkaline earth metals (Group 2), with Na, K or Li being preferable.
  • Examples of the "functional group capable of reacting by radical polymerization" in the modified monomer (A) include groups having an ethylenically unsaturated bond such as a vinyl group and an allyl group.
  • the linking group R include linking groups as R a, which will be described later.
  • the modified monomer (A) Since the modified monomer (A) has a functional group capable of reacting by radical polymerization, when used in the polymerization, it reacts with a fluorine-containing monomer at the initial stage of the polymerization reaction and has a hydrophilic group derived from the modified monomer (A). It is presumed that particles with high stability are formed. Therefore, it is considered that the number of particles increases when the polymerization is carried out in the presence of the modified monomer (A).
  • one kind of the modified monomer (A) may be present, or two or more kinds of the modified monomer (A) may be present.
  • a compound having an unsaturated bond can be used as the modified monomer (A).
  • M has H, a metal atom, NR 7y 4 , imidazolium which may have a substituent, pyridinium which may have a substituent or a substituent.
  • the phosphonium, R 7y which may be H or an organic group, may be the same or different. Any two of them may be bonded to each other to form a ring).
  • As the hydrophilic group -SO 3 M or -COOM is particularly preferable.
  • the alkyl group is preferable as the organic group in R 7y .
  • an organic group of H or C 1-10 is preferable, an organic group of H or C 1-4 is more preferable, and an alkyl group of H or C 1-4 is further preferable.
  • the metal atom include monovalent and divalent metal atoms, and examples thereof include alkali metals (Group 1) and alkaline earth metals (Group 2), with Na, K or Li being preferable.
  • Ra is a linking group.
  • linking group refers to a divalent linking group.
  • the linking group may be a single bond and preferably contains at least one carbon atom, and the number of carbon atoms may be 2 or more, 4 or more, or 8 or more. It may be 10 or more, and may be 20 or more. The upper limit is not limited, but may be 100 or less, and may be 50 or less, for example.
  • the linking group may be chain or branched, cyclic or acyclic, saturated or unsaturated, substituted or unsubstituted, and optionally one or more selected from the group consisting of sulfur, oxygen, and nitrogen.
  • the linking group does not contain a carbon atom and may be a catenary heteroatom such as oxygen, sulfur or nitrogen.
  • the Ra is preferably a catenary heteroatom such as oxygen, sulfur, or nitrogen, or a divalent organic group.
  • the hydrogen atom bonded to the carbon atom may be replaced with a halogen other than fluorine, for example, chlorine, and may or may not contain a double bond.
  • R a is linear and may be either branched, may be either cyclic or acyclic.
  • Ra may contain a functional group (for example, ester, ether, ketone, amine, halide, etc.). Ra may also be a non-fluorinated divalent organic group or a partially fluorinated or perfluorinated divalent organic group.
  • a, b, c and d are independently at least one or more.
  • a, b, c and d may be independently 2 or more, 3 or more, 4 or more, 10 or more, and 20 or more.
  • the upper limit of a, b, c and d is, for example, 100.
  • X 6 is H, F or CF 3 , respectively, e is an integer of 0 to 3, f is an integer of 0 to 3, g is 0 or 1, and h is.
  • the compound represented by the general formula (4) has a CF bond and does not have a CH bond, except for the hydrophilic group (Y 3 ). That is, in the general formula (4), it is preferable that all of X i , X j , and X k are F, and Ra is a perfluoroalkylene group having 1 or more carbon atoms, and the perfluoroalkylene group is preferably a perfluoroalkylene group having 1 or more carbon atoms. , Chained or branched, cyclic or acyclic, and may contain at least one catenary heteroatom. The number of carbon atoms of the perfluoroalkylene group may be 2 to 20, and may be 4 to 18.
  • the compound represented by the general formula (4) may be partially fluorinated. That is, the compound represented by the general formula (4), with the exception of hydrophilic group (Y 3), having at least one hydrogen atom bonded to a carbon atom, having at least one fluorine atom attached to a carbon atom It is also preferable.
  • the compound represented by the general formula (4) is also preferably a compound represented by the following formula (4a).
  • CF 2 CF-O-Rf 0- Y 3 (4a)
  • Y 3 is a hydrophilic group and Rf 0 is hyperfluorinated and may be chain or branched, cyclic or acyclic, saturated or unsaturated, substituted or unsubstituted.
  • a perfluorinated divalent linking group optionally additionally containing one or more heteroatoms selected from the group consisting of sulfur, oxygen, and nitrogen.
  • the compound represented by the general formula (4) is also preferably a compound represented by the following formula (4b).
  • CH 2 CH-O-Rf 0- Y 3 (4b) (In the formula, Y 3 is a hydrophilic group and Rf 0 is a perfluorinated divalent linking group defined by the formula (4a).)
  • Y 3 is one of the preferable forms having ⁇ OSO 3 M.
  • Y 3 is ⁇ SO 3 M.
  • M is the same as above.
  • Y 3 is also one of preferred embodiments it is -COOM.
  • Y 3 is ⁇ OPO 3 M or ⁇ OP (O) (OM) 2 .
  • Y 3 is ⁇ PO 3 M or ⁇ P (O) (OM) 2 .
  • Examples of the compound represented by the general formula (4) include the following general formula (5):
  • CX 2 CY (-CZ 2- O-Rf-Y 3 ) (5)
  • X is the same or different, -H or -F
  • Y is -H, -F, an alkyl group or a fluorine-containing alkyl group
  • Z is the same or different, -H,-.
  • Y 3 is monomer represented by the same as), and the following general formula (7).:
  • CX 2 CY (-Rf-Y 3 ) (7)
  • X is the same or different, -H or -F
  • Y is -H, -F, an alkyl group or a fluorine-containing alkyl group
  • Rf is a fluorine-containing alkylene group having 1 to 40 carbon atoms.
  • .Y 3 is a fluorine-containing alkylene group having ether bond having 2-100 carbon atoms are the same as defined above, and.
  • the fluorine-containing alkylene group having an ether bond having 2 to 100 carbon atoms is an alkylene group that does not contain a structure in which an oxygen atom is a terminal and contains an ether bond between carbon carbons.
  • X is ⁇ H or ⁇ F. Both of X may be -H, both may be -F, and at least one may be -H. For example, one may be -F and the other may be -H, or both may be -H.
  • Y is an —H, —F, an alkyl group or a fluorine-containing alkyl group.
  • the alkyl group may be an alkyl group containing no fluorine atom and may have 1 or more carbon atoms.
  • the alkyl group preferably has 6 or less carbon atoms, more preferably 4 or less, and even more preferably 3 or less.
  • the fluorine-containing alkyl group is an alkyl group containing at least one fluorine atom, and may have 1 or more carbon atoms.
  • the fluorine-containing alkyl group preferably has 6 or less carbon atoms, more preferably 4 or less, and even more preferably 3 or less.
  • Y, -H, -F or -CF 3 is preferable, and -F is more preferable.
  • Z is the same or different, and is an —H, —F, alkyl group or fluoroalkyl group.
  • the alkyl group may be an alkyl group containing no fluorine atom and may have 1 or more carbon atoms.
  • the alkyl group preferably has 6 or less carbon atoms, more preferably 4 or less, and even more preferably 3 or less.
  • the fluorine-containing alkyl group is an alkyl group containing at least one fluorine atom, and may have 1 or more carbon atoms.
  • the fluorine-containing alkyl group preferably has 6 or less carbon atoms, more preferably 4 or less, and even more preferably 3 or less.
  • -H, -F or -CF 3 is preferable, and -F is more preferable.
  • X may be -H and Y and Z may be -F.
  • the Rf is a fluorine-containing alkylene group having 1 to 40 carbon atoms or a fluorine-containing alkylene group having an ether bond having 2 to 100 carbon atoms.
  • the fluorine-containing alkylene group preferably has 2 or more carbon atoms. Further, 30 or less is preferable, 20 or less is more preferable, and 10 or less is further preferable.
  • fluorinated alkylene group -CF 2 -, - CH 2 CF 2 -, - CF 2 CF 2 -, - CF 2 CH 2 -, - CF 2 CF 2 CH 2 -, - CF (CF 3) - , -CF (CF 3) CF 2 -, - CF (CF 3) CH 2 - and the like.
  • the fluorine-containing alkylene group is preferably a perfluoroalkylene group.
  • the fluorine-containing alkylene group having an ether bond preferably has 3 or more carbon atoms.
  • the number of carbon atoms of the fluorine-containing alkylene group having an ether bond is preferably 60 or less, more preferably 30 or less, and even more preferably 12 or less.
  • Examples of the fluorine-containing alkylene group having an ether bond include the following formula: (In the equation, Z 1 is F or CF 3 ; Z 2 and Z 3 are H or F, respectively; Z 4 is H, F or CF 3 ; p1 + q1 + r1 is an integer of 1 to 10; s1 is 0 or 1; t1 is 0. It is also preferable that it is a divalent group represented by (an integer of ⁇ 5).
  • n is an integer of 1 to 10
  • n is an integer of 1 to 10
  • Y 3 is -COOM, -SO 3 M or -OSO 3 M
  • M is H, a metal atom, NR 7y 4 , an imidazolium which may have a substituent, a substitution.
  • Pyridineium which may have a group or phosphonium which may have a substituent, R 7y may be an H or an organic group, and may be the same or different. Either two are bonded to each other and A ring may be formed.).
  • the alkyl group is preferable as the organic group in R 7y .
  • an organic group of H or C 1-10 is preferable, an organic group of H or C 1-4 is more preferable, and an alkyl group of H or C 1-4 is further preferable.
  • the metal atom include alkali metals (Group 1) and alkaline earth metals (Group 2), and Na, K or Li is preferable.
  • -H a metal atom or -NR 7y 4 is preferable, and -H, an alkali metal (Group 1), an alkaline earth metal (Group 2) or -NR 7y 4 is more preferable, and -H, -Na.
  • -K, -Li or -NH 4 are more preferable, -Na, preferably from -K or -NH 4 further particularly preferred -Na or -NH 4, -NH 4 is most preferred.
  • Y 3 preferably -COOM or -SO 3 M, -COOM is more preferable.
  • the monomer represented by the general formula (5) is preferably the monomer (5a) represented by the following general formula (5a).
  • CH 2 CF (-CF 2- O-Rf-Y 3 ) (5a) (Wherein, Rf and Y 3 are as defined above.)
  • the monomer represented by the general formula (5a) has the following formula.
  • Z 1 is F or CF 3 ;
  • Z 2 and Z 3 are H or F, respectively;
  • Z 4 is H, F or CF 3 ;
  • p1 + q1 + r1 is an integer of 0 to 10;
  • s1 is 0 or 1;
  • t1 is 0.
  • the integers of up to 5 and Y 3 are the same as described above. However, when Z 3 and Z 4 are both H, p1 + q1 + r1 + s1 is not 0). More specifically
  • Etc. are preferably mentioned, among them
  • the monomer represented by the general formula (5) is preferably the monomer (5b) represented by the following general formula (5b).
  • CX 2 2 CFCF 2- O- (CF (CF 3 ) CF 2 O) n5- CF (CF 3 ) -Y 3 (5b) (In the equation, each X 2 is the same and represents F or H. N5 represents 0 or an integer of 1 to 10, and Y 3 is the same as the above definition.)
  • the above n5 is preferably 0 or an integer of 1 to 5, more preferably 0, 1 or 2, and 0 or 1 in terms of the stability of the obtained aqueous dispersion. Is more preferable.
  • the Y 3 is preferably -COOM from the stability of the proper water solubility and an aqueous dispersion is obtained, the M is less likely to remain as an impurity, the heat resistance of the obtained molded article is improved In terms of points, it is preferably H or NH 4 .
  • examples of the monomer represented by the general formula (5) include a monomer represented by the following general formula (5c).
  • CF 2 CFCF 2 -ORf-Y 3 (5c) (Wherein, Rf and Y 3 are as defined above)
  • X is ⁇ H or ⁇ F. Both of X may be -F, and at least one may be -H. For example, one may be -F and the other may be -H, or both may be -H.
  • Y is an —H, —F, an alkyl group or a fluorine-containing alkyl group.
  • the alkyl group may be an alkyl group containing no fluorine atom and may have 1 or more carbon atoms.
  • the alkyl group preferably has 6 or less carbon atoms, more preferably 4 or less, and even more preferably 3 or less.
  • the fluorine-containing alkyl group is an alkyl group containing at least one fluorine atom, and may have 1 or more carbon atoms.
  • the fluorine-containing alkyl group preferably has 6 or less carbon atoms, more preferably 4 or less, and even more preferably 3 or less.
  • Y, -H, -F or -CF 3 is preferable, and -F is more preferable.
  • X and Y contains a fluorine atom.
  • X may be -H and Y and Z may be -F.
  • the Rf is a fluorine-containing alkylene group having 1 to 40 carbon atoms or a fluorine-containing alkylene group having an ether bond having 2 to 100 carbon atoms.
  • the fluorine-containing alkylene group preferably has 2 or more carbon atoms.
  • the number of carbon atoms of the fluorine-containing alkylene group is preferably 30 or less, more preferably 20 or less, and even more preferably 10 or less.
  • fluorinated alkylene group -CF 2 -, - CH 2 CF 2 -, - CF 2 CF 2 -, - CF 2 CH 2 -, - CF 2 CF 2 CH 2 -, - CF (CF 3) - , -CF (CF 3) CF 2 -, - CF (CF 3) CH 2 - and the like.
  • the fluorine-containing alkylene group is preferably a perfluoroalkylene group.
  • Y 3 is, -COOM, -SO 3 M or -OSO 3 M
  • M is, H, a metal atom, NR 7 4, good imidazolium be substituted, substituted Pyridineium which may have a group or phosphonium which may have a substituent, R 7 , may be an H or an organic group, and may be the same or different. Any two of them are bonded to each other. A ring may be formed.).
  • An alkyl group is preferable as the organic group of R 7 .
  • R 7 an organic group of H or C 1-10 is preferable, an organic group of H or C 1-4 is more preferable, and an alkyl group of H or C 1-4 is further preferable.
  • the metal atom examples include alkali metals (Group 1) and alkaline earth metals (Group 2), and Na, K or Li is preferable.
  • M -H, preferably is a metal atom or -NR 7 4, -H, alkali metal (Group 1), alkaline earth metal (Group 2) or -NR 7 4, more preferably, -H, -Na , -K, -Li or -NH 4 are more preferable, -Na, preferably from -K or -NH 4 further particularly preferred -Na or -NH 4, -NH 4 is most preferred.
  • Y 3 preferably -COOM or -SO 3 M, -COOM is more preferable.
  • the monomer represented by the general formula (6) is selected from the group consisting of the monomers represented by the following general formulas (6a), (6b), (6c), (6d) and (6e). At least one type is preferable.
  • CF 2 CF-O- (CF 2 ) n1- Y 3 (6a) (Wherein, n1 represents an integer of 1 ⁇ 10, Y 3 is as previously defined.)
  • CF 2 CF-O- (CF 2 C (CF 3 ) F) n2- Y 3 (6b) (Wherein, n2 represents an integer of 1 ⁇ 5, Y 3 is as previously defined.)
  • CF 2 CF-O- (CFX 1) n3 -Y 3 (6c) (In the equation, X 1 represents F or CF 3 , n 3 represents an integer from 1 to 10, and Y 3 is the same as the above definition.)
  • CF 2 CF-O- (CF 2 CFX 1 O) n4- (CF 2 ) n6- Y 3 (6
  • n1 is preferably an integer of 5 or less, and more preferably an integer of 2 or less.
  • the Y 3 are points obtained stability proper water solubility and an aqueous dispersion is preferably -COOM, M is little tendency toward remaining as an impurity, that the heat resistance of the resulting molded article is improved Therefore, it is preferably H or NH 4 .
  • 2 COMM M is the same as the above definition in the formula).
  • n2 is in terms of stability of the resulting aqueous dispersion is preferably 3 or less an integer
  • Y 3 is the stability of the proper water solubility and an aqueous dispersion obtained In that respect, it is preferably ⁇ COOM
  • M is preferably H or NH 4 in that it does not easily remain as an impurity and the heat resistance of the obtained molded product is improved.
  • n3 is preferably 5 or less integer in terms of water-soluble
  • the Y 3 is in that the stability of the proper water solubility and an aqueous dispersion is obtained
  • -COOM is preferably H or NH 4 in terms of improving dispersion stability.
  • the above X 1 is preferably ⁇ CF 3 in terms of the stability of the aqueous dispersion
  • the above n4 is preferably an integer of 5 or less in terms of water solubility.
  • the above-mentioned Y 3 is preferably ⁇ COOM in that appropriate water solubility and stability of the aqueous dispersion can be obtained
  • the above-mentioned M is preferably H or NH 4 .
  • n5 is preferably 5 or less integer in terms of water-soluble
  • the Y 3 are in that excellent sedimentation stability of the proper water solubility and composition are obtained - It is preferably COOM, and the above M is preferably H or NH 4 .
  • Rf is preferably a fluorine-containing alkylene group having 1 to 40 carbon atoms. In the general formula (7), it is preferable that at least one of X and Y contains a fluorine atom.
  • the Y 3 are, -SO 3 M or -COOM is preferably, M, H, a metal atom, NR 7 4, which may imidazolium substituted, pyridinium which may have a substituent or It is preferably phosphonium which may have a substituent.
  • R 7 represents H or an organic group.
  • the above n1 is preferably an integer of 5 or less, and more preferably an integer of 2 or less.
  • the Y 3 are points obtained stability proper water solubility and an aqueous dispersion is preferably -COOM, M is little tendency toward remaining as an impurity, that the heat resistance of the resulting molded article is improved Therefore, it is preferably H or NH 4 .
  • n2 is in terms of stability of the resulting aqueous dispersion is preferably 3 or less an integer
  • Y 3 is the stability of the proper water solubility and an aqueous dispersion obtained In that respect, it is preferably ⁇ COOM
  • M is preferably H or NH 4 in that it does not easily remain as an impurity and the heat resistance of the obtained molded product is improved.
  • the modified monomer preferably contains the modified monomer (A), and has a general formula (5a), a general formula (5b), a general formula (6a), a general formula (6b), a general formula (6c), and a general formula. It is preferable to contain at least one selected from the group consisting of the compounds represented by (6d), and it is more preferable to contain the compound represented by the general formula (5a) or the general formula (5b).
  • the content of the polymerization unit based on the modified monomer (A) is in the range of 0.00001 to 1.0% by mass with respect to the total polymerization units of PTFE. Is preferable.
  • As the lower limit 0.0001% by mass is more preferable, 0.0005% by mass is more preferable, 0.001% by mass is further preferable, and 0.005% by mass is even more preferable.
  • As the upper limit 0.90% by mass is preferable, 0.50% by mass is more preferable, 0.40% by mass is further preferable, 0.30% by mass is further more preferable, and 0.10% by mass is particularly preferable. 0.08% by mass is particularly preferable, 0.05% by mass is particularly preferable, and 0.01% by mass is most preferable.
  • the PTFE may have a core-shell structure.
  • the core-shell structure is a conventionally known structure, and is a structure of primary particles in an aqueous dispersion that can be produced by the method or the like described in US Pat. No. 6,841,594.
  • Examples of the polytetrafluoroethylene having a core-shell structure include a core-shell structure including a core portion of a TFE homopolymer and a shell portion of a modified PTFE, and a core-shell structure including a core portion of a modified PTFE and a shell portion of a TFE homopolymer.
  • a core-shell structure including a core portion of modified PTFE and a shell portion of modified PTFE having a monomer composition different from that of the modified PTFE constituting the core portion.
  • a modified monomer are polymerized to produce a core portion (TFE homopolymer or modified PTFE), and then TFE and, if necessary, a modified monomer are polymerized. It can be obtained by producing a shell portion (TFE homopolymer or modified PTFE).
  • the shell portion means a portion that constitutes a predetermined thickness from the surface of the PTFE primary particle to the inside of the particle, and the core portion means a portion that constitutes the inside of the shell portion.
  • the core-shell structure includes (1) a core portion and a shell portion having different monomer compositions, and (2) a core portion and a shell portion having the same monomer composition and both portions. (3) The core portion and the shell portion have different monomer compositions, and the number average molecular weights of both portions are also different.
  • the content of the modified monomer in the shell portion is preferably 0.00001 to 1.0% by mass. It is more preferably 0.0001% by mass or more, further preferably 0.001% by mass or more, and even more preferably 0.01% by mass or more. Further, it is more preferably 0.50% by mass or less, and further preferably 0.30% by mass or less.
  • the content of the modified monomer in the core portion is preferably 0.00001 to 1.0% by mass. It is more preferably 0.0001% by mass or more, and further preferably 0.001% by mass or more. Further, it is more preferably 0.50% by mass or less, and further preferably 0.30% by mass or less.
  • the average primary particle size of the PTFE is preferably 1000 nm or less, more preferably 500 nm or less, further preferably 400 nm or less, and particularly preferably 350 nm or less.
  • PTFE having a small average primary particle size can be obtained.
  • the lower limit of the average primary particle diameter is not particularly limited, but may be, for example, 50 nm or 100 nm. From the viewpoint of molecular weight, for example, in the case of high molecular weight PTFE, it is preferably 100 nm or more, and more preferably 150 nm or more.
  • the average primary particle size can be measured by a dynamic light scattering method.
  • the average primary particle size was adjusted to a solid content concentration of about 1.0% by mass to prepare a PTFE aqueous dispersion, and the dynamic light scattering method was used to make the solvent (water) a refractive index of 1.
  • the viscosity of 3328 and the solvent (water) is 0.8878 mPa ⁇ s, and can be measured 70 times in total.
  • ELSZ-1000S manufactured by Otsuka Electronics Co., Ltd.
  • the aspect ratio of the primary particles is preferably 1.45 or less.
  • the aspect ratio is more preferably 1.40 or less, further preferably 1.35 or less, further preferably 1.30 or less, particularly preferably 1.25 or less, particularly preferably 1.20 or less, and 1.15 or less. Is particularly preferable.
  • the aspect ratio is 400, which is obtained by observing a PTFE aqueous dispersion diluted to a solid content concentration of about 1% by mass with a scanning electron microscope (SEM) and randomly extracting 400. Image processing is performed on one or more particles, and the average of the ratios of the major axis to the minor axis is used to obtain the image.
  • SEM scanning electron microscope
  • the above aspect ratio can be obtained by irradiating the PTFE powder with an electron beam, adding it to an aqueous solution of a fluorine-based surfactant, and redispersing it with ultrasonic waves to obtain a PTFE aqueous dispersion. .. From this PTFE aqueous dispersion, the aspect ratio is determined by the same method as the method of measuring with the above aqueous dispersion.
  • the standard specific gravity (SSG) and the melt viscosity (MV) used as an index of the molecular weight are not particularly limited.
  • the PTFE powder obtained by the production method of the present disclosure preferably has an average particle size (average secondary particle size) of 100 to 2000 ⁇ m.
  • the lower limit of the average secondary particle diameter is more preferably 200 ⁇ m or more, and further preferably 300 ⁇ m or more.
  • the upper limit of the average secondary particle size is preferably 1000 ⁇ m or less, more preferably 800 ⁇ m or less, and particularly preferably 700 ⁇ m or less.
  • the average particle size is a value measured in accordance with JIS K 6891.
  • the PTFE powder obtained by the production method of the present disclosure preferably has an extrusion pressure of 50.0 MPa or less, more preferably 40.0 MPa or less, preferably 10.0 MPa or more, and 15.0 MPa or more. Is more preferable.
  • the extrusion pressure is a value obtained by the following method according to the method described in JP-A-2002-201217.
  • a lubricant trade name: Isopar H (registered trademark), manufactured by Exxon Co., Ltd.
  • the glass bottle is then left at room temperature (25 ° C.) for at least 1 hour prior to extrusion to obtain a lubricating resin.
  • the lubricating resin is paste-extruded through an orifice (diameter 2.5 mm, land length 11 mm, introduction angle 30 °) at a reduction ratio of 100: 1 at room temperature to obtain a uniform beading (extruded product).
  • the extrusion speed that is, the ram speed, is 20 inches / minute (51 cm / minute).
  • the extrusion pressure is a value obtained by measuring the load when the extrusion load is in equilibrium in paste extrusion and dividing by the cross-sectional area of the cylinder used for paste extrusion.
  • the standard specific gravity (SSG) of the above-mentioned PTFE is preferably 2.280 or less, more preferably 2.200, further preferably 2.190, and even more preferably 2.180 or less. preferable. Further, it is preferably 2.130 or more.
  • the SSG is measured by a water substitution method based on ASTM D 792 using a sample molded according to ASTM D 4895-89.
  • the peak temperature of the PTFE is preferably 348 ° C. or lower, more preferably 346 ° C. or lower, further preferably 344 ° C. or lower, still more preferably 342 ° C. or lower, and 340 ° C. or lower. Is particularly preferable.
  • the peak temperature is a value measured by the following method. Approximately 10 mg of powder that has not been heated to a temperature of 300 ° C. or higher is precisely weighed, stored in a dedicated aluminum pan, and measured using a TG / DTA (differential thermal weight simultaneous measuring device). The peak temperature was set to a temperature corresponding to the maximum value of the differential thermal (DTA) curve by raising the temperature of the aluminum pan in an atmospheric atmosphere in a temperature range of 25 ° C. to 600 ° C. under the condition of 10 ° C./min.
  • DTA differential thermal
  • the PTFE usually has fibrillation properties and non-molten secondary processability.
  • the non-melt secondary processability means a property that the melt flow rate cannot be measured at a temperature higher than the crystallization melting point, that is, a property that does not easily flow even in the melting temperature region, in accordance with ASTM D 1238 and D 2116.
  • the PTFE is preferably stretchable. Whether or not it can be stretched can be confirmed by a stretching test described later.
  • the above-mentioned hydrocarbon-based surfactant can be used within the range of use in the above-mentioned production method of the present disclosure.
  • the concentration of the hydrocarbon-based surfactant is not particularly limited as long as it is within the above range, but is usually added at a critical micelle concentration (CMC) or less at the start of polymerization. If the amount added is large, needle-like particles having a large aspect ratio are generated, and the aqueous dispersion becomes gel-like and the stability is impaired.
  • CMC critical micelle concentration
  • the lower limit of the amount of the hydrocarbon-based surfactant used is preferably 0.0001% by mass, more preferably 0.001% by mass, still more preferably 0.01% by mass, and particularly preferably 0, based on the aqueous medium. .1% by mass.
  • the upper limit of the amount of the surfactant used is preferably 10% by mass, more preferably 5% by mass, still more preferably 3% by mass, and particularly preferably 2% by mass with respect to the aqueous medium.
  • hydrocarbon-based surfactant may be added to the reaction vessel all at once before the start of polymerization, may be added all at once after the start of polymerization, or may be added in a plurality of times during the polymerization. It may be added continuously during the polymerization.
  • the above-mentioned polymerization initiator is not particularly limited as long as it can generate radicals in the above-mentioned polymerization temperature range, and a known oil-soluble and / or water-soluble polymerization initiator may be used. it can. Further, the polymerization can be started as a redox in combination with a reducing agent or the like. More preferably, the above-mentioned oil-soluble radical polymerization initiator, water-soluble radical polymerization initiator or redox initiator can be used as the polymerization initiator, and the redox initiator is particularly preferable. As the redox initiator, all the above-mentioned embodiments can be adopted.
  • the redox initiator it is preferable to use an oxidizing agent or a reducing agent capable of setting the pH of the redox initiator aqueous solution to 4.0 or higher.
  • the redox initiator aqueous solution means a 0.50% by mass aqueous solution of an oxidizing agent or a 0.50% by mass aqueous solution of a reducing agent. That is, the pH of at least one of the 0.50% by mass aqueous solution of the oxidizing agent and the 0.50% by mass aqueous solution of the reducing agent may be 4.0 or more, and the 0.50% by mass aqueous solution of the oxidizing agent.
  • the pH of both the 0.50 mass% aqueous solution of the reducing agent is preferably 4.0 or more.
  • the pH of the redox initiator aqueous solution (0.50 mass% concentration aqueous solution of the oxidizing agent or 0.50 mass% concentration aqueous solution of the reducing agent) is more preferably 5.0 or more, and further preferably 5.5 or more, respectively. Preferably, 6.0 or more is particularly preferable.
  • the redox initiator is particularly preferably a combination of a salt oxidizing agent and a salt reducing agent.
  • the oxidizing agent which is the salt is more preferably at least one selected from the group consisting of persulfate, permanganate, cerium (IV) salt and bromate, and even more preferably permanganate. Potassium permanganate is particularly preferred.
  • the reducing agent which is the salt is more preferably at least one selected from the group consisting of oxalate, malonic acid, succinate, glutarate and bromate, further preferably oxalate, and oxalate. Ammonium oxalate is particularly preferred.
  • the redox initiator is at least selected from the group consisting of potassium permanganate / ammonium oxalate, potassium bromate / ammonium sulfite, manganese triacetate / ammonium oxalate, and ammonium cerium nitrate / ammonium oxalate. It is preferably one kind, and it is preferable that it is at least one kind selected from the group consisting of potassium permanganate / ammonium oxalate, potassium bromate / ammonium sulfite, and ammonium cerium nitrate / ammonium oxalate.
  • chain transfer agents can be used, and examples thereof include saturated hydrocarbons such as methane, ethane, propane and butane, halogenated hydrocarbons such as chloromethane, dichloromethane and difluoroethane, and methanol. , Ethane and other alcohols, hydrogen and the like, but those in a gaseous state at normal temperature and pressure are preferable.
  • the amount of the chain transfer agent used is usually 1 to 10000 ppm, preferably 1 to 5000 ppm, based on the total amount of TFE supplied.
  • the amount used may be 1 to 1000 ppm or 1 to 500 ppm.
  • a dispersion stabilizer of the reaction system 100 parts by mass of a saturated hydrocarbon having 12 or more carbon atoms which is substantially inert to the reaction and becomes liquid under the above-mentioned reaction conditions is used. It can also be used in an amount of 2 to 10 parts by mass. Further, aqueous ammonia, ammonium carbonate, ammonium phosphate or the like may be added as a buffer for adjusting the pH during the reaction.
  • an aqueous dispersion having a solid content concentration of 1.0 to 70% by mass and an average primary particle size of 50 to 1000 nm can be obtained.
  • the aqueous dispersion contains the surfactant and the fluoropolymer. Further, by using the above-mentioned surfactant, an aqueous dispersion having particles made of a TFE polymer having a fine particle diameter of 0.5 ⁇ m or less can be obtained.
  • the polymerization step in the production of PTFE is a step (I) of obtaining particles containing a polymerization unit based on TFE, and a step of polymerizing TFE in an aqueous medium containing the particles obtained in step (I) to obtain PTFE. It is also preferable that the step includes (II).
  • the step includes (II).
  • the polymerization step is carried out in the presence of a hydrocarbon-based surfactant and a polymerization initiator in an aqueous medium having a pH of 4.0 or more.
  • the step (Ia) of polymerizing to obtain particles containing a polymerization unit based on TFE, and the step of polymerizing TFE in an aqueous medium containing the particles obtained in step (Ia) to obtain PTFE (IIa) are included. It is also preferable that it is a process.
  • the above polymerization step polymerizes TFE into TFE in an aqueous medium in the presence of an anionic hydrocarbon-based surfactant and a polymerization initiator. It is also preferable that the step includes a step (Ib) of obtaining particles containing the based polymerization unit and a step (IIb) of polymerizing TFE in an aqueous medium containing the particles obtained in step (Ib) to obtain PTFE. ..
  • the step (II) may be carried out using the aqueous dispersion containing the particles obtained in the step (I) as it is. Further, the aqueous dispersion containing the particles obtained in the step (I) may be diluted or concentrated to carry out the step (II). The dilution or concentration may be carried out as it is in the reactor, or the aqueous dispersion containing the particles obtained in the step (I) may be recovered from the reactor. Therefore, the polymerization step may further include a step of recovering the aqueous dispersion containing the particles obtained in the step (I) after the step (I) and before the step (II).
  • a step of adjusting the aqueous dispersion containing the particles obtained in the step (I) to less than 50 ° C, less than 30 ° C, or less than 10 ° C may be included. ..
  • the stirring can be stopped once after the step (I), and then the stirring can be restarted to continue the step (II).
  • the stirring may be stopped in some cases, the pressure in the reactor is changed, the stirring is restarted, and then the stirring is continued. Step (II) can be performed.
  • the pressure of the reactor is depressurized to the atmospheric pressure, each monomer is charged into the reactor, and then the step (II) is continued. You may. After the step (I), the polymerization temperature can be changed and the step (II) can be continued.
  • the polymerization step includes the steps (I) and (II)
  • the number of particles can be increased by using a redox initiator.
  • the redox initiator is charged in the step (I) and then the polymerization initiator in the step (II) is charged to continuously produce the product. Can be done. Examples of the redox initiator include those described above.
  • the polymerization temperature and polymerization pressure in the step (I) are appropriately determined by the type of monomer used, the target molecular weight of PTFE, and the reaction rate.
  • the conditions described for the above polymerization step can be appropriately adopted.
  • the polymerization temperature is preferably 10 to 150 ° C.
  • the polymerization temperature is more preferably 30 ° C. or higher, and even more preferably 50 ° C. or higher. Further, 120 ° C. or lower is more preferable, and 100 ° C. or lower is further preferable.
  • the polymerization pressure is preferably 0.05 to 10 MPaG.
  • the polymerization pressure is more preferably 0.3 MPaG or more, further preferably 0.5 MPaG or more, still more preferably 5.0 MPaG or less, still more preferably 3.0 MPaG or less. In particular, from the viewpoint of improving the obtained amount, 1.0 MPaG or more is preferable, and 2.0 MPaG or more is more preferable.
  • the above step (I) is performed in the presence of a hydrocarbon-based surfactant.
  • the amount of the hydrocarbon-based surfactant is preferably 0.0001 to 15% by mass with respect to the aqueous medium. A more preferable lower limit is 0.001% by mass, and a more preferable upper limit is 1% by mass.
  • the amount of the hydrocarbon-based surfactant added is appropriately determined depending on the type of monomer used, the target molecular weight of PTFE, and the like.
  • the above-mentioned hydrocarbon-based surfactant may be added to the reaction vessel all at once before the start of polymerization, may be added all at once after the start of polymerization, or may be added in a plurality of times during the polymerization. It may be added continuously during the polymerization. Further, in the above step (I), all the conditions described as the above-mentioned polymerization steps can be adopted.
  • the step (I) is preferably a step of obtaining an aqueous dispersion having a particle concentration of 20.0% by mass or less.
  • the solid content concentration is more preferably 15.0% by mass or less, further preferably 10.0% by mass or less, still more preferably 8.0% by mass or less, and particularly preferably 5.0% by mass. % Or less.
  • the solid content concentration is preferably 0.1% by mass or more, more preferably 0.3% by mass or more, further preferably 0.5% by mass or more, still more preferably 0.8% by mass or more, and 1.0. Mass% or more is particularly preferable, and 1.5% by mass or more is particularly preferable.
  • the particles may be a TFE homopolymer consisting of only TFE-based polymerization units, a TFE-based polymerization unit of 99.0% by mass or more, and a modified monomer-based polymerization unit of 1.0% by mass.
  • It may be modified PTFE as follows.
  • the modified PTFE preferably has a polymerization unit based on the modified monomer (hereinafter, also referred to as “modified monomer unit”) in the range of 0.00001 to 1.0% by mass.
  • modified monomer unit As the lower limit of the modified monomer unit, 0.0001% by mass is more preferable, 0.0005% by mass is more preferable, and 0.001% by mass is further preferable.
  • the upper limit of the modified monomer unit is preferably 0.90% by mass, more preferably 0.50% by mass, further preferably 0.40% by mass, still more preferably 0.30% by mass, and 0.10% by mass. Particularly preferably, 0.08% by mass is particularly preferable, 0.05% by mass is particularly preferable, and 0.01% by mass is most preferable.
  • the particles obtained in the above step (I) preferably have an average primary particle diameter of 300 nm or less, more preferably 200 nm or less, and further preferably 150 nm or less.
  • the average primary particle diameter is preferably 0.1 nm or more, more preferably 1.0 nm or more, and further preferably 3.0 nm or more.
  • the average primary particle size can be measured by a dynamic light scattering method. The average primary particle size was adjusted to a solid content concentration of about 1.0% by mass to prepare a PTFE aqueous dispersion, and the dynamic light scattering method was used to make the solvent (water) a refractive index of 1.
  • the viscosity of 3328 and the solvent (water) is 0.8878 mPa ⁇ s, and can be measured 70 times in total.
  • the dynamic light scattering method for example, ELSZ-1000S (manufactured by Otsuka Electronics Co., Ltd.) can be used.
  • the aqueous medium is a reaction medium for polymerizing and means a liquid containing water.
  • the aqueous medium is not particularly limited as long as it contains water, and water and a fluorine-free organic solvent such as alcohol, ether, and ketone, and / or a fluorine-containing organic solvent having a boiling point of 40 ° C. or lower are used. And may be included.
  • the aqueous medium in the step (II) preferably contains an aqueous medium contained in the aqueous dispersion containing the particles obtained in the step (I). In addition to the aqueous medium contained in the aqueous dispersion containing the particles, another aqueous medium may be added.
  • the polymerization temperature and polymerization pressure in the above step (II) are appropriately determined by the type of monomer used, the target molecular weight of PTFE, and the reaction rate.
  • the polymerization temperature is preferably 10 to 150 ° C.
  • the polymerization temperature is more preferably 30 ° C. or higher, and even more preferably 50 ° C. or higher. Further, 120 ° C. or lower is more preferable, and 100 ° C. or lower is further preferable.
  • the polymerization pressure is preferably 0.05 to 10 MPaG.
  • the polymerization pressure is more preferably 0.3 MPaG or more, further preferably 0.5 MPaG or more, still more preferably 5.0 MPaG or less, still more preferably 3.0 MPaG or less. In particular, from the viewpoint of improving the obtained amount, 1.0 MPaG or more is preferable, and 2.0 MPaG or more is more preferable.
  • the above step (II) may be performed in the presence of a hydrocarbon-based surfactant or in the absence of a hydrocarbon-based surfactant.
  • the step (II) is preferably a step of polymerizing TFE in an aqueous medium containing the particles in the presence of a hydrocarbon-based surfactant.
  • the amount of the hydrocarbon-based surfactant is preferably 0.0001 to 15% by mass with respect to the aqueous medium.
  • a more preferable lower limit is 0.001% by mass, and a more preferable upper limit is 1% by mass. If it is less than 0.0001% by mass, the dispersion force may be insufficient, and if it exceeds 15% by mass, the effect commensurate with the amount added cannot be obtained.
  • the amount of the hydrocarbon-based surfactant added is appropriately determined depending on the type of monomer used, the target molecular weight of PTFE, and the like.
  • hydrocarbon-based surfactant may be added to the reaction vessel all at once before the start of polymerization, may be added all at once after the start of polymerization, or may be added in a plurality of times during the polymerization. It may be added continuously during the polymerization.
  • the step (II) preferably includes a step of continuously adding a hydrocarbon-based surfactant.
  • the continuous addition of the hydrocarbon-based surfactant is, for example, the addition of the hydrocarbon-based surfactant not all at once, but over time, without interruption, or in divided portions.
  • the amount of the hydrocarbon-based surfactant at the start of polymerization is preferably 1 ppb or more with respect to the aqueous medium.
  • the amount of the hydrocarbon-based surfactant at the start of polymerization is preferably 10 ppb or more, more preferably 50 ppb or more, still more preferably 100 ppb or more, still more preferably 200 ppb or more.
  • the upper limit is not particularly limited, but for example, it is preferably 100,000 ppm, and more preferably 50,000 ppm.
  • the amount of the hydrocarbon-based surfactant at the start of polymerization is in the above range, an aqueous dispersion having a smaller average primary particle size and more excellent stability can be obtained, and PTFE having a higher molecular weight can be obtained. be able to.
  • the aspect ratio of the primary particles can be made smaller.
  • the step of continuously adding the hydrocarbon-based surfactant makes the hydrocarbon-based surfactant aqueous when the concentration of PTFE formed in the aqueous medium is 10% by mass or less. It is preferable that it starts to be added to the medium.
  • the above-mentioned hydrocarbon-based surfactant is more preferably started to be added when it is 8.0% by mass or less, further preferably started when it is 5.0% by mass or less, and it is more preferably 4.0% by mass or less. It is even more preferable to start adding at a certain time, it is particularly preferable to start adding when the above concentration is 3.0% by mass or less, and it is particularly preferable to start adding when the concentration is 2.0% by mass or less.
  • the above concentration is the concentration with respect to the total of the aqueous medium and PTFE.
  • the amount of the hydrocarbon-based surfactant added is preferably 0.01 to 10% by mass with respect to 100% by mass of the aqueous medium.
  • a more preferable lower limit is 0.05% by mass
  • a further preferable lower limit is 0.1% by mass
  • a more preferable upper limit is 5% by mass
  • a further preferable upper limit is 1% by mass.
  • hydrocarbon-based surfactant an anionic hydrocarbon-based surfactant is preferable, and the compound ( ⁇ ), the surfactant (a), the surfactant (b), and the surfactant (c) are preferable. ), The surfactant (d), the surfactant (1) and the surfactant (1-0A), and a group consisting of these surfactants subjected to radical treatment or oxidation treatment. At least one type is preferable.
  • the hydrocarbon-based surfactant is preferably a carboxylic acid-type hydrocarbon-based surfactant, and the carboxylic acid-type hydrocarbon-based surfactant is more preferably a carboxylic acid or a carboxylate.
  • carboxylic acid type hydrocarbon-based surfactant examples include the above-mentioned surfactant (1), the above-mentioned anionic surfactant represented by the above-mentioned formula: R 6z ( -LM ) 2 , and the above-mentioned above-mentioned.
  • R 6z ( -LM ) 2 examples include the above-mentioned anionic surfactant represented by the above-mentioned formula: R 6z ( -LM ) 2 , and the above-mentioned above-mentioned.
  • R 7z (-LM) 3 the carboxyl group (-COOH) or the hydrogen atom of the carboxyl group is replaced with an inorganic cation (for example, metal atom, ammonium, etc.).
  • the above-mentioned carboxylic acid type hydrocarbon-based surfactant may be used alone or in a mixture of two or more.
  • the carboxylic acid-type hydrocarbon surfactant is preferably the compound (alpha) is a compound represented by the above formula (A), Compound A c is -COOX c in the above formula (c), the formula compound a d is -COOX d (d), the compounds wherein a is -COOM in the formula (1), compounds wherein a is -COOM in the formula (1-0A), and, in these compounds It is more preferable that the compound is at least one selected from the group consisting of those subjected to radical treatment or oxidation treatment, and from the compound represented by the above formula (A) and those obtained by subjecting the compound to radical treatment or oxidation treatment. At least one selected from the group is more preferred.
  • the metal atom of the formula M hydrogen of the carboxyl groups mentioned above, NR 101 4, which may imidazolium substituted, pyridinium which may have a substituent, or a substituent Examples thereof include those which are phosphoniums which may be possessed, but are not particularly limited.
  • an aqueous dispersion containing the particles, TFE, an aqueous medium, a modified monomer, a hydrocarbon-based surfactant, and other additives are charged into the polymerization reactor, and the reactor is charged. It can be carried out by stirring the contents of the above, keeping the reactor at a predetermined polymerization temperature, and then adding a predetermined amount of a polymerization initiator to initiate the polymerization reaction. After the start of the polymerization reaction, a monomer, a polymerization initiator, a chain transfer agent, the above-mentioned hydrocarbon-based surfactant and the like may be additionally added depending on the purpose.
  • the above-mentioned hydrocarbon-based surfactant may be added after the polymerization reaction has started.
  • the polymerization initiator is not particularly limited as long as it can generate radicals in the above polymerization temperature range, and known oil-soluble and / or water-soluble polymerization initiators can be used. Further, the polymerization can be started as a redox in combination with a reducing agent or the like. The concentration of the polymerization initiator is appropriately determined depending on the type of monomer, the target molecular weight of PTFE, and the reaction rate.
  • the polymerization initiator is not particularly limited as long as it can generate radicals in the above polymerization temperature range, and known oil-soluble and / or water-soluble polymerization initiators can be used.
  • the polymerization can be started as a redox in combination with a reducing agent or the like. More preferably, the above-mentioned oil-soluble radical polymerization initiator, water-soluble radical polymerization initiator or redox initiator can be used as the polymerization initiator, and the redox initiator is particularly preferable.
  • the redox initiator all the above-mentioned embodiments can be adopted.
  • the redox initiator it is preferable to use an oxidizing agent or a reducing agent capable of setting the pH of the redox initiator aqueous solution to 4.0 or higher.
  • the redox initiator aqueous solution means a 0.50% by mass aqueous solution of an oxidizing agent or a 0.50% by mass aqueous solution of a reducing agent. That is, the pH of at least one of the 0.50% by mass aqueous solution of the oxidizing agent and the 0.50% by mass aqueous solution of the reducing agent may be 4.0 or more, and the 0.50% by mass aqueous solution of the oxidizing agent. , And the pH of both the 0.50 mass% aqueous solution of the reducing agent is preferably 4.0 or more.
  • the pH of the redox initiator aqueous solution (0.50 mass% concentration aqueous solution of the oxidizing agent or 0.50 mass% concentration aqueous solution of the reducing agent) is more preferably 5.0 or more, and further preferably 5.5 or more, respectively. Preferably, 6.0 or more is particularly preferable.
  • the redox initiator is particularly preferably a combination of a salt oxidizing agent and a salt reducing agent.
  • the oxidizing agent which is the salt is more preferably at least one selected from the group consisting of persulfate, permanganate, cerium (IV) salt and bromate, and even more preferably permanganate. Potassium permanganate is particularly preferred.
  • the reducing agent which is the salt is more preferably at least one selected from the group consisting of oxalate, malonic acid, succinate, glutarate and bromate, further preferably oxalate, and oxalate.
  • Ammonium oxalate is particularly preferred.
  • the redox initiator is at least selected from the group consisting of potassium permanganate / ammonium oxalate, potassium bromate / ammonium sulfite, manganese triacetate / ammonium oxalate, and ammonium cerium nitrate / ammonium oxalate.
  • step (II) it is preferable that TFE and, if necessary, a modified monomer are polymerized in the absence of a fluorine-containing surfactant.
  • “Substantially in the absence of a fluorine-containing surfactant” means that the amount of the fluorine-containing surfactant is 1 ppm or less with respect to the PTFE obtained by polymerization, and is preferably 100 ppb or less, more preferably. Is 10 ppb or less, more preferably 1 ppb or less.
  • the PTFE powder (for example, PTFE fine powder) obtained by the production method of the present disclosure may be used as a powder, or the powder may be added to water and used as an aqueous dispersion.
  • the obtained PTFE fine powder is preferable for molding, and suitable applications include hydraulic systems such as aircraft and automobiles, fuel system tubes and the like, flexible hoses such as chemicals and steam, and electric wire coating applications. ..
  • the PTFE aqueous dispersion obtained by the production method of the present disclosure was stabilized and further concentrated by adding a nonionic surfactant, and an organic or inorganic filler was added depending on the purpose. It is also preferable to use it as a composition for various purposes.
  • the above composition has a non-adhesive and low coefficient of friction by coating on a base material made of metal or ceramics, and has excellent gloss, smoothness, wear resistance, weather resistance and heat resistance. It is suitable for painting rolls and cooking utensils, impregnating glass cloth, and the like.
  • An organosol of PTFE can also be prepared from the above-mentioned aqueous dispersion of PTFE.
  • the organosol can contain the PTFE and the organic solvent, and the organic solvent includes an ether solvent, a ketone solvent, an alcohol solvent, an amide solvent, an ester solvent, an aliphatic hydrocarbon solvent, and an aromatic solvent. Examples thereof include a hydrocarbon solvent and a halogenated hydrocarbon solvent, and N-methyl-2-pyrrolidone, dimethylacetamide and the like can be preferably used.
  • the preparation of the organosol can be carried out, for example, by the method described in International Publication No. 2012/002038.
  • aqueous dispersion of PTFE or the above-mentioned PTFE fine powder is also preferable to use as a processing aid.
  • a processing aid by mixing the aqueous dispersion or the fine powder with a host polymer or the like, the melt strength during melt processing of the host polymer can be improved, and the mechanical strength, electrical properties, and difficulties of the obtained polymer can be improved. It is possible to improve flammability, drip prevention during combustion, and slidability.
  • the aqueous dispersion of PTFE or the fine powder of PTFE is also preferably used as a binder for batteries and dustproof.
  • the aqueous dispersion of PTFE or the PTFE fine powder is used as a processing aid after being combined with a resin other than PTFE.
  • the aqueous dispersion or the fine powder is, for example, a raw material for PTFE described in JP-A-11-49912, US Pat. No. 5,804,654, JP-A-11-29679, and JP-A-2003-2980. Is suitable as.
  • the processing aid using the aqueous dispersion or the fine powder is not inferior to the processing aids described in the respective publications.
  • the aqueous dispersion of PTFE is mixed with an aqueous dispersion of a melt-processable fluororesin and coagulated to obtain a co-coagulation powder.
  • the co-coagulation powder is suitable as a processing aid.
  • melt-processable fluororesin examples include FEP, PFA, TFE / perfluoroallyl ether copolymer, ETFE, ethylene / TFE / HFP copolymer [EFEP], and FEP is preferable.
  • the aqueous dispersion preferably contains the melt-processable fluororesin.
  • the melt-processable fluororesin include FEP, PFA, TFE / perfluoroallyl ether copolymer, ETFE, EFEP and the like.
  • the aqueous dispersion containing the melt-processable fluororesin can be used as a coating material. Since the melt-processable fluororesin can sufficiently fuse the particles of the TFE polymer to each other, the film-forming property can be improved and the obtained film can be glossy.
  • the fluorine-free resin to which the co-coagulation powder is added may be in the form of a powder, in the form of pellets, or in the form of an emulsion.
  • the above addition is preferably carried out while applying a shearing force by a known method such as extrusion kneading or roll kneading, in that each resin is sufficiently mixed.
  • the use of the aqueous dispersion is not particularly limited, and as the aqueous dispersion is applied as it is, it is coated on a substrate, dried, and then fired as necessary; coatings such as non-woven fabrics and resin molded products. Impregnation by impregnating the porous support, drying, and then preferably firing; coating on a substrate such as glass, drying, and if necessary, immersing in water to peel off the substrate to form a thin film. Examples thereof include cast film formation to be obtained, and examples of these applications include aqueous dispersion type paints, tent films, conveyor belts, printed substrates (CCL), binders for electrodes, water repellents for electrodes, and the like. ..
  • the aqueous dispersion is obtained by blending a compounding agent such as a known pigment, thickener, dispersant, antifoaming agent, antifreezing agent, or film forming aid, or by further compounding another polymer compound. It can be used as a water-based coating coating. Further, as an additive application, it can be used as a binder for suppressing the falling off of the active material of the electrode, a binder application, a compound application such as an anti-drip agent, and a dust suppression treatment application for preventing the flying of earth and sand and dust.
  • a compounding agent such as a known pigment, thickener, dispersant, antifoaming agent, antifreezing agent, or film forming aid
  • An anionic surfactant can be preferably contained for the purpose of adjusting the viscosity of the aqueous dispersion or for the purpose of improving the miscibility of pigments, fillers and the like.
  • the anionic surfactant can be appropriately added as long as there is no problem in terms of economy and environment.
  • anionic surfactant examples include non-fluorinated anionic surfactants and fluorine-containing anionic surfactants, but fluorine-free non-fluorinated anionic surfactants, that is, hydrocarbon anionic surfactants. Agents are preferred.
  • the type is not particularly limited as long as it is a known anionic surfactant, but for example, the anionic surfactant described in International Publication No. 2013/146950 and International Publication No. 2013/146947.
  • Agents can be used.
  • those having a saturated or unsaturated aliphatic chain having 6 to 40 carbon atoms, preferably 8 to 20 carbon atoms, and more preferably 9 to 13 carbon atoms can be mentioned.
  • the saturated or unsaturated aliphatic chain may be either a straight chain or a branched chain, and may have a cyclic structure.
  • the hydrocarbon may be aromatic or may have an aromatic group.
  • the hydrocarbon may have heteroatoms such as oxygen, nitrogen and sulfur.
  • anionic surfactant examples include alkyl sulfonates, alkyl sulfates, alkyl aryl sulfates and salts thereof; aliphatic (carboxylic acid) acids and salts thereof; alkyl phosphates, alkyl aryl phosphates or salts thereof; and the like.
  • alkyl sulfonates, alkyl sulfates, aliphatic carboxylic acids or salts thereof are preferred.
  • alkyl sulfate or a salt thereof ammonium lauryl sulfate, sodium lauryl sulfate and the like are preferable.
  • succinic acid, decanoic acid, undecanoic acid, undecenoic acid, lauric acid, hydrododecanoic acid, or salts thereof are preferable.
  • the amount of the anionic surfactant added depends on the type of the anionic surfactant and other compounding agents, but is preferably 10 ppm to 5000 ppm with respect to the solid content mass of the fluoropolymer. As the lower limit of the amount of the anionic surfactant added, 50 ppm or more is more preferable, and 100 ppm or more is further preferable. If the amount added is too small, the viscosity adjusting effect is poor. The upper limit of the amount of the anionic surfactant added is more preferably 3000 ppm or less, further preferably 2000 ppm or less. If the amount added is too large, the mechanical stability and storage stability of the aqueous dispersion may be impaired.
  • methyl cellulose, alumina sol, polyvinyl alcohol, carboxylated vinyl polymer and the like can be blended in addition to the anionic surfactant.
  • a pH adjuster such as aqueous ammonia can also be added for the purpose of adjusting the pH of the aqueous dispersion.
  • the aqueous dispersion may contain other water-soluble polymer compounds as long as the characteristics of the aqueous dispersion are not impaired.
  • the other water-soluble polymer compounds are not particularly limited, and for example, polyethylene oxide (dispersion stabilizer), polyethylene glycol (dispersion stabilizer), polyvinylpyrrolidone (dispersion stabilizer), phenol resin, urea resin, epoxy resin, etc. Examples thereof include melamine resin, polyester resin, polyether resin, acrylic silicone resin, silicone resin, silicone polyester resin, and polyurethane resin.
  • preservatives such as isothiazolone-based, azole-based, pronopol, chlorotalonil, methylsulfonyltetrachloropyrodin, carventazim, fluoroforbet, sodium diacetate, and diiodomethyltolylsulfone.
  • the aqueous dispersion of PTFE is also preferably used as a dust control treatment agent.
  • the dust suppressing treatment agent is a method of mixing a dust generating substance and subjecting the mixture to a compression-shearing action at a temperature of 20 to 200 ° C. to fibrillate the TFE polymer to suppress dust of the dust generating substance.
  • it can be used in methods such as Japanese Patent No. 2827152 and Japanese Patent No. 2538783.
  • the aqueous dispersion of PTFE can be suitably used, for example, in the dust control agent composition described in International Publication No. 2007/004250, and also in the dust control treatment method described in International Publication No. 2007/000812. It can be preferably used.
  • the dust control treatment agent includes building materials, soil stabilizers, solidifying materials, fertilizers, incineration ash and harmful substances in landfills, explosion-proofing, cosmetics, sand for pet excretion represented by cat sand, etc. It is suitably used for the dust control treatment of.
  • aqueous dispersion of PTFE as a raw material for obtaining TFE polymer fibers by a dispersion spinning method (Dispersion Spinning method).
  • Dispersion spinning method an aqueous dispersion of the TFE polymer and an aqueous dispersion of a matrix polymer are mixed, and the mixture is extruded to form an intermediate fiber structure, and the intermediate fiber structure is formed.
  • This is a method for obtaining TFE polymer fibers by decomposing the matrix polymer and sintering TFE polymer particles by firing.
  • High molecular weight PTFE can also be produced by the production method of the present disclosure.
  • the production method of the present disclosure can produce PTFE having a molecular weight equivalent to that of a production method using a conventional fluorine-containing surfactant without using a conventional fluorine-containing surfactant.
  • the polymerization temperature is preferably 30 ° C. or higher, more preferably 40 ° C. or higher, and even more preferably 50 ° C. or higher. Further, 100 ° C. or lower is preferable, and 95 ° C. or lower is more preferable.
  • the polymerization pressure is preferably 0.5 MPaG or more, preferably 0.7 MPaG or more, preferably 1.0 MPaG or more, preferably 5.0 MPaG or less, more preferably 4.0 MPaG or less, still more preferably 3.0 MPaG or less.
  • the high molecular weight PTFE powder obtained by polymerization has stretchability and non-melt processability, and is also useful as a raw material for a stretched body (porous body).
  • this stretched body is a membrane (PTFE stretched membrane or PTFE porous membrane)
  • it can be stretched by a known PTFE stretching method.
  • the high molecular weight PTFE is easily fibrillated into a PTFE porous body (membrane) composed of nodules and fibers.
  • a uniaxially stretched film can be obtained by roll-stretching a sheet-shaped or rod-shaped paste extrusion in the extrusion direction.
  • a biaxially stretched film can also be obtained by stretching in the width direction with a tenter or the like. It is also preferable to perform a semi-baking treatment before stretching.
  • This PTFE stretched body is a porous body having a high porosity, and can be suitably used as a filter medium for various microfiltration filters such as an air filter and a chemical solution filter, a support material for a polymer electrolyte membrane, and the like. It is also useful as a material for products used in the textile field, medical field, electrochemical field, sealing material field, air filtration field, ventilation / internal pressure adjustment field, liquid filtration field, general consumer material field, and the like. Specific uses will be illustrated below.
  • Electrochemical field Dielectric material prepreg EMI shielding material, heat transfer material, etc. More specifically, printed wiring boards, electromagnetic shielding shield materials, insulated heat transfer materials, insulating materials, etc. Sealing material field Gaskets, packings, pump diaphragms, pump tubes, aircraft sealing materials, etc.
  • Air filtration field ULPA filter for semiconductor manufacturing
  • HEPA filter for hospital / semiconductor manufacturing
  • cylindrical cartridge filter for industrial use
  • bug filter for industrial use
  • heat-resistant bag filter- for exhaust gas treatment
  • heat-resistant pleated filter for exhaust gas treatment
  • SINBRAN filter for industrial use
  • catalyst filter for exhaust gas treatment
  • filter with adsorbent built-in HDD
  • vent filter with adsorbent for built-in HDD
  • vent filter for built-in HDD, etc.
  • cleaning Machine filters for vacuum cleaners
  • general-purpose multi-layer felt materials for GT cartridge filters (for GT compatible products), cooling filters (for electronic device housings), etc.
  • Ventilation / internal pressure adjustment field Freeze-drying materials such as containers for freeze-drying, ventilation materials for automobiles for electronic circuits and lamps, container applications such as container caps, electronic devices including small terminals such as tablet terminals and mobile phone terminals For protective ventilation applications, medical ventilation applications, etc.
  • Liquid filtration field Semiconductor liquid filtration filter (for semiconductor manufacturing), hydrophilic PTFE filter (for semiconductor manufacturing), filter for chemicals (for chemical treatment), filter for pure water production line (for pure water production), backwash type liquid Filtration filter (for industrial wastewater treatment), etc.
  • Textile field PTFE fiber fiber material
  • sewing thread textile
  • weaving thread textile
  • rope etc.
  • the production method of the present disclosure can also produce low molecular weight PTFE.
  • the low molecular weight PTFE may be produced by polymerization, or the high molecular weight PTFE obtained by polymerization may be produced by reducing the molecular weight by a known method (pyrolysis, irradiation decomposition, etc.).
  • the polymerization temperature is preferably 30 ° C. or higher, more preferably 40 ° C. or higher, and even more preferably 50 ° C. or higher. Further, 100 ° C. or lower is preferable, 90 ° C. or lower is more preferable, and 80 ° C. or lower is further preferable.
  • the polymerization pressure is preferably 0.3 MPaG or more, preferably 0.4 MPaG or more, preferably 0.5 MPaG or more, preferably 5.0 MPaG or less, more preferably 4.0 MPaG or less, still more preferably 3.0 MPaG or less.
  • Low molecular weight PTFE also called PTFE micropowder
  • PTFE micropowder with a molecular weight of 600,000 or less has excellent chemical stability, extremely low surface energy, and is less likely to cause fibrillation, thus improving slipperiness and the texture of the coating film surface. It is suitable for producing plastics, inks, cosmetics, paints, greases, office automation equipment members, toners and the like as additives for the purpose of making them (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 10-147617).
  • a polymerization initiator and the above-mentioned hydrocarbon-based surfactant are dispersed in an aqueous medium, and TFE or a monomer copolymerizable with TFE is polymerized with TFE to have a low molecular weight. You may obtain PTFE.
  • the high molecular weight PTFE means a PTFE having non-melt processability and fibrillation property.
  • the low molecular weight PTFE means PTFE having melt processability and not fibrillation property.
  • the non-melt processability means a property that the melt flow rate cannot be measured at a temperature higher than the crystallization melting point in accordance with ASTM D 1238.
  • the high molecular weight PTFE preferably has a standard specific gravity (SSG) of 2.130 to 2.280.
  • the standard specific gravity is measured by a water substitution method based on ASTM D 792 using a sample molded according to ASTM D 4895-89.
  • “high molecular weight” means that the standard specific gravity is within the above range.
  • the low molecular weight PTFE has a melt viscosity at 380 ° C. of 1 ⁇ 10 2 to 7 ⁇ 10 5 Pa ⁇ s.
  • melt viscosity means that the melt viscosity is within the above range.
  • the high molecular weight PTFE has an extremely higher melt viscosity than the low molecular weight PTFE, and it is difficult to accurately measure the melt viscosity.
  • the melt viscosity of the low molecular weight PTFE can be measured, it is difficult to obtain a molded product that can be used for measuring the standard specific gravity from the low molecular weight PTFE, and it is difficult to measure the accurate standard specific gravity. Is. Therefore, in the present disclosure, the standard specific gravity is adopted as an index of the molecular weight of the high molecular weight PTFE, and the melt viscosity is adopted as an index of the molecular weight of the low molecular weight PTFE. There is no known measurement method capable of directly specifying the molecular weight of either the high molecular weight PTFE or the low molecular weight PTFE.
  • the high molecular weight PTFE preferably has a peak temperature of 333 to 347 ° C, more preferably 335 to 345 ° C.
  • the low molecular weight PTFE preferably has a peak temperature of 322 to 333 ° C, more preferably 324 to 332 ° C.
  • the peak temperature is measured by precisely weighing about 10 mg of a powder having no history of heating to a temperature of 300 ° C. or higher, storing it in a dedicated aluminum pan, and using a TG / DTA (differential thermal weight simultaneous measuring device).
  • the peak temperature was set to a temperature corresponding to the maximum value of the differential thermal (DTA) curve by raising the temperature of the aluminum pan in an atmospheric atmosphere in a temperature range of 25 ° C. to 600 ° C. under the condition of 10 ° C./min.
  • DTA differential thermal
  • the high molecular weight PTFE is 333 to 347 ° C. in the heat of fusion curve when the temperature is raised at a rate of 10 ° C./min using a differential scanning calorimeter [DSC] for a PTFE having no history of heating to a temperature of 300 ° C. or higher. It is preferable that at least one heat absorption peak appears in the range of 1 and the amount of heat of fusion calculated from the heat of fusion curve at 290 to 350 ° C. is 62 mJ / mg or more.
  • An unfired tape (raw tape) can also be obtained from the PTFE fine powder obtained by using the above-mentioned surfactant.
  • the hydrocarbon-based surfactant and the hydrocarbon-based surfactant produced as a by-product from the hydrocarbon-based surfactant.
  • the method for recovering and purifying is not particularly limited, but a known method can be used. For example, it can be carried out by the method described in Japanese Patent Publication No. 2011-520020.
  • the polymerization of FEP is preferably carried out at a polymerization temperature of 10 to 150 ° C. and a polymerization pressure of 0.3 to 6.0 MpaG.
  • the FEP may be further modified by using perfluoro (alkyl vinyl ether) as the third component within a range of 0.1 to 2% by mass of all the monomers.
  • the hydrocarbon-based surfactant can be used within the range of use in the production method of the present disclosure, but usually, the amount is 0.0001 to 10% by mass with respect to 100% by mass of the aqueous medium. Added.
  • FEP polymerization of FEP
  • cyclohexane methanol, ethanol, propanol, ethane, propane, butane, pentane, hexane, carbon tetrachloride, chloroform, methylene chloride, methyl chloride and the like
  • the buffer it is preferable to use ammonium carbonate, disodium hydrogen phosphate or the like.
  • the aqueous dispersion of FEP obtained by the production method of the present disclosure may be subjected to post-treatment such as concentration if necessary, dried, powdered, and then melt-extruded to be pelletized.
  • the aqueous medium in the aqueous dispersion of FEP may contain an additive such as a nonionic surfactant, if necessary, but may contain a water-soluble organic solvent such as a water-soluble alcohol. It may be the one which does not contain a water-soluble organic solvent.
  • melt extrusion can be carried out by appropriately setting the extrusion conditions as long as the extrusion conditions can be generally pelletized.
  • the obtained FEP may have a terminal group such as -CF 3 or -CF 2 H at at least one of the polymer main chain and the polymer side chain.
  • a terminal group such as -CF 3 or -CF 2 H at at least one of the polymer main chain and the polymer side chain.
  • the unstable terminal group is chemically unstable, it not only lowers the heat resistance of the resin but also causes an increase in the amount of attenuation of the obtained electric wire.
  • the polymer at the end of polymerization can be produced so that the total number of unstable terminal groups and -CF 2 H terminal groups is 50 or less per 1 ⁇ 10 6 carbon atoms. preferable. More preferably, it is less than 20 per 1 ⁇ 10 6 carbon atoms, and even more preferably 5 or less.
  • the unstable terminal group and the -CF 2 H terminal group may be absent and all may be a -CF 3 terminal group.
  • Unstable end groups and -CF 2 H end groups can be converted to -CF 3 end groups and stabilized by fluorination treatment.
  • the fluorination treatment method is not particularly limited, and examples thereof include a method of exposing the polymer to a fluorine radical source that generates fluorine radicals under fluorination treatment conditions.
  • the fluorine radical source include fluorine gas, CoF 3 , AgF 2 , UF 6 , OF 2 , N 2 F 2 , CF 3 OF, and halogen fluoride, for example, IF 5 , ClF 3 .
  • a method of directly contacting fluorine gas with FEP obtained by the production method of the present disclosure is preferable, and the above contact is performed using diluted fluorine gas having a fluorine gas concentration of 10 to 50% by mass in terms of reaction control.
  • the diluted fluorine gas can be obtained by diluting the fluorine gas with an inert gas such as nitrogen gas or argon gas.
  • the fluorine gas treatment can be performed, for example, at a temperature of 100 to 250 ° C.
  • the processing temperature is not limited to the above range, and can be appropriately set according to the situation.
  • the fluorine gas treatment is preferably carried out by continuously or intermittently supplying diluted fluorine gas into the reactor. This fluorination treatment may be a dry powder after polymerization or pellets extruded by melt.
  • the FEP obtained by the manufacturing method of the present disclosure has good moldability and is less likely to cause molding defects, and also has good heat resistance, chemical resistance, solvent resistance, insulating property, electrical properties and the like.
  • the above-mentioned method for producing a FEP powder is a method for obtaining a powder by drying and pulverizing the FEP obtained by the above-mentioned production method of the present disclosure.
  • the powder may be fluorinated.
  • the above-mentioned method for producing a fluorinated powder is a method for obtaining a fluorinated powder by fluorinating the powder obtained by the above-mentioned method for producing a powder by supplying fluorinated gas.
  • the method for producing pellets of FEP is a method for obtaining pellets by pelletizing the FEP obtained by the production method of the present disclosure described above.
  • the pellet may be fluorinated.
  • the above-mentioned method for producing fluorinated pellets is a method for obtaining fluorinated pellets by supplying fluorinated gas to the pellets obtained by the above-mentioned method for producing pellets.
  • this FEP can be used for manufacturing various molded products such as electric wires, foamed electric wires, cables, coating materials such as wires, tubes, films, sheets, filaments and the like.
  • the polymerization of a TFE / perfluoro (alkyl vinyl ether) copolymer such as PFA or MFA and a TFE / perfluoroallyl ether copolymer is usually carried out at a polymerization temperature of 10 to 100 ° C.
  • the pressure is preferably 0.3 to 6.0 MpaG.
  • the above-mentioned surfactant can be used within the range of use in the production method of the present disclosure, but is usually used. It is preferable to add in an amount of 0.0001 to 10% by mass based on 100% by mass of the aqueous medium.
  • TFE / perfluoro (alkyl vinyl ether) copolymer and TFE / perfluoroallyl ether copolymer cyclohexane, methanol, ethanol, propanol, propane, butane, pentane, hexane, carbon tetrachloride, as chain transfer agents, Chloroform, methylene chloride, methyl chloride, methane, ethane and the like are preferably used, and ammonium carbonate, disodium hydrogen phosphate and the like are preferably used as the pH buffer.
  • An aqueous dispersion of a TFE / perfluoro (alkyl vinyl ether) copolymer such as PFA or MFA obtained by the production method of the present disclosure is subjected to post-treatment such as concentration as necessary, then dried, powdered, and then melt-extruded. It may be pelletized.
  • the aqueous medium in the above aqueous dispersion may contain an additive such as a nonionic surfactant, if necessary, but may contain a water-soluble organic solvent such as a water-soluble alcohol. It may be the one which does not contain a water-soluble organic solvent.
  • melt extrusion can be carried out by appropriately setting the extrusion conditions as long as the extrusion conditions can be generally pelletized.
  • the above-mentioned copolymer is preferably treated with fluorine gas for the purpose of improving its heat resistance and further enhancing the effect of suppressing chemical permeation of the molded product.
  • Fluorine gas treatment is performed by bringing fluorine gas into contact with a chemical permeation inhibitor. However, since the reaction with fluorine is very exothermic, it is preferable to dilute fluorine with an inert gas such as nitrogen.
  • the amount of fluorine in the fluorine gas / inert gas mixture is 1 to 100% by mass, preferably 10 to 25% by mass.
  • the treatment temperature is 150 to 250 ° C., preferably 200 to 250 ° C., and the fluorine gas treatment time is 3 to 16 hours, preferably 4 to 12 hours.
  • the gas pressure for fluorine gas treatment is in the range of 1 to 10 atm, but atmospheric pressure is preferably used. When the reactor is used at atmospheric pressure, the fluorine gas / inert gas mixture may be continuously passed through the reactor. As a result, unstable end of the copolymer is converted to -CF 3 end, a thermally stable.
  • molding methods such as compression molding, transfer molding, extrusion molding, injection molding, blow molding and the like can be applied as in the case of conventional PFA.
  • a desired molded product can be obtained by such a molding method.
  • molded products include sheets, films, packings, round bars, square bars, pipes, tubes, round tanks, square tanks, tanks, and wafers.
  • tubes, pipes, tanks, connectors, etc. used for various chemical reaction devices, semiconductor manufacturing devices, and acid-based or alkaline-based chemical supply devices that require impermeable chemical solutions. Can be used.
  • a nonionic surfactant is appropriately added to the aqueous dispersion of the TFE / perfluoro (alkyl vinyl ether) copolymer such as PFA and MFA and the TFE / perfluoroallyl ether copolymer, and if necessary, poly.
  • a primer composition can be obtained by dissolving or dispersing ether sulfone, polyamideimide and / or polyimide, and a metal powder in an organic solvent. This primer composition is applied to a metal surface, a melt-processable fluororesin composition is applied onto the thus formed primer layer, and the melt-processable fluororesin composition layer is fired together with the primer layer to form fluorine on the metal surface. It can also be used as a resin coating method.
  • the polymerization of ETFE is preferably carried out at a polymerization temperature of 10 to 100 ° C. and a polymerization pressure of 0.3 to 2.0 MPaG.
  • the ETFE may be further modified by using a third monomer in a range of 0 to 20% by mass of all the monomers.
  • TFE: ethylene: third monomer (63 to 94) :( 27 to 2) :( 1 to 10).
  • the above-mentioned surfactant can be used within the range of use in the production method of the present disclosure, but is usually added in an amount of 0.0001 to 10% by mass with respect to 100% by mass of the aqueous medium. ..
  • cyclohexane methanol, ethanol, propanol, ethane, propane, butane, pentane, hexane, carbon tetrachloride, chloroform, methylene chloride, methyl chloride and the like as the chain transfer agent.
  • the aqueous dispersion of ETFE obtained by the production method of the present disclosure may be post-treated such as concentration, dried, powdered, and then melt-extruded to be pelletized.
  • the aqueous medium in the above aqueous dispersion may contain an additive such as a nonionic surfactant, if necessary, but may contain a water-soluble organic solvent such as a water-soluble alcohol. It may be the one which does not contain a water-soluble organic solvent.
  • melt extrusion can be carried out by appropriately setting the extrusion conditions as long as the extrusion conditions can be generally pelletized.
  • the ETFE sheet can be extruded into a sheet. That is, the ETFE powder or pellet can be melted, continuously extruded from the die, and cooled to obtain a sheet-shaped molded product. Additives may be added to ETFE.
  • the additive a known additive can be appropriately used. Specific examples include ultraviolet absorbers, light stabilizers, antioxidants, infrared absorbers, flame retardants, flame retardant fillers, organic pigments, inorganic pigments, dyes and the like. Inorganic additives are preferable from the viewpoint of excellent weather resistance.
  • the content of the additive in the ETFE sheet is preferably 20% by mass or less, and particularly preferably 10% by mass or less, based on the total mass of the ETFE sheet.
  • membrane materials for membrane structure buildings (athletic facilities, gardening facilities, atriums, etc.) ) Is suitable.
  • membrane materials for membrane structures for example, outdoor board materials (soundproof walls, windbreak fences, overwave fences, garage canopies, shopping malls, pedestrian walls, roofing materials), glass shatterproof films, heat and water resistance Sheets, building materials, etc. (tent materials for tent warehouses, membrane materials for sunshades, partial roofing materials for lighting, window materials that replace glass, membrane materials for flameproof partitions, curtains, exterior wall reinforcement, waterproof membranes, smokeproof membranes, etc.
  • Non-combustible transparent partition road reinforcement, interior (lighting, wall surface, brand, etc.), exterior (tent, signboard, etc.), daily leisure goods (fishing rod, racket, golf club, projection curtain, etc.), automobile materials (roof) , Vibration damping material, body, etc.), aircraft material, ship material, home appliance exterior, tank, container inner wall, filter, construction membrane material, electronic material (printed substrate, wiring substrate, insulating film, release film, etc.), solar cell It is useful as a surface material for modules, a mirror protective material for solar thermal power generation, a surface material for solar water heaters, and the like.
  • An electrolyte polymer precursor can also be produced using the production method of the present disclosure.
  • the polymerization of the electrolyte polymer precursor is preferably carried out at a polymerization temperature of 10 to 100 ° C. and a polymerization pressure of 0.1 to 2.0 MPaG.
  • the electrolyte polymer precursor is composed of a vinyl ether monomer as shown below, and can be converted into an ion-exchangeable polymer through a hydrolysis treatment.
  • CF 2 CF-O- (CF 2 CFY 151- O) n- (CFY 152 ) m- A 151 Fluoromonomers represented by can be mentioned.
  • the electrolyte polymer precursor may be modified with a third monomer within a range of 0 to 20% by mass of all the monomers.
  • the third monomer include polyfunctional monomers such as CTFE, vinylidene fluoride, perfluoroalkyl vinyl ether, and divinylbenzene.
  • the electrolyte polymer precursor thus obtained is formed into, for example, a film, hydrolyzed with an alkaline solution, and treated with mineral acid to form a polymer electrolyte film such as a fuel cell, an electrolyzer, and a redox flow battery. Can be used for.
  • the electrolyte polymer dispersion can be obtained by hydrolyzing with an alkaline solution while maintaining the dispersed state of the electrolyte polymer precursor. Subsequently, by heating to 120 ° C. or higher in the pressurized container, it can be dissolved in, for example, a water / alcohol mixed solvent to be in a solution state.
  • the solution thus obtained can be used, for example, as a binder for electrodes, or can be combined with various additives to form a cast film, and can be used, for example, for an antifouling coating film, an organic actuator, or the like.
  • the polymerization temperature of the TFE / VDF copolymer is not particularly limited and may be 0 to 100 ° C.
  • the polymerization pressure is appropriately determined according to other polymerization conditions such as the polymerization temperature, but is usually 0 to 9.8 MPaG.
  • the TFE / VDF copolymer may also be modified by using a third monomer in a range of 0 to 50 mol% of all the monomers.
  • TFE: ethylene: third monomer (30 to 85) :( 10 to 69.9) :( 0.1 to 10).
  • the third monomer may be a fluorine-free ethylenic monomer.
  • the fluorine-free ethylenic monomer is preferably selected from ethylenic monomers having 6 or less carbon atoms in terms of maintaining heat resistance and chemical resistance.
  • examples thereof include sulfonic acid, acrylic acid and methacrylic acid.
  • the above-mentioned surfactant can be used within the range of use in the production method of the present disclosure, but is usually 0.0001 to 5% by mass based on 100% by mass of the aqueous medium. Add in quantity.
  • the TFE / VDF copolymer obtained by the polymerization may be amidated by contacting it with aqueous ammonia, ammonia gas or a nitrogen compound capable of producing ammonia.
  • the TFE / VDF copolymer obtained by the above-mentioned method is also preferably used as a raw material for obtaining TFE / VDF copolymer fibers by the spinning and drawing method.
  • a TFE / VDF copolymer is melt-spun and then cooled and solidified to obtain an undrawn yarn, and then the undrawn yarn is run in a heated tubular body and drawn to form a TFE.
  • a method for obtaining VDF copolymer fibers is also preferably used as a raw material for obtaining TFE / VDF copolymer fibers by the spinning and drawing method.
  • the TFE / VDF copolymer can also be dissolved in an organic solvent to obtain a solution of the TFE / VDF copolymer.
  • organic solvent include nitrogen-containing organic solvents such as N-methyl-2-pyrrolidone, N, N-dimethylacetamide, and dimethylformamide; ketone solvents such as acetone, methyl ethyl ketone, cyclohexanone, and methyl isobutyl ketone; ethyl acetate.
  • Ester solvent such as butyl acetate
  • Ether solvent such as tetrahydrofuran and dioxane
  • general-purpose organic solvent having a low boiling point such as a mixed solvent thereof can be mentioned.
  • the above solution can be used as a binder for batteries.
  • the aqueous dispersion of the TFE / VDF copolymer on a porous substrate made of a polyolefin resin and use it as a composite porous membrane. It is also preferable to disperse inorganic particles or organic particles in an aqueous dispersion and coat it on a porous substrate to use it as a composite porous membrane.
  • the composite porous membrane thus obtained can be used as a separator for a lithium secondary battery or the like.
  • the melt-processable fluororesin powder can be suitably used as a powder coating material.
  • a powder coating material made of the melt-processable fluororesin powder is applied to the base material, a film having a smooth surface can be obtained.
  • the melt-processable fluororesin powder having an average particle size of 1 ⁇ m or more and less than 100 ⁇ m is particularly suitable as a powder coating used for electrostatic coating, and the melt-processable fluororesin powder having an average particle size of 100 ⁇ m or more and 1000 ⁇ m or less is particularly suitable.
  • it is suitable as a powder coating material used for rotary coating or rotary molding.
  • the melt-processable fluororesin powder can be produced by a method of obtaining a powder by drying and pulverizing the melt-processable fluororesin obtained by the above-described production method of the present disclosure.
  • a production method for producing the melt-processable fluororesin powder is also one of the present disclosures.
  • thermoplastic elastomer when a thermoplastic elastomer is produced as the fluororubber, as disclosed in International Publication No. 00/01741, fluoropolymer fine particles are once synthesized at a high concentration, then diluted and further polymerized. Therefore, it is also possible to use a method capable of increasing the final polymerization rate as compared with the usual polymerization.
  • the polymerization temperature is usually ⁇ 20 to 200 ° C., preferably 5 to 150 ° C.
  • the polymerization pressure is usually 0. It is carried out at 5 to 10 MPaG, preferably 1 to 7 MPaG.
  • the pH in the polymerization medium is usually preferably maintained at 4.0 to 13 by a known method or the like, using a pH adjuster or the like described later.
  • Examples of the monomer used for the polymerization of fluororubber include fluoroethylene unsaturated monomers having at least the same number of fluorine atoms as carbon atoms and capable of copolymerizing with vinylidene fluoride, in addition to vinylidene fluoride.
  • Examples of the fluorine-containing ethylenically unsaturated monomer include trifluoropropene, pentafluoropropene, hexafluorobutene, and octafluorobutene. Among them, hexafluoropropene is particularly suitable because of the properties of the elastomer obtained when it blocks the crystal growth of the polymer.
  • fluorine-containing ethylenically unsaturated monomer examples include trifluoroethylene, TFE and CTFE, and a fluorine-containing monomer having one or more chlorine and / or bromine substituents may be used. it can. Perfluoro (alkyl vinyl ether), for example perfluoro (methyl vinyl ether), can also be used. TFE and HFP are preferred for producing fluororubber.
  • the above-mentioned surfactant can be used within the range of use in the production method of the present disclosure, but is usually added in an amount of 0.0001 to 20% by mass with respect to 100% by mass of the aqueous medium. To do. It is preferably 10% by mass or less, and more preferably 2% by mass or less.
  • the polymerization initiator is not particularly limited as long as it can generate radicals in the above polymerization temperature range, and a known oil-soluble and / or water-soluble polymerization initiator may be used. it can. Further, the polymerization can be started as a redox in combination with a reducing agent or the like. More preferably, the above-mentioned oil-soluble radical polymerization initiator, water-soluble radical polymerization initiator or redox initiator can be used as the polymerization initiator, and the redox initiator is particularly preferable. As the redox initiator, all the above-mentioned embodiments can be adopted.
  • Examples of the redox initiator include potassium permanganate / oxalic acid, potassium permanganate / ammonium oxalate, manganese triacetate / oxalic acid, manganese triacetate / ammonium oxalate, ammonium cerium nitrate / oxalic acid, ammonium cerium nitrate /. Examples include combinations such as ammonium oxalate.
  • the redox initiator aqueous solution means a 0.50% by mass aqueous solution of an oxidizing agent or a 0.50% by mass aqueous solution of a reducing agent. That is, the pH of at least one of the 0.50% by mass aqueous solution of the oxidizing agent and the 0.50% by mass aqueous solution of the reducing agent may be 4.0 or more, and the 0.50% by mass aqueous solution of the oxidizing agent. , And the pH of both the 0.50 mass% aqueous solution of the reducing agent is preferably 4.0 or more.
  • the pH of the redox initiator aqueous solution (0.50 mass% concentration aqueous solution of the oxidizing agent or 0.50 mass% concentration aqueous solution of the reducing agent) is more preferably 5.0 or more, and further preferably 5.5 or more, respectively. Preferably, 6.0 or more is particularly preferable.
  • the redox initiator is particularly preferably a combination of a salt oxidizing agent and a salt reducing agent.
  • the oxidizing agent which is the salt is more preferably at least one selected from the group consisting of persulfate, permanganate, cerium (IV) salt and bromate, and even more preferably permanganate. Potassium permanganate is particularly preferred.
  • the reducing agent which is the salt is more preferably at least one selected from the group consisting of oxalate, malonic acid, succinate, glutarate and bromate, further preferably oxalate, and oxalate.
  • Ammonium oxalate is particularly preferred.
  • the redox initiator is at least selected from the group consisting of potassium permanganate / ammonium oxalate, potassium bromate / ammonium sulfite, manganese triacetate / ammonium oxalate, and ammonium cerium nitrate / ammonium oxalate.
  • the concentration of the polymerization initiator added is appropriately determined by the molecular weight of the target fluororubber and the polymerization reaction rate, but is 0.0001 to 10% by mass, preferably 0.01 to 100% by mass with respect to 100% by mass of the total amount of the monomers. Set to an amount of 5% by mass.
  • thermoplastic elastomer In the polymerization of the fluororubber, known ones can be used as the chain transfer agent, but hydrocarbons, esters, ethers, alcohols, ketones, chlorine compounds, carbonates and the like can be used, and the thermoplastic elastomer can be used. , Hydrocarbons, esters, ethers, alcohols, chlorine compounds, iodine compounds and the like can be used. Of these, acetone and isopropyl alcohol are preferable, and in the polymerization of the thermoplastic elastomer, isopentan, diethyl malonate and ethyl acetate are preferable from the viewpoint that the reaction rate does not easily decrease, and I (CF 2 ) 4 I, I (CF 2). ) 6 I, ICH 2 I and other diiodide compounds are preferable from the viewpoint that the polymer terminal can be iodide and can be used as a reactive polymer.
  • the amount of the chain transfer agent used is usually 0.5 ⁇ 10 -3 to 5 ⁇ 10 -3 mol%, preferably 1.0 ⁇ 10 -3 to 3.5 ⁇ 10 with respect to the total amount of the supplied monomers. It is preferably -3 mol%.
  • Paraffin wax or the like can be preferably used as the emulsion stabilizer in the polymerization of the fluororubber, and phosphate, sodium hydroxide, potassium hydroxide or the like can be preferably used as the pH adjuster in the polymerization of the thermoplastic elastomer. it can.
  • the fluororubber obtained by the production method of the present disclosure has a solid content concentration of 1.0 to 40% by mass and an average particle size of 0.03 to 1 ⁇ m, preferably 0.05 to 0.5 ⁇ m at the time when the polymerization is completed.
  • the number average molecular weight is 1,000 to 2,000,000.
  • the fluororubber obtained by the production method of the present disclosure can be made into a dispersion suitable for rubber molding by, if necessary, adding or concentrating a dispersion stabilizer such as a hydrocarbon-based surfactant. it can.
  • the dispersion is processed by adjusting the pH, coagulating, heating and the like. Each process is performed as follows.
  • the solidification is carried out by adding an alkaline earth metal salt.
  • alkaline earth metal salt examples include nitrates of calcium or magnesium, chlorates and acetates.
  • the pH adjustment and the coagulation may be performed first, but it is preferable to perform the pH adjustment first.
  • washing is performed with the same volume of water as the fluororubber to remove a small amount of impurities such as buffer solution and salt existing in the fluororubber, and drying is performed. Drying is usually carried out in a drying oven at a high temperature of about 70 to 200 ° C. while circulating air.
  • the fluororubber may be a partially fluororubber or a perfluororubber.
  • the partially fluorinated rubbers include vinylidene fluoride (VdF) -based fluorororubber, tetrafluoroethylene (TFE) / propylene (Pr) -based fluororubber, and tetrafluoroethylene (TFE) / propylene / vinylidene fluoride (VdF) -based fluororubber.
  • VdF vinylidene fluoride
  • TFE tetrafluoroethylene
  • Pr propylene
  • TFE tetrafluoroethylene
  • VdF vinylidene fluoride
  • HFP Ethylene / hexafluoropropylene
  • HFP ethylene / hexafluoropropylene
  • VdF vinylidene fluoride
  • TFE tetrafluoroethylene
  • at least one selected from the group consisting of vinylidene fluoride-based fluororubber and tetrafluoroethylene / propylene-based fluororubber is preferable.
  • the vinylidene fluoride-based fluororubber is preferably a copolymer composed of 45 to 85 mol% of vinylidene fluoride and 55 to 15 mol% of at least one other monomer copolymerizable with vinylidene fluoride. .. More preferably, it is a copolymer consisting of 50 to 80 mol% of vinylidene fluoride and 50 to 20 mol% of at least one other monomer copolymerizable with vinylidene fluoride.
  • Examples of at least one other monomer copolymerizable with the above vinylidene fluoride include tetrafluoroethylene [TFE], hexafluoropropylene [HFP], fluoroalkyl vinyl ether, chlorotrifluoroethylene [CTFE], trifluoroethylene, and tri.
  • Fluoropolymer represented by a monomer such as a monomer giving a cross-linking site; and a non-fluorinated monomer such as ethylene, propylene, and alkyl vinyl ether. These can be used alone or in any combination. Among these, it is preferable to use at least one selected from the group consisting of TFE, HFP, fluoroalkyl vinyl ether and CTFE. As the fluoroalkyl vinyl ether, a fluoromonomer represented by the general formula (160) is preferable.
  • vinylidene fluoride-based fluorororubber examples include VdF / HFP-based rubber, VdF / HFP / TFE-based rubber, VdF / CTFE-based rubber, VdF / CTFE / TFE-based rubber, and VDF / general formula (100).
  • CH 2 CFCF 3 It is more preferable that the copolymer is composed of 20 to 50 mol%.
  • the tetrafluoroethylene / propylene-based fluororubber is preferably a copolymer composed of 45 to 70 mol% of tetrafluoroethylene, 55 to 30 mol% of propylene, and 0 to 5 mol% of fluoromonomer that provides a crosslinked site. ..
  • the fluororubber may be a perfluoro rubber.
  • the perfluoro rubber include perfluoro rubber containing TFE, for example, a fluoromonomer copolymer represented by TFE / general formula (160), (130) or (140) and TFE / general formula (160), (130). ) Or (140), at least one selected from the group consisting of a fluoromonomer / a monomer copolymer giving a cross-linking site is preferable.
  • the composition is preferably 45 to 90/10 to 55 (mol%), more preferably 55 to 80/20 to 45, and even more preferably 55 to 55. It is 70 / 30-45.
  • a monomer copolymer giving a TFE / PMVE / cross-linking site it is preferably 45 to 89.9 / 10 to 54.9 / 0.01 to 4 (mol%), and more preferably 55 to 77. It is 9/20 to 49.9 / 0.1 to 3.5, and more preferably 55 to 69.8 / 30 to 44.8 / 0.2 to 3.
  • the fluoromonomer copolymer represented by the general formula (160), (130) or (140) having TFE / carbon number of 4 to 12 it is preferably 50 to 90/10 to 50 (mol%). , More preferably 60 to 88/12 to 40, and even more preferably 65 to 85/15 to 35.
  • perfluoro rubber examples include TFE / a fluoromonomer represented by the general formula (140) / a fluoromonomer copolymer giving a crosslinked site, TFE / a perfluorovinyl ether copolymer represented by the general formula (140), and TFE. / At least one selected from the group consisting of a fluoromonomer copolymer represented by the general formula (160) and a TFE / fluoromonomer represented by the general formula (160) / a monomer copolymer giving a cross-linking site. Is preferable.
  • perfluoro rubber examples include perfluoro rubbers described in International Publication No. 97/24381, Japanese Patent Publication No. 61-57324, Japanese Patent Publication No. 4-81608, Japanese Patent Publication No. 5-13961, and the like. Can be done.
  • the fluororubber is excellent in compression set at high temperature, and therefore has a glass transition temperature of ⁇ 70 ° C. or higher, more preferably ⁇ 60 ° C. or higher, and even more preferably ⁇ 50 ° C. or higher. .. Further, from the viewpoint of good cold resistance, it is preferably 5 ° C. or lower, more preferably 0 ° C. or lower, and even more preferably -3 ° C. or lower.
  • the glass transition temperature is determined by using a differential scanning calorimeter (DSC822e, manufactured by METTLER TOLEDO) to raise the temperature of 10 mg of the sample at 10 ° C./min to obtain a DSC curve, which is the base before and after the secondary transition of the DSC curve. It can be obtained as the temperature indicating the midpoint of the intersection of the extension line of the line and the tangent line at the turning point of the DSC curve.
  • DSC822e differential scanning calorimeter
  • the fluororubber preferably has a Mooney viscosity ML (1 + 20) at 170 ° C. of 30 or more, more preferably 40 or more, and even more preferably 50 or more. Further, in terms of good workability, it is preferably 150 or less, more preferably 120 or less, and further preferably 110 or less.
  • the fluororubber preferably has a Mooney viscosity ML (1 + 20) at 140 ° C. of 30 or more, more preferably 40 or more, and even more preferably 50 or more. Further, in terms of good workability, it is preferably 180 or less, more preferably 150 or less, and further preferably 110 or less.
  • the fluororubber preferably has a Mooney viscosity ML (1 + 10) at 100 ° C. of 10 or more, more preferably 20 or more, and even more preferably 30 or more. Further, in terms of good workability, it is preferably 120 or less, more preferably 100 or less, and further preferably 80 or less.
  • the Mooney viscosity can be measured according to JIS K6300 at 170 ° C., 140 ° C., or 100 ° C. using a Mooney viscometer MV2000E manufactured by ALPHA TECHNOLOGIES.
  • the fluorororubber obtained by the production method of the present disclosure may be in any form as long as it is obtained from the above polymerization, and may be an aqueous dispersion after polymerization, or an aqueous dispersion after polymerization. It can also be used as a gum or a polymerization obtained by coagulation, drying or the like by a conventionally known method.
  • the hydrocarbon-based surfactant used in the production method of the present disclosure can improve the stability of the aqueous dispersion, and as described above, an initiator such as an organic peroxide, an iodine or a bromine compound can be used during the polymerization. It is more preferably used in a polymerization method for adding a poorly water-soluble substance such as a chain transfer agent.
  • the gum is a small granular mass made of fluororubber, and the crumb is a result of the fluororubber being unable to maintain a small granular shape as a gum at room temperature and being fused to each other. It is in the form of an amorphous mass.
  • the fluororubber can be processed into a fluororubber composition by adding a curing agent, a filler and the like.
  • curing agent examples include polyols, polyamines, organic peroxides, organic tins, bis (aminophenol) tetraamines, bis (thioaminophenol) and the like.
  • the fluororubber composition is made of the above-mentioned fluororubber, it is excellent in that it does not substantially contain an emulsifier and is easily crosslinked during molding.
  • a fluororubber molded product can be obtained by molding using the above-mentioned fluororubber.
  • the molding process is not particularly limited, and examples thereof include known methods using the above-mentioned curing agent.
  • the fluororubber molded product is suitable as a seal, gasket, electric wire coating, hose, tube, laminate, accessory, etc., and is particularly suitable for parts for semiconductor manufacturing equipment, automobile parts, and the like.
  • a fluororesin is preferable, among which the above-mentioned fluororesin having a fluorine substitution rate of 50% or more is more preferable, and the above-mentioned fluororesin having a fluorine substitution rate of more than 50% is even more preferable.
  • a fluororesin having a fluorine substitution rate of 55% or more is even more preferable
  • a fluororesin having a fluorine substitution rate of 60% or more is even more preferable
  • a fluororesin having a fluorine substitution rate of 75% or more is even more preferable.
  • a fluororesin having a fluorine substitution rate of 80% or more is particularly preferable, and a fluororesin having a fluorine substitution rate of 90 to 100%, that is, a perfluoro resin is most preferable.
  • a fluororesin having a fluorine substitution rate of 95 to 100% is more preferable, PTFE, FEP, and PFA are more preferable, PTFE is particularly preferable, and high molecular weight PTFE is particularly preferable.
  • the present disclosure also comprises polytetrafluoroethylene and at least one atom selected from the group consisting of manganese, bromine and cerium, and is substantially free of fluorine-containing surfactants. Provide things.
  • TFE is polymerized in the presence of a hydrocarbon-based surfactant and substantially in the absence of a fluorine-containing surfactant, and a redox initiator is used as a polymerization initiator to initiate redox.
  • a redox initiator is used as a polymerization initiator to initiate redox. It can be obtained by using a compound containing manganese, cerium or bromate such as permanganate, permanganate, manganese triacetate, cerium salt, bromate or bromate as the oxidizing agent of the agent.
  • the PTFE composition of the present disclosure is more preferably obtained by using a compound containing manganese or bromine such as permanganate or bromate as the oxidizing agent of the redox initiator, and the permanganate is more preferable. Those obtained by using a compound containing manganese such as are more preferable.
  • the PTFE composition of the present disclosure at least one atom selected from the group consisting of manganese, bromine and cerium is preferably manganese.
  • the PTFE composition of the present disclosure contains PTFE and manganese, and substantially does not contain a fluorine-containing surfactant.
  • the PTFE composition of the present disclosure preferably has a total content of manganese, bromine and cerium of 0.10% by mass or less. It is more preferably 0.05% by mass or less, and even more preferably 0.03% by mass or less.
  • the lower limit of the total content is not particularly limited, but may be, for example, 0.0001% by mass or more.
  • at least one atom selected from the group consisting of manganese, bromine and cerium is preferably manganese.
  • the content of manganese, bromine and cerium in the PTFE composition of the present disclosure is determined by, for example, inductively coupled plasma for the solution obtained by dissolving the residue obtained by thermally decomposing the PTFE composition at 600 ° C. in hydrochloric acid. It can be measured by mass spectrometry (ICP-MS) or inductively coupled plasma emission spectroscopy (ICP-AES).
  • the PTFE composition of the present disclosure also preferably has a manganese content of 0.10% by mass or less. It is more preferably 0.05% by mass or less, and even more preferably 0.03% by mass or less.
  • the lower limit of the content is not particularly limited, but may be, for example, 0.0001% by mass or more.
  • PTFE in the PTFE composition of the present disclosure all the characteristics of PTFE described in the above-mentioned production method of the present disclosure can be adopted.
  • high molecular weight PTFE is preferable.
  • the PTFE has non-melt processability.
  • the non-melt processability means a property that the melt flow rate cannot be measured at a temperature higher than the crystallization melting point in accordance with ASTM D 1238.
  • the above-mentioned PTFE has fibrillation property.
  • the fact that PTFE has fibrillation property can be determined by whether or not paste extrusion is possible as described above. Therefore, the PTFE is preferably paste extrudable.
  • the PTFE is obtained by emulsion polymerization.
  • the PTFE powder obtained by emulsion polymerization is generally referred to as PTFE fine powder.
  • the average primary particle size of the PTFE is preferably 1000 nm or less, more preferably 500 nm or less, further preferably 400 nm or less, and particularly preferably 350 nm or less. preferable.
  • the lower limit of the average primary particle diameter is not particularly limited, but may be, for example, 50 nm or 100 nm. From the viewpoint of molecular weight, for example, in the case of high molecular weight PTFE, it is preferably 100 nm or more, and more preferably 150 nm or more.
  • the average primary particle size can be measured by a dynamic light scattering method.
  • the average primary particle size was adjusted to a solid content concentration of about 1.0% by mass to prepare a PTFE aqueous dispersion, and the dynamic light scattering method was used to make the solvent (water) a refractive index of 1.
  • the viscosity of 3328 and the solvent (water) is 0.8878 mPa ⁇ s, and can be measured 70 times in total.
  • the dynamic light scattering method for example, ELSZ-1000S (manufactured by Otsuka Electronics Co., Ltd.) can be used.
  • Such PTFE can be obtained by emulsion polymerization and is distinguished from PTFE obtained by suspension polymerization.
  • the PTFE is preferably a modified PTFE containing 99.0% by mass or more of a TFE-based polymerization unit and 1.0% by mass or less of a modified monomer-based polymerization unit.
  • the modified monomer preferably contains at least one selected from the group consisting of hexafluoropropylene, perfluoro (alkyl vinyl ether) and (perfluoroalkyl) ethylene from the viewpoint of reactivity with TFE.
  • hexafluoropropylene More preferably, it is selected from the group consisting of hexafluoropropylene, perfluoro (methyl vinyl ether), perfluoro (propyl vinyl ether), (perfluorobutyl) ethylene, (perfluorohexyl) ethylene, and (perfluorooctyl) ethylene. At least one of them is included.
  • the total amount of the hexafluoropropylene unit, the perfluoro (alkyl vinyl ether) unit and the (perfluoroalkyl) ethylene unit is preferably in the range of 0.00001 to 1% by mass with respect to PTFE. As the lower limit of the total amount, 0.0001% by mass is more preferable, and 0.001% by mass is further preferable.
  • 0.50% by mass is more preferable, 0.40% by mass is further preferable, 0.30% by mass is further more preferable, 0.10% by mass is particularly preferable, and 0.05% by mass is particularly preferable. , 0.01% by mass is most preferable.
  • the PTFE composition of the present disclosure preferably has a total content of PTFE and at least one selected from the group consisting of manganese, bromine and cerium in an amount of 99.0% by mass or more, preferably 99.5% by mass.
  • the above is more preferable, and 99.9% by mass or more is further preferable, and it may be substantially 100.0% by mass.
  • substantially 100.0% by mass means that the components other than PTFE, manganese, bromine and cerium are 1 ppm or less.
  • the stretched bead produced under the following condition (A) by heat treatment at a temperature of 240 ° C. has a breaking strength of 29.0 N or more measured under the following condition (X), and is substantially a fluorine-containing surfactant.
  • a PTFE powder hereinafter, also referred to as “the first PTFE powder of the present disclosure”
  • the lubricating resin is paste-extruded through an orifice (diameter 2.5 mm, land length 11 mm, introduction angle 30 °) at a reduction ratio of 100: 1 at room temperature to obtain a uniform beading (extruded product).
  • the extrusion speed that is, the ram speed, is 20 inches / minute (51 cm / minute).
  • the PTFE extruded bead containing the lubricant obtained by the above paste extrusion is dried at 230 ° C. for 30 minutes, and the lubricant is removed from the bead to obtain a dried PTFE extruded bead.
  • the dried PTFE extruded beads are cut to an appropriate length, each end is fixed to a clamp so that the clamp interval is 1.5 inches (38 mm), and the temperature is raised to 300 ° C. in an air circulation furnace. Heat.
  • the clamp is separated at 1000% / sec until the separation distance corresponding to 2400% is reached, and a stretch test (stretch test) is performed to obtain a stretch bead.
  • This stretching method essentially follows the method disclosed in US Pat. No. 4,576,869, except that the extrusion speed (51 cm / min instead of 84 cm / min) is different. "Stretch" is an increase in length due to stretching and is usually expressed as a ratio to the original length.
  • the stretched bead (made by stretching the bead) was sandwiched and fixed by a movable jaw having a gauge length of 5.0 cm, and a tensile test was performed at a speed of 300 mm / min at 25 ° C. Let the strength of be the breaking strength.
  • the lubricant is composed of 100% isoparaffin hydrocarbon, initial distillation point 180 ° C., dry point 188 ° C., ignition point 54 ° C., density (15 ° C.) 0.758 g / cm 3 , KB (Kauri-butanol value) 26.
  • a lubricant having an aniline point of 85 ° C. and an aromatic content ⁇ 0.01% by mass can be used, and specifically, Exxon's Isopar H (registered trademark) can be used as such a lubricant. ..
  • the breaking strength measured under the condition (X) of the stretched bead (stretched body) produced under the condition (A) after heat treatment at a temperature of 240 ° C. is 29.0 N or more, and the thermal instability index (TII). ) Is 20 or more, and a PTFE powder (hereinafter, also referred to as “second PTFE powder of the present disclosure”) is provided.
  • the first and second PTFE powders of the present disclosure have a breaking strength of 29.0 N or more measured under the condition (X) of the stretched bead (stretched body) produced under the condition (A).
  • the breaking strength is more preferably 30.0 N or more, further preferably 32.0 N or more, and even more preferably 35.0 N or more.
  • the higher the breaking strength, the better the upper limit of the breaking strength is not limited, but for example, it may be 80.0 N or less, and may be 50.0 N or less.
  • the breaking strength is a value obtained by the following method.
  • the stretched body produced under the condition (A) was sandwiched and fixed by a movable jaw having a gauge length of 5.0 cm, and a tensile test was performed at a speed of 300 mm / min at 25 ° C.
  • the strength at time is defined as the breaking strength.
  • the breaking strength measured under the condition (X) of the stretched bead produced under the following condition (B) after heat treatment at a temperature of 240 ° C. is 22.0 N or more, and a substantially fluorine-containing surfactant is used.
  • a polytetrafluoroethylene powder that is not contained hereinafter, also referred to as “the third PTFE powder of the present disclosure”.
  • the lubricating resin is paste-extruded through an orifice (diameter 2.5 mm, land length 11 mm, introduction angle 30 °) at a reduction ratio of 100: 1 at room temperature to obtain a uniform beading (extruded product).
  • the extrusion speed that is, the ram speed, is 20 inches / minute (51 cm / minute).
  • the PTFE extruded bead containing the lubricant obtained by the above paste extrusion is dried at 230 ° C. for 30 minutes, and the lubricant is removed from the bead to obtain a dried PTFE extruded bead.
  • the dried PTFE extruded beads are cut to an appropriate length, each end is fixed to a clamp so that the clamp interval is 2.0 inches (51 mm), and the temperature is raised to 300 ° C. in an air circulation furnace. Heat.
  • the clamps are then separated at 100% / sec until a separation distance corresponding to 2400% is achieved and a stretch test is performed to obtain stretch beads.
  • This stretching method essentially follows the method disclosed in US Pat. No. 4,576,869, except that the extrusion speed (51 cm / min instead of 84 cm / min) is different. "Stretch" is an increase in length due to stretching and is usually expressed as a ratio to the original length.
  • the stretched bead (made by stretching the bead) was sandwiched and fixed by a movable jaw having a gauge length of 5.0 cm, and a tensile test was performed at a speed of 300 mm / min at 25 ° C. Let the strength of be the breaking strength.
  • the lubricant is composed of 100% isoparaffin hydrocarbon, initial distillation point 180 ° C., dry point 188 ° C., ignition point 54 ° C., density (15 ° C.) 0.758 g / cm 3 , KB (Kauri-butanol value) 26.
  • a lubricant having an aniline point of 85 ° C. and an aromatic content ⁇ 0.01% by mass can be used, and specifically, Exxon's Isopar H (registered trademark) can be used as such a lubricant. ..
  • the present disclosure is further characterized in that the stretched product prepared under the condition (B) by heat treatment at a temperature of 240 ° C. has a breaking strength of 22.0 N or more and a thermal instability index (TII) of 20 or more.
  • PTFE powder hereinafter, also referred to as "fourth PTFE powder of the present disclosure”).
  • the third and fourth PTFE powders of the present disclosure have a breaking strength of 22.0 N or more measured under the condition (X) of the stretched bead (stretched body) produced under the condition (B).
  • the breaking strength is more preferably 23.0 N or more, further preferably 25.0 N or more, further preferably 28.0 N or more, and particularly preferably 30.0 N or more.
  • the higher the breaking strength, the better the upper limit of the breaking strength is not limited, but for example, it may be 80.0 N or less, and may be 50.0 N or less.
  • the first to fourth PTFE powders of the present disclosure preferably have a PTFE content of 99.0% by mass or more and a component other than PTFE in an amount of 1.0% by mass or less, based on the total solid content. More preferably, it is 99.5% by mass or more and the component other than PTFE is 0.5% by mass or less, and the PTFE is 99.9% by mass or more and the component other than PTFE is 0.1% by mass or less. It is more preferable that the PTFE is substantially 100.0% by mass.
  • the first to fourth PTFE powders of the present disclosure may be wet powders and may contain 0.0001 to 50% by weight of an aqueous medium.
  • the amount of the aqueous medium may be 0.0001 to 1.0% by mass and may be 0.0001 to 0.01% by mass.
  • the amount of the aqueous medium can be determined by weight loss when dried at 150 ° C. for 60 minutes.
  • the heat treatment is performed at 240 ° C. More specifically, it is carried out under the conditions of 240 ° C. and 18 hours.
  • the heat treatment may be for drying the first to fourth PTFE powders of the present disclosure.
  • the first to fourth PTFE powders of the present disclosure are wet powders of PTFE, the moisture contained in the wet powders may be dried.
  • the stretched product is prepared under the above conditions (A) or (B).
  • the first to fourth PTFE powders of the present disclosure can be obtained by the production method of the present disclosure. Since the production method of the present disclosure can produce high-molecular-weight PTFE in the presence of a hydrocarbon-based surfactant even in the absence of a fluorine-containing surfactant, the above-mentioned breaking strength It is possible to obtain a PTFE powder that does not substantially contain a hydrocarbon-based surfactant while satisfying the above. Further, the instability index (TII) can be set to 20 or more by polymerizing in the presence of a hydrocarbon-based surfactant.
  • TII instability index
  • the extrusion pressure is 50.0 MPa or less
  • the breaking strength measured under the condition (X) of the stretched bead (stretched body) produced under the condition (A) is 29.0 N or more, which is substantially included.
  • a polytetrafluoroethylene powder hereinafter, also referred to as “fifth PTFE powder of the present disclosure”
  • the thermal instability index (TII) may be 20 or more.
  • Such PTFE can be obtained by using a hydrocarbon-based surfactant.
  • the above TII is measured according to ASTM D 4895-89.
  • the extrusion pressure is 50.0 MPa or less
  • the breaking strength measured under the condition (X) of the stretched bead (stretched body) produced under the condition (A) is 29.0 N or more
  • the thermal instability index is provided.
  • a polytetrafluoroethylene powder having (TII) of 20 or more hereinafter, also referred to as “the sixth PTFE powder of the present disclosure”.
  • the sixth PTFE powder of the present disclosure is substantially free of a fluorine-containing surfactant.
  • the 5th and 6th PTFE powders of the present disclosure preferably have a breaking strength of 29.0 N or more measured under the condition (X) of the stretched bead (stretched body) produced under the condition (A).
  • the breaking strength is more preferably 30.0 N or more, further preferably 32.0 N or more, and even more preferably 35.0 N or more. The higher the breaking strength, the better, but the upper limit of the breaking strength is, for example, 80.0N.
  • the 5th and 6th PTFE powders of the present disclosure preferably have a breaking strength of 22.0N or more measured under the condition (X) of the stretched bead (stretched body) produced under the condition (B).
  • the breaking strength is more preferably 23.0 N or more, further preferably 25.0 N or more, further preferably 28.0 N or more, and particularly preferably 30.0 N or more.
  • the higher the breaking strength, the better the upper limit of the breaking strength is not limited, but for example, it may be 80.0 N or less, and may be 50.0 N or less.
  • the stretched bead (stretched body) produced under the above condition (A) has a breaking strength of 34.0 N or more measured under the condition (X) and substantially does not contain a fluorine-containing surfactant.
  • a characteristic polytetrafluoroethylene powder hereinafter, also referred to as “7th PTFE powder of the present disclosure”.
  • the thermal instability index (TII) may be 20 or more.
  • Such PTFE can be obtained by using a hydrocarbon-based surfactant.
  • the above TII is measured according to ASTM D 4895-89.
  • the breaking strength measured under the condition (X) of the stretched bead (stretched body) produced under the above condition (A) is 34.0 N or more, and the thermal instability index (TII) is 20 or more.
  • a polytetrafluoroethylene powder hereinafter, also referred to as “8th PTFE powder of the present disclosure”.
  • the eighth PTFE powder of the present disclosure is substantially free of a fluorine-containing surfactant.
  • the stretched bead (stretched body) produced under the above condition (B) has a breaking strength of 29.0 N or more measured under the condition (X) and substantially does not contain a fluorine-containing surfactant.
  • a characteristic polytetrafluoroethylene powder hereinafter, also referred to as “9th PTFE powder of the present disclosure”.
  • the thermal instability index (TII) may be 20 or more.
  • Such PTFE can be obtained by using a hydrocarbon-based surfactant.
  • the above TII is measured according to ASTM D 4895-89.
  • the breaking strength measured under the condition (X) of the stretched bead (stretched body) produced under the above condition (B) is 29.0 N or more, and the thermal instability index (TII) is 20 or more.
  • a polytetrafluoroethylene powder hereinafter, also referred to as “10th PTFE powder of the present disclosure”.
  • the tenth PTFE powder of the present disclosure is substantially free of a fluorine-containing surfactant.
  • the 7th to 10th PTFE powders of the present disclosure preferably have a breaking strength of 34.0 N or more measured under the condition (X) of the stretched bead (stretched body) produced under the condition (A).
  • the breaking strength is more preferably 35.0 N or more, further preferably 37.0 N or more, and even more preferably 40.0 N or more. The higher the breaking strength, the better, but the upper limit of the breaking strength is, for example, 100.0 N.
  • the 7th to 10th PTFE powders of the present disclosure preferably have a breaking strength of 29.0 N or more measured under the condition (X) of the stretched bead (stretched body) produced under the condition (B).
  • the breaking strength is more preferably 30.0 N or more, further preferably 32.0 N or more, and even more preferably 35.0 N or more.
  • the higher the breaking strength, the better the upper limit of the breaking strength is not limited, but for example, it may be 100.0 N or less, and may be 80.0 N or less.
  • the 5th to 10th PTFE powders of the present disclosure contain PTFE.
  • PTFE all the configurations of PTFE described in the manufacturing method of the present disclosure can be adopted.
  • the 5th to 10th PTFE powders of the present disclosure preferably have a PTFE content of 99.0% by mass or more, a component other than PTFE of 1.0% by mass or less, and a PTFE content of 99.5% by mass or more.
  • the component other than PTFE is more preferably 0.5% by mass or less, the PTFE is 99.9% by mass or more, and the component other than PTFE is more preferably 0.1% by mass or less, and the PTFE is It is particularly preferable that the content is substantially 100.0% by mass.
  • the 5th to 10th PTFE powders of the present disclosure can be obtained by the production method of the present disclosure. Since the production method of the present disclosure can produce high-molecular-weight PTFE in the presence of a hydrocarbon-based surfactant even in the absence of a fluorine-containing surfactant, the above-mentioned breaking strength It is possible to obtain a PTFE powder that does not substantially contain a hydrocarbon-based surfactant while satisfying the above. Further, the instability index (TII) can be set to 20 or more by polymerizing in the presence of a hydrocarbon-based surfactant.
  • TII instability index
  • the 1st to 10th PTFE powders of the present disclosure may have a thermal instability index (TII) of 25 or more, 30 or more, 35 or more, and 40 or more.
  • TII thermal instability index
  • the 1st to 10th PTFE powders of the present disclosure preferably have an extrusion pressure of 50.0 MPa or less, more preferably 40.0 MPa or less, preferably 8.0 MPa or more, and 10.0 MPa or more. Is more preferable.
  • the extrusion pressure is a value obtained by the following method according to the method described in JP-A-2002-201217.
  • a lubricant trade name: Isopar H (registered trademark), manufactured by Exxon Co., Ltd.
  • the glass bottle is then left at room temperature (25 ° C.) for at least 1 hour prior to extrusion to obtain a lubricating resin.
  • the lubricating resin is paste-extruded through an orifice (diameter 2.5 mm, land length 11 mm, introduction angle 30 °) at a reduction ratio of 100: 1 at room temperature to obtain a uniform beading (extruded product).
  • the extrusion speed that is, the ram speed, is 20 inches / minute (51 cm / minute).
  • the extrusion pressure is a value obtained by measuring the load when the extrusion load is in equilibrium in paste extrusion and dividing by the cross-sectional area of the cylinder used for paste extrusion.
  • the PTFE powders 1 to 10 of the present disclosure are preferably stretchable.
  • stretchable is determined based on the following criteria. To 100 g of PTFE powder, 21.7 g of a lubricant (trade name: Isopar H (registered trademark), manufactured by Exxon Co., Ltd.) is added, and the mixture is mixed in a glass bottle at room temperature for 3 minutes. The glass bottle is then left at room temperature (25 ° C.) for at least 1 hour prior to extrusion to obtain a lubricating resin.
  • a lubricant trade name: Isopar H (registered trademark), manufactured by Exxon Co., Ltd.
  • the lubricating resin is paste-extruded through an orifice (diameter 2.5 mm, land length 11 mm, introduction angle 30 °) at a reduction ratio of 100: 1 at room temperature to obtain a uniform bead.
  • the extrusion speed that is, the ram speed, is 20 inches / minute (51 cm / minute).
  • the lubricant is removed from the beads by heating the beads obtained by paste extrusion at 230 ° C. for 30 minutes.
  • the beads (extruded parts) are cut to an appropriate length, each end is fixed to the clamp so that the clamp interval is 1.5 inches (38 mm), and the temperature is raised to 300 ° C. in an air circulation furnace. Heat.
  • the clamp is then released at the desired speed (stretch speed) until the separation distance corresponds to the desired stretch (total stretch) and a stretch test is performed.
  • This stretching method essentially follows the method disclosed in US Pat. No. 4,576,869, except that the extrusion speed (51 cm / min instead of 84 cm / min) is different.
  • "Stretch" is an increase in length due to stretching and is usually expressed as a ratio to the original length. In the production method, the stretch rate is 1000% / sec and the total stretch is 2400%. This means that a stretched bead with a uniform appearance can be obtained without cutting in this stretch test.
  • the first to tenth PTFE powders of the present disclosure preferably have a stress relaxation time of 50 seconds or more, more preferably 80 seconds or more, further preferably 100 seconds or more, and 120 seconds or more. Is particularly preferred.
  • the stress relaxation time is a value measured by the following method. Both ends of the stretched body (stretched bead) produced under the above condition (A) are connected to a fixture to prepare a taut 8 inch (20 cm) long bead sample. Keep the oven at 390 ° C. and insert the fixture into the oven through the (covered) slit on the side of the oven. The time required from the time of insertion into the oven until the bead sample breaks is defined as the stress relaxation time.
  • the 1st to 10th PTFE powders of the present disclosure may have a 0.1% mass reduction temperature of 400 ° C. or lower.
  • the PTFE powder having a 0.1% mass reduction temperature of 400 ° C. or lower can be obtained by using a hydrocarbon-based surfactant.
  • the 0.1% mass reduction temperature is a value measured by the following method. Approximately 10 mg of PTFE powder that has not been heated to a temperature of 300 ° C. or higher is precisely weighed, stored in a dedicated aluminum pan, and measured using a TG / DTA (differential thermal weight simultaneous measuring device).
  • the 0.1% mass reduction temperature is the temperature corresponding to the point where the weight of the aluminum pan is reduced by 0.1 mass% by raising the temperature of the aluminum pan under the condition of 10 ° C./min in the temperature range from 25 ° C. to 600 ° C. in the air atmosphere. And said.
  • the 1st to 10th PTFE powders of the present disclosure may have a 1.0% mass loss temperature of 492 ° C. or lower.
  • PTFE having a 1.0% mass reduction temperature of 492 ° C. or lower can be obtained by using a hydrocarbon-based surfactant.
  • the 1.0% mass reduction temperature is a value measured by the following method. Approximately 10 mg of PTFE powder that has not been heated to a temperature of 300 ° C. or higher is precisely weighed, stored in a dedicated aluminum pan, and measured using a TG / DTA (differential thermal weight simultaneous measuring device).
  • the 1.0% mass reduction temperature is the temperature corresponding to the point where the weight of the aluminum pan is reduced by 1.0 mass% by raising the temperature of the aluminum pan under the condition of 10 ° C./min in the temperature range from 25 ° C. to 600 ° C. in the air atmosphere. And said.
  • the 1st to 10th PTFE powders of the present disclosure preferably have an average particle size (average secondary particle size) of 100 to 2000 ⁇ m.
  • the lower limit of the average secondary particle diameter is more preferably 200 ⁇ m or more, and further preferably 300 ⁇ m or more.
  • the upper limit of the average secondary particle size is preferably 1000 ⁇ m or less, more preferably 800 ⁇ m or less, and particularly preferably 700 ⁇ m or less.
  • the average particle size is a value measured in accordance with JIS K 6891.
  • the modified PTFE contains 99.0% by mass or more of a polymerization unit based on TFE and 1.0% by mass or less of a polymerization unit based on a modified monomer.
  • the modified monomer preferably contains at least one selected from the group consisting of hexafluoropropylene, perfluoro (alkyl vinyl ether) and (perfluoroalkyl) ethylene from the viewpoint of reactivity with TFE.
  • hexafluoropropylene More preferably, it is selected from the group consisting of hexafluoropropylene, perfluoro (methyl vinyl ether), perfluoro (propyl vinyl ether), (perfluorobutyl) ethylene, (perfluorohexyl) ethylene, and (perfluorooctyl) ethylene. At least one of them is included.
  • the total amount of the hexafluoropropylene unit, the perfluoro (alkyl vinyl ether) unit and the (perfluoroalkyl) ethylene unit is preferably in the range of 0.00001 to 1% by mass with respect to PTFE.
  • the lower limit of the total amount is more preferably 0.0001% by mass, further preferably 0.001% by mass, and the upper limit is more preferably 0.50% by mass, further preferably 0.40% by mass, and 0. 30% by mass is even more preferable, 0.10% by mass is particularly preferable, 0.05% by mass is particularly preferable, and 0.01% by mass is most preferable.
  • the thermal instability index (TII), the stretchable criterion, the extrusion pressure, the stress relaxation time, the 0.1% mass reduction temperature, and the 1.0% mass reduction temperature , Elastic modulus, average particle size (average secondary particle size), etc. are evaluated using PTFE powder obtained by heat treatment (drying) at 240 ° C.
  • substantially free of a fluorine-containing surfactant means that the amount of the fluorine-containing surfactant is 10 ppm or less with respect to PTFE.
  • the content of the fluorine-containing surfactant is preferably 1 ppm or less, more preferably 100 ppb or less, still more preferably 10 ppb or less, still more preferably 1 ppb or less, and particularly preferably liquid chromatography.
  • the fluorine-containing surfactant as measured by mass spectrometry (LC / MS / MS) is below the detection limit.
  • the amount of the fluorine-containing surfactant can be quantified by a known method.
  • the obtained powder is extracted with an organic solvent of methanol, the molecular weight information of the extract is extracted from the LC / MS / MS spectrum, and the agreement with the structural formula of the candidate surfactant is confirmed. Then, an aqueous solution having a concentration of 5 levels or higher is prepared for the confirmed surfactant, and LC / MS / MS analysis for each concentration is performed to prepare a calibration curve with the area area.
  • the obtained powder can be quantitatively measured by performing Soxhlet extraction with methanol and performing LC / MS / MS analysis on the extract.
  • the content of the fluorine-containing surfactant can be quantified by, for example, LC / MS / MS analysis.
  • the obtained powder is added to methanol, extraction is performed, and the obtained extract is subjected to LC / MS / MS analysis.
  • treatment by Soxhlet extraction, ultrasonic treatment or the like may be performed.
  • Molecular weight information is extracted from the obtained LC / MS / MS spectrum, and agreement with the structural formula of the candidate fluorine-containing surfactant is confirmed.
  • an aqueous solution having a content of 5 levels or more of the confirmed fluorine-containing surfactant was prepared, and LC / MS / MS analysis was performed on the aqueous solution having each content, and the content and the area area with respect to the content were determined. Plot the relationship and draw a calibration curve. Then, using the calibration curve, the area area of the LC / MS / MS chromatogram of the fluorine-containing surfactant in the extract can be converted into the content of the fluorine-containing surfactant.
  • the fluorine-containing surfactant is the same as that exemplified in the above-mentioned production method.
  • it may be a surfactant containing fluorine atoms having a total carbon number of 20 or less in the portion excluding the anionic group, or it may be a surfactant containing fluorine having a molecular weight of 800 or less in the anionic portion, and LogPOW may be used. It may be a fluorine-containing surfactant of 3.5 or less.
  • the anionic fluorine-containing surfactant include compounds represented by the above general formula (N 0 ), and specifically, compounds represented by the general formula (N 1 ) and general formula (N 2 ). Examples thereof include a compound represented by the general formula (N 3 ), a compound represented by the general formula (N 4 ), and a compound represented by the general formula (N 5 ).
  • perfluorocarboxylic acid (I) represented by the general formula (I), the ⁇ -H perfluorocarboxylic acid (II) represented by the general formula (II), and the general formula (III) are represented.
  • the present disclosure also comprises a polytetrafluoroethylene stretched product having a breaking strength of 29.0 N or more and substantially free of a fluorine-containing surfactant (hereinafter, “the first PTFE stretched product of the present disclosure”). Also called).
  • the first PTFE stretched product of the present disclosure may have a thermal instability index (TII) of 20 or more.
  • TII thermal instability index
  • Such a PTFE stretched product can be obtained by using a hydrocarbon-based surfactant.
  • the above TII is measured according to ASTM D 4895-89.
  • the present disclosure further describes a polytetrafluoroethylene stretched product "second PTFE stretched product of the present disclosure” characterized by a breaking strength of 29.0 N or more and a thermal instability index (TII) of 20 or more. provide.
  • second PTFE stretched product of the present disclosure characterized by a breaking strength of 29.0 N or more and a thermal instability index (TII) of 20 or more.
  • the second PTFE stretched product of the present disclosure is substantially free of a fluorine-containing surfactant.
  • the first and second PTFE stretched bodies of the present disclosure include PTFE.
  • PTFE all the configurations of PTFE described in the manufacturing method of the present disclosure can be adopted.
  • PTFE in the first and second PTFE stretched bodies of the present disclosure all the characteristics of PTFE described in the above-mentioned production method of the present disclosure can be adopted.
  • high molecular weight PTFE is preferable.
  • the modified PTFE contains 99.0% by mass or more of a polymerization unit based on TFE and 1.0% by mass or less of a polymerization unit based on a modified monomer.
  • the modified monomer preferably contains at least one selected from the group consisting of hexafluoropropylene, perfluoro (alkyl vinyl ether) and (perfluoroalkyl) ethylene from the viewpoint of reactivity with TFE. More preferably, it is selected from the group consisting of hexafluoropropylene, perfluoro (methyl vinyl ether), perfluoro (propyl vinyl ether), (perfluorobutyl) ethylene, (perfluorohexyl) ethylene, and (perfluorooctyl) ethylene. At least one of them is included.
  • the total amount of the hexafluoropropylene unit, the perfluoro (alkyl vinyl ether) unit and the (perfluoroalkyl) ethylene unit is preferably in the range of 0.00001 to 1% by mass with respect to PTFE.
  • 0.0001% by mass is more preferable, and 0.001% by mass is further preferable.
  • 0.50% by mass is more preferable, 0.40% by mass is further preferable, 0.30% by mass is further more preferable, 0.10% by mass is particularly preferable, and 0.05% by mass is particularly preferable.
  • 0.01% by mass is most preferable.
  • the first and second PTFE stretched products of the present disclosure preferably have a PTFE of 99.0% by mass or more, a component other than PTFE of 1.0% by mass or less, and a PTFE of 99.5% by mass or more. It is more preferable that the component other than PTFE is 0.5% by mass or less, the PTFE is 99.9% by mass or more, and the component other than PTFE is 0.1% by mass or less, further preferably PTFE. Is particularly preferably 100.0% by mass.
  • substantially free of a fluorine-containing surfactant means that the amount of the fluorine-containing surfactant is 10 ppm or less with respect to PTFE.
  • the content of the fluorine-containing surfactant is preferably 1 ppm or less, more preferably 100 ppb or less, still more preferably 10 ppb or less, still more preferably 1 ppb or less, and particularly preferably liquid chromatography.
  • the fluorine-containing surfactant as measured by mass spectrometry (LC / MS / MS) is below the detection limit.
  • the amount of the fluorine-containing surfactant can be quantified by a known method.
  • the obtained finely divided stretched product is extracted with an organic solvent of methanol, and the molecular weight information of the extract is extracted from the LC / MS / MS spectrum, and the agreement with the structural formula of the candidate surfactant is confirmed. To do. Then, an aqueous solution having a concentration of 5 levels or higher is prepared for the confirmed surfactant, and LC / MS / MS analysis for each concentration is performed to prepare a calibration curve with the area area.
  • the obtained finely divided stretched product can be quantitatively measured by performing Soxhlet extraction with methanol and performing LC / MS analysis on the extract.
  • the content of the fluorine-containing surfactant can be quantified by, for example, LC / MS / MS analysis.
  • the obtained finely divided stretched product is added to methanol, extraction is performed, and the obtained extract is subjected to LC / MS / MS analysis.
  • treatment by Soxhlet extraction, ultrasonic treatment or the like may be performed.
  • Molecular weight information is extracted from the obtained LC / MS / MS spectrum, and agreement with the structural formula of the candidate fluorine-containing surfactant is confirmed.
  • an aqueous solution having a content of 5 levels or more of the confirmed fluorine-containing surfactant was prepared, and LC / MS / MS analysis was performed on the aqueous solution having each content, and the content and the area area with respect to the content were determined. Plot the relationship and draw a calibration curve. Then, using the calibration curve, the area area of the LC / MS / MS chromatogram of the fluorine-containing surfactant in the extract can be converted into the content of the fluorine-containing surfactant.
  • the fluorine-containing surfactant is the same as that exemplified in the above-described production method of the present disclosure.
  • it may be a surfactant containing fluorine atoms having a total carbon number of 20 or less in the portion excluding the anionic group, or it may be a surfactant containing fluorine having a molecular weight of 800 or less in the anionic portion, and LogPOW may be used. It may be a fluorine-containing surfactant of 3.5 or less.
  • the anionic fluorine-containing surfactant include compounds represented by the above general formula (N 0 ), and specifically, compounds represented by the general formula (N 1 ) and general formula (N 2 ). Examples thereof include a compound represented by the general formula (N 3 ), a compound represented by the general formula (N 4 ), and a compound represented by the general formula (N 5 ).
  • perfluorocarboxylic acid (I) represented by the general formula (I), the ⁇ -H perfluorocarboxylic acid (II) represented by the general formula (II), and the general formula (III) are represented.
  • the first and second PTFE stretched bodies of the present disclosure may have a thermal instability index (TII) of 25 or more, 30 or more, 35 or more, and 40 or more.
  • TII thermal instability index
  • the first and second PTFE stretched bodies of the present disclosure preferably have a breaking strength of 29.0 N or more.
  • the breaking strength is more preferably 30.0 N or more, further preferably 32.0 N or more, further preferably 35.0 N or more, and even more preferably 37.0 N or more. Even more preferably, it is 40.0 N or more.
  • the higher the breaking strength, the better, but the upper limit of the breaking strength may be, for example, 100.0 N or less, or 80.0 N.
  • the breaking strength is a value obtained by the following method.
  • the stretched body is sandwiched and fixed by a movable jaw having a gauge length of 5.0 cm, a tensile test is performed at a speed of 300 mm / min at 25 ° C., and the strength at which the stretched body breaks is defined as the breaking strength.
  • the stress relaxation time is preferably 50 seconds or more, more preferably 80 seconds or more, further preferably 100 seconds or more, and 110 seconds or more. It is even more preferable that there is 120 seconds or more.
  • the stress relaxation time is a value measured by the following method. Both ends of the stretched body are connected to a fixture to obtain a taut 8 inch (20 cm) bead sample. Keep the oven at 390 ° C. and insert the fixture into the oven through the (covered) slit on the side of the oven. The time required from the time of insertion into the oven until the bead sample breaks is defined as the stress relaxation time.
  • the first and second PTFE stretches of the present disclosure preferably have a peak temperature between 325 and 350 ° C. Further, the stretched product of the present disclosure preferably exists at a peak temperature of between 325 and 350 ° C. and between 360 and 390 ° C.
  • the peak temperature is a temperature corresponding to the maximum value in the heat of fusion curve when the stretched body is heated at a rate of 10 ° C./min using a differential scanning calorimeter [DSC].
  • first and second PTFE stretched bodies of the present disclosure have a shape of a film, a tube, a fiber, or a rod.
  • the first and second PTFE stretched bodies of the present disclosure preferably have a porosity in the range of 30% to 99%.
  • the porosity is preferably 60% or more, more preferably 70% or more. If the ratio of PTFE in the stretched body is too small, the strength of the stretched body may not be sufficient. Therefore, the porosity is preferably 98% or less, preferably 95% or less, and more preferably 90% or less.
  • the density ⁇ of the stretched body is determined by measuring the mass of a sample cut to a specific size with a precision balance and using the following formula from the mass and film thickness of the measured material. Calculate the density of the sample.
  • ⁇ M / (4.0 ⁇ 12.0 ⁇ t)
  • ⁇ Density (Membrane Density) (g / cm 3 )
  • M mass (g)
  • t film thickness (cm)
  • the above measurements and calculations are performed at three locations, and the average value thereof is taken as the film density.
  • a film thickness meter is used to stack five stretched bodies, measure the total film thickness, and divide the value by 5 to obtain one film thickness.
  • the density ⁇ of the stretched body is determined by measuring the mass of the sample cut to a certain length with a precision balance and using the following formula from the measured mass and outer diameter of the sample. Calculate the density.
  • ⁇ M / (r ⁇ r ⁇ ⁇ ) ⁇ L
  • ⁇ density (g / cm 3 )
  • M mass (g)
  • r radius (cm)
  • L length (cm)
  • ⁇ The outer diameter of the stretched body is measured using a laser displacement sensor. The radius is the value divided by two. The above measurements and calculations are performed at three locations, and the average value thereof is used as the density.
  • the PTFE stretched product of the present disclosure for example, the PTFE obtained by the production method of the present disclosure is paste-extruded and rolled, then unbaked or semi-baked, stretched in at least one direction (preferably roll-stretched in the rolling direction, and then rolled. It can be manufactured by stretching in the width direction with a tenter). As the stretching conditions, a speed of 5 to 1000% / sec and a stretching ratio of 500% or more are preferably adopted. By stretching, PTFE is easily fibrillated into a stretched body consisting of nodules and fibers.
  • pH value The pH value was 25 ° C., and the value measured by HORIBA pH / ION METER F-72 was adopted.
  • Solid content concentration of PTFE aqueous dispersion 1 g of PTFE aqueous dispersion (fluoropolymer aqueous dispersion) is dried in a blower dryer at 150 ° C. for 60 minutes, and the mass of the aqueous dispersion is increased. A value expressed as a percentage of the ratio of the mass of the heating residue to (1 g) was adopted.
  • the obtained PTFE aqueous dispersion was centrifuged using a high-speed centrifuge, and the obtained supernatant water was measured by a high-performance liquid chromatography (HPLC) analyzer. The content of ammonium laurate in the PTFE aqueous dispersion was determined.
  • the equipment used is as follows. High Performance Liquid Chromatography (HPLC) Analyzer Body: Waters Alliance Separation Module 2695 Detector: Waters2487 detector made by Waters
  • TTII Thermal instability index
  • HFP content was determined from the infrared absorbance measured by preparing a thin film disk by press molding the PTFE powder. It was determined by multiplying 0.3 to the ratio of the absorbance at the absorbance / 935cm -1 in 982 cm -1.
  • Extrusion pressure To 100 g of the obtained PTFE powder, 21.7 g of a lubricant (trade name: Isopar H (registered trademark), manufactured by Exxon Co., Ltd.) is added, and the mixture is mixed in a glass bottle at room temperature for 3 minutes. The glass bottle is then left at room temperature (25 ° C.) for at least 1 hour prior to extrusion to obtain a lubricating resin.
  • the lubricating resin is paste-extruded through an orifice (diameter 2.5 mm, land length 11 mm, introduction angle 30 °) at a reduction ratio of 100: 1 at room temperature to obtain a uniform beading (extruded product).
  • the extrusion speed that is, the ram speed, is 20 inches / minute (51 cm / minute).
  • the extrusion pressure was a value obtained by measuring the load when the extrusion load was in equilibrium in paste extrusion and dividing by the cross-sectional area of the cylinder used for paste extrusion.
  • Stretch test The lubricant is removed from the beads by heating the beads obtained by the above paste extrusion at 230 ° C. for 30 minutes. Next, the beads (extruded parts) are cut to an appropriate length, each end is fixed to a clamp so that the clamp interval is 1.5 inches (38 mm), and the bead (extruded body) is heated to 300 ° C. in an air circulation furnace. .. The clamp is then released at the desired speed (stretch speed) until the separation distance corresponds to the desired stretch (total stretch) and a stretch test is performed.
  • This stretching method essentially follows the method disclosed in US Pat. No. 4,576,869, except that the extrusion speed (51 cm / min instead of 84 cm / min) is different. "Stretch" is an increase in length due to stretching and is usually expressed as a ratio to the original length. In the production method, the stretch rate is 1000% / sec and the total stretch is 2400%. In this way, a stretched bead is obtained.
  • Breaking strength A The stretched bead (produced by stretching the bead) obtained in the above stretching test was subjected to a tensile test at a speed of 300 mm / min at 25 ° C., and the strength at break was measured as the breaking strength A.
  • Breaking strength B A tensile test at a speed of 300 mm / min at 25 ° C. for a stretch bead obtained by the same method except that the clamp interval was changed to 2.0 inches (51 mm) and the stretch speed was changed to 100% / sec in the above stretch test. Was performed, and the strength at the time of breaking was measured as the breaking strength B.
  • a heat of fusion curve was drawn at a heating rate of 10 ° C./min using a TG / DTA (differential thermal weight simultaneous measurement device), and the heat of fusion curve was obtained.
  • the temperature was set to correspond to the maximum value of the endothermic peak that appears.
  • Breaking strength C The obtained wet PTFE powder was dried at 285 ° C. for 18 hours to obtain a PTFE powder.
  • the obtained PTFE powder was extruded by the same method as the above-mentioned extrusion pressure measurement method to obtain beads.
  • the obtained bead was obtained by the same method as in the above stretching test.
  • the obtained stretched bead was subjected to a tensile test at 25 ° C. at a speed of 300 mm / min, and the strength at break was measured as the breaking strength C.

Landscapes

  • Chemical & Material Sciences (AREA)
  • Health & Medical Sciences (AREA)
  • Chemical Kinetics & Catalysis (AREA)
  • Medicinal Chemistry (AREA)
  • Polymers & Plastics (AREA)
  • Organic Chemistry (AREA)
  • Dispersion Chemistry (AREA)
  • Engineering & Computer Science (AREA)
  • Materials Engineering (AREA)
  • Addition Polymer Or Copolymer, Post-Treatments, Or Chemical Modifications (AREA)
  • Polymerisation Methods In General (AREA)
  • Compositions Of Macromolecular Compounds (AREA)
  • Polymerization Catalysts (AREA)
PCT/JP2020/028764 2019-07-23 2020-07-27 フルオロポリマーの製造方法、ポリテトラフルオロエチレン組成物及びポリテトラフルオロエチレン粉末 Ceased WO2021015291A1 (ja)

Priority Applications (7)

Application Number Priority Date Filing Date Title
CN202410278602.7A CN118146601A (zh) 2019-07-23 2020-07-27 含氟聚合物的制造方法、聚四氟乙烯组合物和聚四氟乙烯粉末
US17/628,807 US20220275119A1 (en) 2019-07-23 2020-07-27 Method for producing fluoropolymer, polytetrafluoroethylene composition, and polytetrafluoroethylene powder
CN202410278605.0A CN118146427A (zh) 2019-07-23 2020-07-27 含氟聚合物的制造方法、聚四氟乙烯组合物和聚四氟乙烯粉末
EP20844000.8A EP4006063A4 (en) 2019-07-23 2020-07-27 METHOD FOR PRODUCING A FLUROPOLYMER, POLYTETRAFLUORETHYLENE COMPOSITION AND POLYTETRAFLUORETHYLENE POWDER
JP2021534095A JP7201948B2 (ja) 2019-07-23 2020-07-27 フルオロポリマーの製造方法、ポリテトラフルオロエチレン組成物及びポリテトラフルオロエチレン粉末
CN202080050431.2A CN114127131B (zh) 2019-07-23 2020-07-27 含氟聚合物的制造方法、聚四氟乙烯组合物和聚四氟乙烯粉末
JP2022203665A JP7560758B2 (ja) 2019-07-23 2022-12-20 フルオロポリマーの製造方法、ポリテトラフルオロエチレン組成物及びポリテトラフルオロエチレン粉末

Applications Claiming Priority (2)

Application Number Priority Date Filing Date Title
JP2019135724 2019-07-23
JP2019-135724 2019-07-23

Publications (1)

Publication Number Publication Date
WO2021015291A1 true WO2021015291A1 (ja) 2021-01-28

Family

ID=74193710

Family Applications (1)

Application Number Title Priority Date Filing Date
PCT/JP2020/028764 Ceased WO2021015291A1 (ja) 2019-07-23 2020-07-27 フルオロポリマーの製造方法、ポリテトラフルオロエチレン組成物及びポリテトラフルオロエチレン粉末

Country Status (5)

Country Link
US (1) US20220275119A1 (enExample)
EP (1) EP4006063A4 (enExample)
JP (2) JP7201948B2 (enExample)
CN (3) CN118146601A (enExample)
WO (1) WO2021015291A1 (enExample)

Cited By (4)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
WO2023054723A1 (ja) * 2021-09-30 2023-04-06 ダイキン工業株式会社 ポリテトラフルオロエチレンファインパウダー
WO2024034675A1 (ja) * 2022-08-10 2024-02-15 ダイキン工業株式会社 変性ポリテトラフルオロエチレン、及び、延伸体
WO2024154804A1 (ja) * 2023-01-18 2024-07-25 ダイキン工業株式会社 ポリテトラフルオロエチレン組成物
RU2843528C2 (ru) * 2021-09-30 2025-07-14 Дайкин Индастриз, Лтд. Политетрафторэтиленовый тонкодисперсный порошок

Families Citing this family (3)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
EP4563600A4 (en) * 2022-07-26 2025-08-20 Zhonghao Chenguang Res Institute Of Chemical Industry Co Ltd NON-FLUORINATED SURFACTANT, ITS PREPARATION PROCESS AND ITS USE
JP7583340B2 (ja) * 2023-01-18 2024-11-14 ダイキン工業株式会社 電気化学デバイス用合剤、電気化学デバイス用合剤シート、電極、及び、電気化学デバイス
CN118478578B (zh) * 2024-05-29 2025-06-10 四川大学 一种具有高导热和低介电损耗的ptfe复合材料及其制备方法

Citations (57)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
US3250808A (en) 1963-10-31 1966-05-10 Du Pont Fluorocarbon ethers derived from hexafluoropropylene epoxide
US3271341A (en) 1961-08-07 1966-09-06 Du Pont Aqueous colloidal dispersions of polymer
US3391099A (en) 1966-04-25 1968-07-02 Du Pont Polymerization process
JPS6149327A (ja) 1984-08-16 1986-03-11 松下電器産業株式会社 温度過昇防止装置
JPS63137906A (ja) * 1986-11-26 1988-06-09 インペリアル・ケミカル・インダストリーズ・ピーエルシー 凝固分散物グレードのテトラフルオロエチレン・ホモ−またはコポリマーの製法
JP2538783B2 (ja) 1987-09-24 1996-10-02 村樫石灰工業 株式会社 防塵処理剤組成物
JPH10147617A (ja) 1996-09-18 1998-06-02 Daikin Ind Ltd ポリテトラフルオロエチレン粉末及びその製造方法
US5804654A (en) 1995-04-28 1998-09-08 General Electric Company Tetrafluoroethylene-containing powder, process for making same, articles molded therefrom and compositions containing such powder
JP2827152B2 (ja) 1994-07-11 1998-11-18 村樫石灰工業株式会社 塵埃抑制方法
JPH1129679A (ja) 1996-07-31 1999-02-02 Mitsubishi Rayon Co Ltd ポリテトラフルオロエチレン含有混合粉体、その製造方法、それを含む熱可塑性樹脂組成物およびその成形体
JPH1149912A (ja) 1997-04-17 1999-02-23 General Electric Co <Ge> 水性フルオロポリマー分散物およびフルオロポリマー含有熱可塑性樹脂組成物の製造方法
WO1999062858A1 (de) 1998-06-02 1999-12-09 Dyneon Gmbh & Co. Kg Verfahren zur rückgewinnung von fluorierten alkansäuren aus abwässern
WO2000001741A1 (en) 1998-07-07 2000-01-13 Daikin Industries, Ltd. Process for producing fluoropolymer
JP2002201217A (ja) 2000-10-30 2002-07-19 Asahi Glass Co Ltd 強度に優れるテトラフルオロエチレン重合体
JP2003002980A (ja) 2001-06-20 2003-01-08 Mitsubishi Rayon Co Ltd ポリテトラフルオロエチレン含有粉体の製造方法
WO2003020836A1 (en) 2001-09-05 2003-03-13 3M Innovative Properties Company Fluoropolymer dispersion containing no or little low molecular weight fluorinated surfactant
JP2003119204A (ja) 2001-10-05 2003-04-23 Daikin Ind Ltd 含フッ素重合体ラテックスの製造方法
WO2004078836A1 (en) 2003-02-28 2004-09-16 3M Innovative Properties Company Fluoropolymer dispersion containing no or little low molecular weight fluorinated surfactant
US6841594B2 (en) 2002-01-04 2005-01-11 E. I. Du Pont De Nemours And Company Core-shell fluoropolymer dispersions
US6841616B2 (en) 2003-03-28 2005-01-11 Arkema Inc. Polymerization of halogen-containing monomers using siloxane surfactant
WO2005042593A1 (ja) 2003-10-31 2005-05-12 Daikin Industries, Ltd. 含フッ素重合体水性分散体の製造方法及び含フッ素重合体水性分散体
JP2005527652A (ja) 2002-01-04 2005-09-15 イー・アイ・デュポン・ドウ・ヌムール・アンド・カンパニー 濃縮フルオロポリマー分散液
WO2006054612A1 (ja) 2004-11-16 2006-05-26 Daikin Industries, Ltd. 変性ポリテトラフルオロエチレンファインパウダー及び変性ポリテトラフルオロエチレン成形体
WO2007000812A1 (ja) 2005-06-29 2007-01-04 Nippo Corporation 塵埃抑制処理方法
WO2007004250A1 (ja) 2005-06-29 2007-01-11 Du Pont-Mitsui Fluorochemicals Co., Ltd. 塵埃処理剤組成物
US20070015937A1 (en) 2005-07-15 2007-01-18 3M Innovative Properties Company Process for recovery of fluorinated carboxylic acid surfactants from exhaust gas
US20070015866A1 (en) 2005-07-15 2007-01-18 3M Innovative Properties Company Aqueous emulsion polymerization of fluorinated monomers using a fluorinated surfactant
US20070015865A1 (en) 2005-07-15 2007-01-18 3M Innovative Properties Company Aqueous emulsion polymerization of fluorinated monomers using a perfluoropolyether surfactant
JP2007016209A (ja) * 2005-06-06 2007-01-25 Asahi Glass Co Ltd ポリテトラフルオロエチレン水性分散液およびその製造方法
WO2007046377A1 (ja) 2005-10-20 2007-04-26 Asahi Glass Company, Limited 溶融成形可能なフッ素樹脂の製造方法
WO2007046345A1 (ja) 2005-10-17 2007-04-26 Asahi Glass Company, Limited ポリテトラフルオロエチレン水性乳化液、それから得られるポリテトラフルオロエチレンファインパウダーおよび多孔体
WO2007046482A1 (ja) 2005-10-20 2007-04-26 Asahi Glass Company, Limited ポリテトラフルオロエチレン水性分散液およびその製品
JP2007511657A (ja) * 2003-11-17 2007-05-10 スリーエム イノベイティブ プロパティズ カンパニー 少量のフッ素化界面活性剤を有するポリテトラフルオロエチレンの水性分散液
US20070117914A1 (en) 2005-11-24 2007-05-24 3M Innovative Properties Company Fluorinated surfactants for use in making a fluoropolymer
US20070142541A1 (en) 2005-12-21 2007-06-21 3M Innovative Properties Company Fluorinated surfactants for making fluoropolymers
WO2007119526A1 (ja) 2006-04-14 2007-10-25 Bridgestone Corporation インラインヒータ及びその製造方法
US20070276103A1 (en) 2006-05-25 2007-11-29 3M Innovative Properties Company Fluorinated Surfactants
US20080015319A1 (en) 2006-07-13 2008-01-17 Klaus Hintzer Explosion taming surfactants for the production of perfluoropolymers
WO2008060461A1 (en) 2006-11-09 2008-05-22 E. I. Du Pont De Nemours And Company Aqueous polymerization of fluorinated monomer using polymerization agent comprising fluoropolyether acid or salt and short chain fluorosurfactant
WO2011014715A2 (en) 2009-07-31 2011-02-03 3M Innovative Properties Company Fluoropolymer compositions containing a polyol compound and methods of making them
JP2011520020A (ja) 2008-05-09 2011-07-14 イー・アイ・デュポン・ドウ・ヌムール・アンド・カンパニー フルオロポリマー樹脂の製造に使用するフルオロエーテルカルボン酸またはその塩の削減
WO2012002038A1 (ja) 2010-06-30 2012-01-05 ダイキン工業株式会社 含フッ素重合体のオルガノゾル組成物
JP2012513530A (ja) * 2008-12-23 2012-06-14 イー・アイ・デュポン・ドウ・ヌムール・アンド・カンパニー フッ素化イオノマーの分散微粒子を使用する水性重合により製造されるフルオロポリマー
WO2013027850A1 (ja) 2011-08-25 2013-02-28 ダイキン工業株式会社 ポリテトラフルオロエチレン水性分散液の製造方法
WO2013146947A1 (ja) 2012-03-27 2013-10-03 ダイキン工業株式会社 フルオロポリマー水性分散液
WO2013146950A1 (ja) 2012-03-30 2013-10-03 ダイキン工業株式会社 非イオン性界面活性剤組成物、及び、フルオロポリマー水性分散液
JP2013542308A (ja) 2010-11-09 2013-11-21 イー・アイ・デュポン・ドウ・ヌムール・アンド・カンパニー 炭化水素界面活性剤を用いたフルオロモノマーの水性重合
JP2013542310A (ja) 2010-11-09 2013-11-21 イー・アイ・デュポン・ドウ・ヌムール・アンド・カンパニー 水性分散体フルオロモノマーの重合における炭化水素含有界面活性剤のテロゲン性挙動の低下
JP2013542309A (ja) 2010-11-09 2013-11-21 イー・アイ・デュポン・ドウ・ヌムール・アンド・カンパニー フルオロモノマーの水性重合における核形成
WO2013189826A1 (en) 2012-06-20 2013-12-27 Solvay Specialty Polymers Italy S.P.A. Tetrafluoroethylene copolymers
WO2013189824A1 (en) 2012-06-20 2013-12-27 Solvay Specialty Polymers Italy S.P.A. Tetrafluoroethylene copolymers
WO2014084399A1 (ja) 2012-11-30 2014-06-05 ダイキン工業株式会社 ポリテトラフルオロエチレン水性分散液及びポリテトラフルオロエチレンファインパウダー
WO2014084397A1 (ja) * 2012-11-30 2014-06-05 ダイキン工業株式会社 ポリテトラフルオロエチレン水性分散液の製造方法
US20140228531A1 (en) 2008-07-08 2014-08-14 Solvay Solexis S.P.A. Method for manufacturing fluoropolymers
JP2014240475A (ja) * 2013-05-17 2014-12-25 ダイキン工業株式会社 フルオロポリマー水性分散液の製造方法
WO2019065644A1 (ja) 2017-09-28 2019-04-04 Ａｇｃ株式会社 変性ポリテトラフルオロエチレン、成形物、延伸多孔体の製造方法
WO2020022355A1 (ja) * 2018-07-23 2020-01-30 ダイキン工業株式会社 ポリテトラフルオロエチレン及び延伸体

Family Cites Families (13)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
DE4022405A1 (de) * 1990-07-13 1992-01-16 Hoechst Ag Verfahren zur herstellung von tetrafluorethylen-polymerisat in waessriger suspension
EP1201689B1 (en) * 2000-10-30 2008-09-24 Asahi Glass Company, Limited Tetrafluoroethylene polymer for stretching
US7514484B2 (en) * 2005-06-06 2009-04-07 Asahi Glass Company, Limited Aqueous dispersion of polytetrafluoroethylene and process for its production
US7678859B2 (en) * 2006-09-14 2010-03-16 3M Innovative Properties Company Preparation and stabilization of fluoropolymer dispersions
JP5439186B2 (ja) * 2006-11-09 2014-03-12 イー・アイ・デュポン・ドウ・ヌムール・アンド・カンパニー フルオロポリエーテル酸または塩および炭化水素系界面活性剤を含む重合剤を用いるフッ素化モノマーの水性重合
US9175110B2 (en) * 2012-05-09 2015-11-03 The Chemours Company Fc, Llc Fluoropolymer resin treatment employing melt extrusion and exposure to oxygen source to reduce discoloration
JP6269671B2 (ja) 2013-07-18 2018-01-31 旭硝子株式会社 含フッ素重合体水性分散液の製造方法、含フッ素重合体水性分散液および含フッ素重合体
JP2018005971A (ja) 2014-11-13 2018-01-11 旭硝子株式会社 蓄電デバイス用バインダー組成物の製造方法
EP3339330B1 (en) * 2015-08-19 2022-08-03 AGC Inc. Production methods for aqueous emulsion, fine powder and stretched porous body of modified polytetrafluoroethylene
CN107868162B (zh) * 2016-09-26 2020-07-14 中昊晨光化工研究院有限公司 一种高分子量聚四氟乙烯分散树脂及其制备方法
EP3858871A1 (en) * 2017-03-31 2021-08-04 Daikin Industries, Ltd. Composition comprising a fluoropolymer
CN113717300B (zh) * 2017-03-31 2023-11-17 大金工业株式会社 含氟聚合物的制造方法、聚合用表面活性剂和表面活性剂的使用
JP7193747B2 (ja) * 2018-03-07 2022-12-21 ダイキン工業株式会社 フルオロポリマーの製造方法

Patent Citations (60)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
US3271341A (en) 1961-08-07 1966-09-06 Du Pont Aqueous colloidal dispersions of polymer
US3250808A (en) 1963-10-31 1966-05-10 Du Pont Fluorocarbon ethers derived from hexafluoropropylene epoxide
US3391099A (en) 1966-04-25 1968-07-02 Du Pont Polymerization process
JPS6149327A (ja) 1984-08-16 1986-03-11 松下電器産業株式会社 温度過昇防止装置
JPS63137906A (ja) * 1986-11-26 1988-06-09 インペリアル・ケミカル・インダストリーズ・ピーエルシー 凝固分散物グレードのテトラフルオロエチレン・ホモ−またはコポリマーの製法
JP2538783B2 (ja) 1987-09-24 1996-10-02 村樫石灰工業 株式会社 防塵処理剤組成物
JP2827152B2 (ja) 1994-07-11 1998-11-18 村樫石灰工業株式会社 塵埃抑制方法
US5804654A (en) 1995-04-28 1998-09-08 General Electric Company Tetrafluoroethylene-containing powder, process for making same, articles molded therefrom and compositions containing such powder
JPH1129679A (ja) 1996-07-31 1999-02-02 Mitsubishi Rayon Co Ltd ポリテトラフルオロエチレン含有混合粉体、その製造方法、それを含む熱可塑性樹脂組成物およびその成形体
JPH10147617A (ja) 1996-09-18 1998-06-02 Daikin Ind Ltd ポリテトラフルオロエチレン粉末及びその製造方法
JPH1149912A (ja) 1997-04-17 1999-02-23 General Electric Co <Ge> 水性フルオロポリマー分散物およびフルオロポリマー含有熱可塑性樹脂組成物の製造方法
WO1999062858A1 (de) 1998-06-02 1999-12-09 Dyneon Gmbh & Co. Kg Verfahren zur rückgewinnung von fluorierten alkansäuren aus abwässern
WO2000001741A1 (en) 1998-07-07 2000-01-13 Daikin Industries, Ltd. Process for producing fluoropolymer
JP2002201217A (ja) 2000-10-30 2002-07-19 Asahi Glass Co Ltd 強度に優れるテトラフルオロエチレン重合体
JP2003002980A (ja) 2001-06-20 2003-01-08 Mitsubishi Rayon Co Ltd ポリテトラフルオロエチレン含有粉体の製造方法
WO2003020836A1 (en) 2001-09-05 2003-03-13 3M Innovative Properties Company Fluoropolymer dispersion containing no or little low molecular weight fluorinated surfactant
JP2003119204A (ja) 2001-10-05 2003-04-23 Daikin Ind Ltd 含フッ素重合体ラテックスの製造方法
JP2005527652A (ja) 2002-01-04 2005-09-15 イー・アイ・デュポン・ドウ・ヌムール・アンド・カンパニー 濃縮フルオロポリマー分散液
US6841594B2 (en) 2002-01-04 2005-01-11 E. I. Du Pont De Nemours And Company Core-shell fluoropolymer dispersions
WO2004078836A1 (en) 2003-02-28 2004-09-16 3M Innovative Properties Company Fluoropolymer dispersion containing no or little low molecular weight fluorinated surfactant
US6841616B2 (en) 2003-03-28 2005-01-11 Arkema Inc. Polymerization of halogen-containing monomers using siloxane surfactant
WO2005042593A1 (ja) 2003-10-31 2005-05-12 Daikin Industries, Ltd. 含フッ素重合体水性分散体の製造方法及び含フッ素重合体水性分散体
JP2007511657A (ja) * 2003-11-17 2007-05-10 スリーエム イノベイティブ プロパティズ カンパニー 少量のフッ素化界面活性剤を有するポリテトラフルオロエチレンの水性分散液
WO2006054612A1 (ja) 2004-11-16 2006-05-26 Daikin Industries, Ltd. 変性ポリテトラフルオロエチレンファインパウダー及び変性ポリテトラフルオロエチレン成形体
JP2007016209A (ja) * 2005-06-06 2007-01-25 Asahi Glass Co Ltd ポリテトラフルオロエチレン水性分散液およびその製造方法
WO2007000812A1 (ja) 2005-06-29 2007-01-04 Nippo Corporation 塵埃抑制処理方法
WO2007004250A1 (ja) 2005-06-29 2007-01-11 Du Pont-Mitsui Fluorochemicals Co., Ltd. 塵埃処理剤組成物
US20070027251A1 (en) 2005-07-15 2007-02-01 3M Innovative Properties Company Method of removing fluorinated carboxylic acid from aqueous liquid
US20070015864A1 (en) 2005-07-15 2007-01-18 3M Innovative Properties Company Method of making fluoropolymer dispersion
US20070015865A1 (en) 2005-07-15 2007-01-18 3M Innovative Properties Company Aqueous emulsion polymerization of fluorinated monomers using a perfluoropolyether surfactant
US20070015866A1 (en) 2005-07-15 2007-01-18 3M Innovative Properties Company Aqueous emulsion polymerization of fluorinated monomers using a fluorinated surfactant
US20070025902A1 (en) 2005-07-15 2007-02-01 3M Innovative Properties Company Recovery of fluorinated carboxylic acid from adsorbent particles
US20070015937A1 (en) 2005-07-15 2007-01-18 3M Innovative Properties Company Process for recovery of fluorinated carboxylic acid surfactants from exhaust gas
WO2007046345A1 (ja) 2005-10-17 2007-04-26 Asahi Glass Company, Limited ポリテトラフルオロエチレン水性乳化液、それから得られるポリテトラフルオロエチレンファインパウダーおよび多孔体
WO2007046377A1 (ja) 2005-10-20 2007-04-26 Asahi Glass Company, Limited 溶融成形可能なフッ素樹脂の製造方法
WO2007046482A1 (ja) 2005-10-20 2007-04-26 Asahi Glass Company, Limited ポリテトラフルオロエチレン水性分散液およびその製品
US20070117914A1 (en) 2005-11-24 2007-05-24 3M Innovative Properties Company Fluorinated surfactants for use in making a fluoropolymer
US20070142541A1 (en) 2005-12-21 2007-06-21 3M Innovative Properties Company Fluorinated surfactants for making fluoropolymers
WO2007119526A1 (ja) 2006-04-14 2007-10-25 Bridgestone Corporation インラインヒータ及びその製造方法
US20070276103A1 (en) 2006-05-25 2007-11-29 3M Innovative Properties Company Fluorinated Surfactants
US20080015319A1 (en) 2006-07-13 2008-01-17 Klaus Hintzer Explosion taming surfactants for the production of perfluoropolymers
WO2008060461A1 (en) 2006-11-09 2008-05-22 E. I. Du Pont De Nemours And Company Aqueous polymerization of fluorinated monomer using polymerization agent comprising fluoropolyether acid or salt and short chain fluorosurfactant
JP2011520020A (ja) 2008-05-09 2011-07-14 イー・アイ・デュポン・ドウ・ヌムール・アンド・カンパニー フルオロポリマー樹脂の製造に使用するフルオロエーテルカルボン酸またはその塩の削減
US20140228531A1 (en) 2008-07-08 2014-08-14 Solvay Solexis S.P.A. Method for manufacturing fluoropolymers
JP2012513530A (ja) * 2008-12-23 2012-06-14 イー・アイ・デュポン・ドウ・ヌムール・アンド・カンパニー フッ素化イオノマーの分散微粒子を使用する水性重合により製造されるフルオロポリマー
WO2011014715A2 (en) 2009-07-31 2011-02-03 3M Innovative Properties Company Fluoropolymer compositions containing a polyol compound and methods of making them
WO2012002038A1 (ja) 2010-06-30 2012-01-05 ダイキン工業株式会社 含フッ素重合体のオルガノゾル組成物
JP2013542310A (ja) 2010-11-09 2013-11-21 イー・アイ・デュポン・ドウ・ヌムール・アンド・カンパニー 水性分散体フルオロモノマーの重合における炭化水素含有界面活性剤のテロゲン性挙動の低下
JP2013542309A (ja) 2010-11-09 2013-11-21 イー・アイ・デュポン・ドウ・ヌムール・アンド・カンパニー フルオロモノマーの水性重合における核形成
JP2013542308A (ja) 2010-11-09 2013-11-21 イー・アイ・デュポン・ドウ・ヌムール・アンド・カンパニー 炭化水素界面活性剤を用いたフルオロモノマーの水性重合
WO2013027850A1 (ja) 2011-08-25 2013-02-28 ダイキン工業株式会社 ポリテトラフルオロエチレン水性分散液の製造方法
WO2013146947A1 (ja) 2012-03-27 2013-10-03 ダイキン工業株式会社 フルオロポリマー水性分散液
WO2013146950A1 (ja) 2012-03-30 2013-10-03 ダイキン工業株式会社 非イオン性界面活性剤組成物、及び、フルオロポリマー水性分散液
WO2013189826A1 (en) 2012-06-20 2013-12-27 Solvay Specialty Polymers Italy S.P.A. Tetrafluoroethylene copolymers
WO2013189824A1 (en) 2012-06-20 2013-12-27 Solvay Specialty Polymers Italy S.P.A. Tetrafluoroethylene copolymers
WO2014084399A1 (ja) 2012-11-30 2014-06-05 ダイキン工業株式会社 ポリテトラフルオロエチレン水性分散液及びポリテトラフルオロエチレンファインパウダー
WO2014084397A1 (ja) * 2012-11-30 2014-06-05 ダイキン工業株式会社 ポリテトラフルオロエチレン水性分散液の製造方法
JP2014240475A (ja) * 2013-05-17 2014-12-25 ダイキン工業株式会社 フルオロポリマー水性分散液の製造方法
WO2019065644A1 (ja) 2017-09-28 2019-04-04 Ａｇｃ株式会社 変性ポリテトラフルオロエチレン、成形物、延伸多孔体の製造方法
WO2020022355A1 (ja) * 2018-07-23 2020-01-30 ダイキン工業株式会社 ポリテトラフルオロエチレン及び延伸体

Non-Patent Citations (4)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Title
"Rompp, Lexikon Chemie", 1999, GEORG THIEME VERLAG, article "Alkyl polygylcoside"
J. APPL. POLYMER SCI., vol. 57, 1995, pages 797
R.S. M. HILL: "Silicone Surfactants", MARCEL DEKKER, INC.
See also references of EP4006063A4

Cited By (9)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
WO2023054723A1 (ja) * 2021-09-30 2023-04-06 ダイキン工業株式会社 ポリテトラフルオロエチレンファインパウダー
JP2023051890A (ja) * 2021-09-30 2023-04-11 ダイキン工業株式会社 ポリテトラフルオロエチレンファインパウダー
JP7657762B2 (ja) 2021-09-30 2025-04-07 ダイキン工業株式会社 ポリテトラフルオロエチレンファインパウダー
RU2843528C2 (ru) * 2021-09-30 2025-07-14 Дайкин Индастриз, Лтд. Политетрафторэтиленовый тонкодисперсный порошок
WO2024034675A1 (ja) * 2022-08-10 2024-02-15 ダイキン工業株式会社 変性ポリテトラフルオロエチレン、及び、延伸体
JP2024025761A (ja) * 2022-08-10 2024-02-26 ダイキン工業株式会社 変性ポリテトラフルオロエチレン、及び、延伸体
WO2024154804A1 (ja) * 2023-01-18 2024-07-25 ダイキン工業株式会社 ポリテトラフルオロエチレン組成物
JP2024102031A (ja) * 2023-01-18 2024-07-30 ダイキン工業株式会社 ポリテトラフルオロエチレン組成物
JP7538458B2 (ja) 2023-01-18 2024-08-22 ダイキン工業株式会社 ポリテトラフルオロエチレン組成物

Also Published As

Publication number Publication date
CN114127131B (zh) 2024-04-02
EP4006063A4 (en) 2023-10-25
CN114127131A (zh) 2022-03-01
EP4006063A1 (en) 2022-06-01
JP7560758B2 (ja) 2024-10-03
JP7201948B2 (ja) 2023-01-11
JP2023030080A (ja) 2023-03-07
CN118146601A (zh) 2024-06-07
US20220275119A1 (en) 2022-09-01
CN118146427A (zh) 2024-06-07
JPWO2021015291A1 (enExample) 2021-01-28

Similar Documents

Publication Publication Date Title
JP7623608B2 (ja) フルオロポリマーの製造方法
JP7560758B2 (ja) フルオロポリマーの製造方法、ポリテトラフルオロエチレン組成物及びポリテトラフルオロエチレン粉末
JPWO2019172382A1 (ja) フルオロポリマーの製造方法
JP7518435B2 (ja) フルオロポリマー水性分散液の製造方法及びフルオロポリマー水性分散液
JP2023085494A (ja) フルオロポリマー粉末の製造方法
JP6939916B2 (ja) フルオロポリマーの製造方法、重合用界面活性剤、界面活性剤の使用及び組成物
JP7583305B2 (ja) テトラフルオロエチレン重合体の製造方法及び組成物
JP2025081683A (ja) フルオロポリマー水性分散液の製造方法
JP7747987B2 (ja) フルオロポリマー組成物の製造方法およびフルオロポリマー組成物
JP7564452B2 (ja) フルオロポリマー水性分散液の製造方法
JP7648942B2 (ja) フッ素樹脂の製造方法、フッ素樹脂および水性分散液
RU2831039C2 (ru) Способ производства фторполимера, фторполимер и жидкая водная дисперсия
JP7787462B2 (ja) フルオロポリマーの製造方法
US12503560B2 (en) Method for producing fluoropolymer powder
WO2024248144A1 (ja) フルオロポリマー水性分散液の製造方法およびフルオロポリマー水性分散液
WO2023210819A1 (ja) フルオロポリマーの製造方法

Legal Events

Date Code Title Description
121 Ep: the epo has been informed by wipo that ep was designated in this application

Ref document number: 20844000

Country of ref document: EP

Kind code of ref document: A1

ENP Entry into the national phase

Ref document number: 2021534095

Country of ref document: JP

Kind code of ref document: A

NENP Non-entry into the national phase

Ref country code: DE

ENP Entry into the national phase

Ref document number: 2020844000

Country of ref document: EP

Effective date: 20220223